a product message image
{' '} {' '}
Limited time offer
SAVE % on your upgrade

Page 1

PureSample

pr 1 od00 uc 0+ ts !

TM

Laboratory &

EQUIPMENT SUPPLIES

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

REFRACTOMETERS

MICROSCOPES

BATHS & CIRCULATORS

FUME HOODS & CABINETS

www.ereinc.com

ORDERS, SERVICE & TECH SUPPORT:

1-888-287-3732

TEL

514-326-8852

E-MAIL

sales@ereinc.com

CENTRIFUGES


ERE Inc. Environmental Remediation Equipment Inc. 8605 Champs d’Eau Montreal, Quebec, Canada H1P 3B8 Tel: (514) 326 8852 • Fax: (514) 326 8961

Ordering Information You can order by phone, fax, email, and online. Our PureSample™ customer service staff will be happy to assist you.

Telephone: 1-888-287-3732 Fax: 514-326-8961 Email: sales@ereinc.com Register online today and receive our monthly promotions and product updates:

www.ereinc.com

Discounts available for bulk orders or yearly contracts

Our products are subject to change.


Table of Contents Air Sampling

1

Sampling for Gel-Impaction Slides, Sampling for Viable Bioaerosols

50

Electrophoresis Systems & Transilluminators, Thermal Cyclers

Anaerobic Chambers

2

Autoclaves

3

Balances

4

Baths & Circulators

Molecular Biology

12

Baths, Immersion Circulators, Cooling & Heating Circulator Baths

Oxygen & Carbon Dioxide Testing

52

pH

54

Plant Physiology

61

Refractometers

66

Refractometers, Polarimeters

Centrifuges

16

Sieves & Sieve Shakers

74

Cryoscopes

24

Shakers & Stirrers

77

Fume Hoods & Cabinets

25

Surface Tension

81

Incubators

27

Ultrasonic Sonifiers & Baths

82

Ultrasonics, Ultrasonic Cleaners

Microscopes

32

Water Analysis

86

Water Purification

90

General Laboratory Supplies

93

Elite Compound Microscopes, Compound Microscopes, Inverted Microscopes, Zoom Stereomicroscopes, Elite Microscope Cameras, Basic Microscope Cameras, Meiji Techno Microscopes, Microscope Accessories

Mills & Grinders

44

Jaw Crushers, Rotor Mills, Cutting Mills, Knife Mills, Disc Mills, Mortar Grinders, Mixer Mills, Planetary Ball Mills


AIR SAMPLING

Sampling for Gel-Impaction Slides

Buck Bio-Culture™

Buck BioSlideTM

The Bio-Culture™ sampling pump provides selectable, continuous (6 to 8 hours), constant sample flowrate and is simple to operate. Its quiet operation allows unobtrusive sampling in IAQ, medical, clean room, public & residential building applications.

Model B1020 Bioaerosol sampling pump is compact, lightweight, 10 - 20 LPM controlled flow sampling pump for bioaerosol sampling with Impaction-Gel. Both an LED & audible alarm provide confirmation of end-of-sample or depleted battery. Convenient timer for 1, 2, 5, 10 minute samples & continuous mode. A full five hours of continuous operation (at 15 LPM). It comes with a calibrated rotameter for quick flow check or calibration and a charger.

Features • Holds 90 mm agar Petri dish • Flows up to 120 LPM • 380 holes - 1 mm diameter • Convenient timer for 1, 2, 5,10 minute samples & continuous mode • Tripod mount to allow 90 degree sampling • Sampling head is easily sterilized with gas torch or autoclave • 4 times the flow rate of an Anderson sampler

Sampling for Viable Bioaerosols MicroFlowTM Microbiological Air Sampler The MicroFlowTM Microbiological Air Sampler is used for sampling biocontaminants (bacteria, molds, spores, fungi, pollen, etc.) in any production or environmentally controlled area. MicroFlowTM allows to verify & quantify microorganism presence.

Buck BioAireTM Model B520 Bioaerosol sampling pump is compact, lightweight, 5 - 20 LPM controlled flow sampling pump for bioaerosol sampling. Accommodates the BioAireTM cassettes as well as the Air-O-CellTM. Both an LED & audible alarm provide confirmation of end-of-sample or depleted battery. Convenient timer for 1, 2, 5, 10 minute samples & continuous mode. A full five hours of continuous operation (at 15 LPM). It comes with a calibrated rotameter for quick flow check or calibration & charger.

1

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Features • Autoclavable anodized aluminum support plate & aluminum sampling head with conical holes; 60 mm head: 219 holes (1 mm) 90 mm head: 380 holes (1 mm) • Manual, sequential, or programmable with delayed start • Five flow rates 30, 60, 90, 100, 120 LPM • Data logging up to 99 samples • Remote operation via infrared control • Sample in horizontal or vertical without tripod auxilium • 5 languages: English, Spanish, German, French & Italian

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Anaerobic Chambers SHEL LAB BacBASIC

Ergonomically designed arm port doors offer maximum reach and comfort! The BacBASIC is the perfect auxiliary chamber option for overflow work, extra plate storage and emergency back-up for your primary chamber!

The SHEL LAB BacBASIC offers • An ample, ergonomic, user-friendly work station with a space-saving exterior footprint. • Excellent lighting and visibility. • A quick-entry, gloveless sleeve system. • A rapid auto-purge pass box for introducing Petri plates, specimens and supplies. Purge time is less than 50 seconds. • Incubated storage capacity for up to 150 Petri plates. • Incubation temperature range from ambient temperature to 42ºC. • Easy change anatox.

SHEL LAB BACTRON Anaerobic Chambers

The SHEL LAB BACTRON anaerobic & environmental chamber line offers multiple high-value features and essential benefits. Incubator Petri plate capacities and chamber dimensions accommodate varied laboratory needs and budgets. Ranging from 100 to 900 Petri plate incubator capacities, the BACTRON chamber line can address a myriad of anaerobic, hypoxic or other special gas environment applications.

ANAEROBIC CHAMBERS

The BacBASIC is the ideal, entry level chamber for performance of truly anaerobic microbiology. Move beyond jars and the unnecessary exposure of your anaerobes to deadly oxygen.

Included with each system • Vacuum pump with fittings and hoses • Two year limited warranty • Two catalyst cartridges • Petri plate racks • Sleeve assembly with small cuffs (Large and medium cuffs are also available)

The complete environmental microbiology workstation: anaerobic, hypoxic, & other gas environments BACTRON Models BACTRON I - Plate Capacity 150 BACTRON II - Plate Capacity 208 BACTRON III - Plate Capacity 308 BACTRON IV - Plate Capacity 600 BACTRON IV 900 - Plate Capacity 900 Bactrox Hypoxia Chamber

Applications Anaerobic microbiology assays Clinical microbiology Anaerobic tissue culture research Anaerobic bacteriology Hypoxic tissue culture research Microaerophilic / hypoxic Quality control Packaging R&D Industrial research

Bactrox Hypoxia Chamber This latest addition to the SHEL LAB Bactron line offers precise oxygen control ranging from 1% to 20% for microaerophilic bacteriology and hypoxic tissue or cell culture applications. With the additional capability of controlling carbon dioxide from 1% to 20%. The SHEL LAB Bactrox permits oxygen and carbon dioxide control in increments of 1/10th of a percent. Benefits • Ultra bright LED examination lights • Stainless steel body construction • Independent gas controls • RS232 data collection • Condensation control • Immediate access to workspace via sleeves • Standard microscope adapter accessories • PC calibration of oxygen sensor

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

2


Autoclaves

Featuring closed door drying

AUTOCLAVES

Pelton & Crane Delta Q Sterilizer • Approved for hand piece sterilization • Closed door filtered air drying ensures wet packs and pouches dry without compromising sterility of instruments by airborne contaminants • Variable timed drying cycle saves time by giving operator the flexibility to set drying time according to load size • Automatic chamber preheat maximizes productivity by shortening cycle times • Electronic temperature and time control systematically monitor sterilization conditions in chamber to ensure cycle completion • One custom and four automatic preprogrammed sterilization settings allow you to select the appropriate cycle according to type of load • Digital function display allows easy and accurate monitoring of sterilization cycle • Vent valve will open and the P-2 alarm will display if the chamber pressure exceeds 240 kPa • Safety valve opens as backup protection should the chamber pressure exceed 262 kPa • Chamber temperature is monitored by a surface sensor with overheat protection should the temperature of the heating elements reach 180°C • In case of electrical power interruption during the sterilization cycle, pressure in the chamber is automatically vented to the atmosphere and display is blank • Optional time / temperature recorder for office documentation • Designed and built to ASME specifications • Six month replacement / three year limited parts warranty

Closed Door Drying Closed door drying is essential, as it prevents the interruption of the full sterilization process. Competitive models allow open-door drying, which exposes wet instruments to potentially harmful airborne contaminants.

3

Cassette Rack Optional cassette rack accommodates up to three large and three small cassettes per load.

Specifications

Delta Q 8

Chamber Size

8 1/4" x 14" (21 x 36 cm)

9 7/8" x 17 1/2" (25.1 x 44.5 cm)

Chamber Capacity

739 cu. in. (12,110 cu. cm) Holds 2 European trays

1340 cu. in. (22,019 cu. cm) Holds 3 large or 9 small Hu-Friedy Cassettes or 3 European trays

Start-Up Time (to 134°C)

10 – 13 minutes warm

12 minutes warm

Sterilization Time

16 minutes warm (unwrapped)

16 minutes warm (unwrapped)

Drying Cycle Time

30 minutes preprogrammed, variable 0 – 99 minutes

30 minutes preprogrammed, variable 0 – 99 minute

Outside Dimensions

17 1/2" wide x 19 3/4" deep x 12 1/4" high (44 cm wide x 50 cm deep x 31 cm high)

19 1/4" wide x 23 5/8" deep x 14" high (49 cm wide x 60 cm deep x 36 cm high

Electrical

110-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (ETL/cETL) 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz (ETL/cETL)

110-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (ETL/cETL) 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz (ETL/cETL)

Amp Circuit

Unit requires dedicated 20 amp circuit

Unit requires dedicated 20 amp circuit

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Enhanced Ergonomics Proper ergonomics is important to the health and well being of all dental office associates. The Delta Q features an ergonomic handle and a user- friendly technology interface.

Delta Q 10

Innovative PC Cable The Delta Q features an innovative PC cable which allows the user and / or technician to download sterilization history to his or her PC, thus eliminating the need for costly printers and paper.

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Balances OHAUS Discovery Semi-Micro and Analytical Balances

Specifications

DV114C

DV214C

DV314C

DV215CD

Capacity

110 g

210 g

310 g

81*/210 g

Readability

0.1 mg

0.1 mg

0.1 mg

0.01*/0.1 mg

Repeatability (Std.dev.)

0.1 mg

0.1 mg

0.2 mg

0.02*/0.1 mg

Linearity

±0.2 mg

±0.2 mg

±0.5 mg

±0.03*/0.2 mg

BALANCES

The Professional’s Choice for Analytical Applications The OHAUS Discovery series of semi-micro and analytical balances combine unmatched weighing performance with OHAUS’ innovative SmarText™ software. The Discovery features durable glass and steel construction and advanced AutoCal™ internal calibration, performance you would expect to find only in premium-priced balances.

Milligram, Gram, Carat, Ounce, Ounce Troy, Grain, Pennyweight, Momme, Hong Kong Tael, Singapore Tael, Taiwan Tael, Custom

Weighing Units * FineRange™

OHAUS Adventurer® Pro Analytical and Precision Balances The OHAUS Adventurer Pro Series has established itself as the industry’s most versatile balance. It counts, it sums, it holds and it delivers traceable results. No other balance in its class offers as many features in a compact design.

Technical Specifications, Precision Balances Models with InCalTM Internal Calibration

Not Available

AV213C

AV313C

Models without InCalTM Internal Calibration

AV53

AV213

AV313

Capacity

51 g

210 g

Readability

0.001 g

Repeatability (Std. dev.)

0.001 g

Linearity

±0.002 g

±0.002 g

±0.002 g

±0.02 g

±0.02 g

±0.02 g

±0.02 g

±0.02 g

±0.2 g

±0.2 g

±0.2 g

Stabilization Time

2.5 sec

3 sec

3 sec

3 sec

3 sec

3 sec

3 sec

3 sec

3 sec

3 sec

3 sec

AV212C

AV412C

AV812C

AV2102C

AV3102C

AV2101C

AV4101C

AV8101C

AV212

AV412

AV812

AV2102

AV3102

AV2101

AV4101

AV8101

310 g

210 g

410 g

810 g

2100 g

3100 g

2100 g

4100 g

8100 g

0.001 g

0.001 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.001 g

0.001 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

OHAUS Scout® Pro Portable Balances Designed for use in laboratory, industrial or education applications, the OHAUS Scout Pro features easy-to-use two-button operation, a high-contrast LCD display, multiple weighing units, four application modes, and the option of either RS232 or USB connectivity, the Scout Pro is the portable balance for your needs!

Specifications

SP202

SP402

SP602

SP401

SP601

SP2001

SP4001

SP6001

SP6000

Capacity

200 g

400 g

600 g

400 g

600 g

2000 g

4000 g

6000 g

6000 g

Readability

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

1g

Repeatability (Std. Dev.)

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

1g

Linearity

±0.01 g

±0.01 g

±0.02 g

±0.1 g

±0.1 g

±0.1 g

±0.1 g

±0.2 g

±1 g

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

4


OHAUS FD Stainless Steel Compact Scales

BALANCES

The OHAUS Food Portioning Scale is a rugged, multi-use portioning scale designed for use in food service applications. Ideally suited for food portioning and checkweighing, the FD Food Portioning Scale combines an easily cleaned design, fast display and high precision loadcell. Designed for use in restaurants, bakeries, food manufacturing and other areas requiring fast operation and flexibility, the OHAUS Food Portioning Scale offers durability and cleanliness in one economical design. Specifications

FD3

FD6

FD15

Capacity x Default Readability

3 kg x 0.0005 kg 3,000 g x 0.5 g 6 lb x 0.001 lb 96 oz x 0.02 oz or 1/4 oz 6 lb:0 oz x 0.1 oz or 1/4 oz 3 kg x 0.001 kg

6 kg x 0.001 kg 6,000 g x 1 g 15 lb x 0.002 lb 240 oz x 0.05 oz or 1/4 oz 15 lb:0 oz x 0.1 oz or 1/4 oz 6 kg x 0.002 kg

15 kg x 0.002 kg 15,000 g x 2 g 30 lb x 0.005 lb 480 oz x 0.1 oz or 1/4 oz 30 lb:0 oz x 0.1 oz or 1/4 oz 15 kg x 0.005 kg

Capacity x Readability Certified / Approved

3,000 g x 1 g 6 lb x 0.002 lb 96 oz x 0.05 oz or 1/4 oz

6,000 g x 2 g 15 lb x 0.005 lb 240 oz x 0.1 oz or 1/4 oz

15,000 g x 5 g 30 lb x 0.01 lb 480 oz x 0.2 oz or 1/4 oz

Specifications

FD3H

FD6H

FD15H

Capacity x Readability Maximum Displayed Readability

3 kg x 0.0001 kg 3,000 g x 0.1 g 6 lb x 0.0002 lb 96 oz x 0.005 oz 96 oz x 1/4 oz 6 lb 0 oz x 0.1 oz 6 lb 0 oz x 1/4 oz

6 kg x 0.0002 kg 6,000 g x 0.2 g 15 lb x 0.001 lb 240 oz x 0.01 oz 240 oz x 1/4 oz 15 lb 0 oz x 0.1 oz 15 lb 0 oz x 1/4oz

15 kg x 0.001 kg 15,000 g x 1 g 30 lb x 0.001 lb 480 oz x 0.02 oz 480 oz x 1/4 oz 30 lb 0 oz x 0.1 oz 30 lb 0 oz x 1/4 oz

OHAUS Defender™ 3000 Washdown Bench Scales Basic Level Bench Scales are ideal for general industrial use and feature all stainless steel construction with NEMA 4X/IP65 protected indicator. Application modes include weighing, simple parts counting, and weighs in lb, oz, lb:oz, g or kg units.

Specifications

D32XW30VR

D32XW60VR

D32XW60VL

D32XW150VL

D32XW150VX

D32XW300VX

Capacity x Readability (d)

60 lb x 0.01 lb 960 oz x 0.2 oz 60 lb x 0.2 oz (lb:oz) 30 kg x 0.005 kg 30,000 g x 5 g

150 lb x 0.02 lb 2,400 oz x 0.5 oz 160 lb x 0.5 oz (lb:oz) 60 kg x 0.01 kg 60,000 g x 10 g

150 lb x 0.02 lb 2,400 oz x 0.5 oz 160 lb x 0.5 oz (lb:oz) 60 kg x 0.01 kg 60,000 g x 10 g

300 lb x 0.05 lb 4,800 oz x 1 oz 300 lb x 1 oz (lb:oz) 150 kg x 0.02 kg 150,000 g x 20 g

300 lb x 0.05 lb 4,800 oz x 1 oz 300 lb x 1 oz (lb:oz) 150 kg x 0.02 kg 150,000 g x 20 g

600 lb x 0.1 lb 9,600 oz x 2 oz 600 lb x 2 oz (lb:oz) 300 kg x 0.05 kg 300,000 g x 50 g

OHAUS Moisture Analyzers OHAUS MB Series Moisture Analyzers combine high quality and durable construction into sleek, compact designs. The MB Series offer dependable, accurate, results for a wide variety of applications.

5

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Specifications

MB45

MB35

MB25

Capacity

45 g

35 g

110 g

110 g

Repeatability (Std Dev) (g)

0.05% (3 g sample) 0.015% (10 g sample)

0.18% (3 g sample) 0.02% (10 g sample)

0.2% (3 g sample) 0.05% (10 g sample)

0.3% (3 g sample) 0.2% (10 g sample)

Readability

0.01% / 0.001 g

0.02% / 0.002 g

0.05% / 0.005 g

0.1% / 0.01 g

Fax : (514) 326 8961

MB23


Adam Equipment PW Analytical Balances

Ideal for pharmaceutical & laboratory work

3 Year Warranty!

Adam Equipment PGL Precision Balances

3 Year Warranty!

• Lock down mounting slot for Kensington™ type lock and cable • Dual tare keys • Color coded, sealed keypad • Splashproof to protect from accidental spills • RS-232 bi-directional interface • GLP print outs • Internal calibration • External calibration • AC adapter Applications The PW Analytical Balances are ideal for weighing, net / total, check weighing, percentage weighing, weight accumulation, parts counting, animal / dynamic weighing, density determination and below pan weighing.

Specifications

PW124

PW184

PW254

Capacity

120 g

180 g

250 g

Readability

0.0001 g

0.0001 g

0.0001 g

Pan size

3.5″ Ø / 90 mm Ø

3.5″ Ø / 90 mm Ø

3.5″ Ø / 90 mm Ø

Features • Up to 12 weighing units (including one custom unit) • Date and time • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Multilingual display • Large backlit display with dual text prompts • Capacity tracker • Large stainless steel pan • Solid metal housing • Overload protection • Lock down mounting slot for Kensington™ type lock and cable • Non-slip adjustable levelling feet • Colour coded, sealed keypad • Dual tare keys • Removable draft shield supplied on 0.001 g readabilities

• • • • • • •

Modern low profile design RS-232 bi-directional interface GLP print outs External calibration Rechargeable battery AC Adapter Auto sleep / power down function to save battery life

Applications • Lab sample weighing • Parts counting • Percentage weighing • Check weighing • Density determination • Below balance weighing

Specifications

PGL203

PGL303

PGL2002

PGL3002

PGL4001

PGL6001

PGL8001

PGL10001

PGL12001

PGL15001

PGL20001

Capacity

200 g

300 g

2000 g

3000 g

4000 g

6000 g

8000 g

10 kg

12 kg

15 kg

20 kg

Readability

0.001 g

0.001 g

0.01 g

0.01 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

0.1 g

Platform size

5.7 × 4.9″ 5.7 × 4.9″ 7.6 × 7.6″ 7.6 × 7.6″ 7.6 × 7.6″ 7.6 × 7.6″ 7.6 × 7.6″ 15.7 × 11.8″ 7.6 × 7.6″ 7.6 × 7.6″ 15.7 × 11.8″ 145 × 125 mm 145 × 125 mm 192 × 192 mm 192 × 192 mm 192 × 192 mm 192 × 192 mm 192 × 192 mm 400 × 300 mm 192 × 192 mm 192 × 192 mm 400 × 300 mm

www.ereinc.com

BALANCES

Features • 16+ weighing units (including one custom unit) • Selectable digital filtering for animal / dynamic weighing • Adjustable filters • Simple user-friendly operation • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Date and time • Multilingual display • Large backlit display with dual text prompts • Capacity tracker • Large stainless steel pan • Force restoration mechanism • Solid metal housing • Non-slip adjustable leveling feet

sales@ereinc.com

6


BALANCES

PGL Precision Balances Great for material testing applications and laboratory. Ideal for field applications with a battery!

AD-PGL203 PGL Precision Balance, Capacity: 200 g, Readability: 0.001 g, Pan Size: 5.7" x 4.9" / 145 mm x 125 mm

3 Year Warranty!

AD-PGL2002 PGL Precision Balance, Capacity: 2000 g, Readability: 0.01 g, Pan Size: 7.6" x 7.6" / 192 mm x 192 mm

Features • 9 weighing units • Date and time • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Multilingual display • Large backlit display with dual text prompts • Capacity tracker • Large stainless steel pan • Solid metal housing • Overload protection

• Lock down mounting slot for Kensington™ type lock and cable • Non-slip adjustable leveling feet • Color coded, sealed keypad • Dual tare keys • Windshield supplied as standard with models with 0.001 g readability • Modern low profile design • RS-232 bi-directional interface • GLP print outs • External calibration • Rechargeable battery • AC adapter • Auto sleep / power down function to save battery life

AD-PGL4001 PGL Precision Balance, Capacity: 4000 g, Readability: 0.1 g, Pan Size: 7.6" x 7.6" / 192 mm x 192 mm AD-PGL6001 PGL Precision Balance, Capacity: 6000 g, Readability: 0.1 g, Pan Size: 7.6" x 7.6" / 192 mm x 192 mm AD-PGL8001 PGL Precision Balance, Capacity: 8000 g, Readability: 0.1 g, Pan Size: 7.6" x 7.6" / 192 mm x 192 mm AD-PGL10001 PGL Precision Balance, Capacity: 10 kg, Readability: 0.1 g, Pan Size: 15.7" x 11.8" / 400 mm x 300 mm AD-PGL20001 PGL Precision Balance, Capacity: 20 kg, Readability: 0.1 g, Pan Size: 15.7" x 11.8"/ 400 mm x 300 mm Accessories AD-8023 Adam Printer AD-9061 AdamDU - Data Collection Program AD-9028 RS-232 Cable AD-7995 Below Balance Hanger AD-9066 USB To RS-232 Interface Cable

Applications PGL Precision Balances are ideal for weighing, parts counting, percentage weighing, check weighing, density determination and below pan weigh.

Highland™ Portable Precision Balances Ideal for quick readings in the laboratory, university and field work!

AD-HCB123 Highland™ Portable Precision Balance, Capacity: 120 g, Readability: 0.001 g, Pan Size: 4.7" / 120 mm AD-HCB153 Highland™ Portable Precision Balance, Capacity: 150 g, Readability: 0.005 g, Pan Size: 4.7" / 120 mm

2 Year Warranty! Features • 15 weighing units • Zero tracking • Backlit LCD display • Capacity tracker • ShockProtect™ overload three - point protection • Can be stacked for storage (120 mm pan size only) • Lock down mounting slot for Kensington™ type lock • Removable anti-static draft shield (120 mm pan size only) • Stainless steel pan

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Non-slip adjustable leveling feet Below balance weighing with hanger Easy access to the rechargeable battery Color coded, sealed keypad Dual tare keys RS-232 and USB interface Handical™ manual internal calibration with built-in mass External calibration Auto power off Full range tare Low battery indication AC adapter

Applications Highland™ Portable Precision Balances are ideal for weighing, percentage weighing, parts counting, below pan weighing and weight accumulation.

7

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

AD-HCB302 Highland™ Portable Precision Balance, Capacity: 300 g, Readability: 0.01 g, Pan Size: 4.7" / 120 mm AD-HCB602H Highland™ Portable Precision Balance, Capacity: 600 g, Readability: 0.01 g, Pan Size: 4.7" / 120 mm AD-HCB602 Highland™ Portable Precision Balance, Capacity: 600 g, Readability: 0.02 g, Pan Size: 4.7" / 120 mm AD-HCB1002 Highland™ Portable Precision Balance, Capacity: 1000 g, Readability: 0.01 g, Pan Size: 4.7" / 120 mm AD-HCB1502 Highland™ Portable Precision Balance, Capacity: 1500 g, Readability: 0.05 g, Pan Size: 4.7" / 120 mm AD-HCB3001 Highland™ Portable Precision Balance, Capacity: 3000 g, Readability: 0.1 g, Pan Size: 4.7" / 120 mm Accessories AD-9307 Hard Carry Case W/ Lock AD-8030 Security Lock & Cable AD-8023 Adam Printer AD-9061 AdamDU - Data Collection Program

Fax : (514) 326 8961


LBK Weighing Scales

1 Year Warranty!

Applications LBK Weighing Scales are ideal for weighing, parts counting and percentage weighing. • Auto sleep / power down function to save battery life • Low battery indication • AC adapter

AD-LBK6A LBK Weighing Scale, Capacity: 6 lbs / 3000 g, Readability: 0.001 lbs / 0.5 g, Pan Size: 9.8" x 7.1" / 250 mm x 180 mm AD-LBK12A LBK Weighing Scale, Capacity: 12 lbs / 6000 g, Readability: 0.002 lbs / 1 g, Pan Size: 9.8" x 7.1" / 250 mm x 180 mm AD-LBK25A LBK Weighing Scale, Capacity: 25 lbs / 12 kg, Readability: 0.005 lbs / 2 g, Pan Size: 9.8" x 7.1" / 250 mm x 180 mm AD-LBK65A LBK Weighing Scale, Capacity: 65 lbs / 30 kg, Readability: 0.01 lbs / 5 g, Pan Size: 9.8" x 7.1" / 250 mm x 180 mm

BALANCES

Features • 5 weigh ing units (kg, g, lb, oz, lbs:oz) • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Simple user-friendly operation • Large backlit LCD display • Non-slip adjustable leveling feet • Overload protection • Color coded, sealed keypad • Large stainless steel pan • Modern low profile design • Precision load cell technology • Splashproof to protect from accidental spills • External calibration • Rechargeable battery up to 150 hours operation

Accessory AD-9664 In-Use Cover

CPWplus Bench Scales Ideal for shipping / receiving, materials and sample testing in the field!

1 Year Warranty!

Applications CPWplus Bench Scales are ideal for weighing and animal / dynamic weighing.

Features • 4 weighing units (kg, g, lb, oz) • Simple 4 button operation • Hold function • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Large backlit LCD display • Wall mount bracket • Large stainless steel pan • Modern low profile design • Splashproof to protect from accidental spills • Precision load cell technology • Color coded, sealed keypad • RS-232 bi-directional interface • Low battery indication • Auto sleep / power down function to save battery life • Battery power (6 x "AA" batteries) • AC adapter

AD-CPWPLUS6 CPWplus Bench Scale, Capacity: 13 lbs / 6000 g, Readability: 0.005 lbs / 2 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS15 CPWplus Bench Scale, Capacity: 33 lbs / 15 kg, Readability: 0.01 lbs / 5 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS35 CPWplus Bench Scale, Capacity: 75 lbs / 35 kg, Readability: 0.02 lbs / 10 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS75 CPWplus Bench Scale, Capacity: 165 lbs / 75 kg, Readability: 0.05 lbs / 20 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS150 CPWplus Bench Scale, Capacity: 330 lbs / 150 kg, Readability: 0.1 lbs / 50 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS200 CPWplus Bench Scale, Capacity: 440 lbs / 200 kg, Readability: 0.1 lbs / 50 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm Accessory AD-7954 Hard Carry Case W/ Lock

CBCa Bench Counting Scales Features • Internal counting resolution 1:400,000 • Preset tare function • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Memory accumulation • Adjustable filters • Pre-set counting with alarm • Date and time • Large backlit LCD display • Simple user-friendly operation • Precision load cell technology • Splashproof to protect from accidental spills • Full color coded keypad with numeric entry • Large stainless steel pan • Non-slip adjustable feet • Overload protection • Easy access to the rechargeable battery • RS-232 bi-directional interface • External calibration • Rechargeable battery up to 90 hours operation • Auto sleep / power down function to save battery life

www.ereinc.com

• Low battery indication • AC adapter

2 Year Warranty!

Applications CBCa Bench Counting Scales are ideal for weighing, weight accumulation, parts counting check counting and for count accumulation.

AD-CBC8A CBCa Bench Counting Scale, Capacity: 8 lbs / 4000 g, Readability: 0.0002 lbs / 0.1 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm AD-CBC16A CBCa Bench Counting Scale, Capacity: 16 lbs / 8000 g, Readability: 0.0005 lbs / 0.2 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm AD-CBC35A CBCa Bench Counting Scale, Capacity: 35 lbs / 16 kg, Readability: 0.001 lbs / 0.5 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm AD-CBC70A CBCa Bench Counting Scale, Capacity: 70 lbs / 32 kg, Readability: 0.002 lbs / 1 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm AD-CBC100A CBCa Bench Counting Scale, Capacity: 100 lbs/48 kg, Readability: 0.005 lbs / 2 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm

Accessories AD-5006 In-Use Cover AD-5006-10 In-Use Cover, 10/Pack

sales@ereinc.com

8


CBK Bench Scales

2 Year Warranty!

AD-CBK8A CBK Bench Scale, Capacity: 8 lbs / 4000 g, Readability: 0.0002 lbs / 0.1 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm

BALANCES

AD-CBK16AH CBK Bench Scale, Capacity: 16 lbs / 8000 g, Readability: 0.0002 lbs / 0.1 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm AD-CBK16A CBK Bench Scale, Capacity: 16 lbs / 8000 g, Readability: 0.0005 lbs / 0.2 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm AD-CBK35A CBK Bench Scale, Capacity: 35 lbs / 16 kg, Readability: 0.001 lbs / 0.5 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm AD-CBK70A CBK Bench Scale, Capacity: 70 lbs / 32 kg, Readability: 0.002 lbs / 1 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm

Features • 5 weighing units (kg, g, lb, oz, lbs:oz) • Adjustable filters • Memory accumulation • Date and time • Full range tare • Pre-set weighing with alarm • Check-weighing with low and high limits • Check weighing LED bar graph • Large backlit LCD display • Capacity tracker • Non-slip adjustable leveling feet • Overload protection • Large stainless steel pan • Color coded, sealed keypad

• • • • • • • • •

Full color coded keypad with numeric entry Simple user-friendly operation Splashproof to protect from accidental spills Precision load cell technology Internal counting resolution 1:400,000 Easy access to the rechargeable battery RS-232 bi-directional interface External calibration Rechargeable battery up to 90 hours operation • Auto sleep / power down function to save battery life • Low battery indication • AC adapter

AD-CBK100A CBK Bench Scale, Capacity: 100 lbs / 48 kg, Readability: 0.005 lbs / 2 g, Pan Size: 8.9" x 10.8" / 225 mm x 275 mm

Accessories AD-8023 Adam Printer AD-6081 Weigh Below Hanger (Factory Fitted) AD-9028 RS-232 Cable AD-9066 USB To RS-232 Interface Cable AD-9061 AdamDU - Data Collection Program

CPWplus P Bench Scales

Ideal for Shipping / Receiving, Materials & Sample Testing in the Field! Features • 4 weighing units (kg, g, lb, oz) • Large backlit LCD display • Simple 4 button operation • Hold function • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Wall mount bracket • Large stainless steel platform • Modern low profile design • Splashproof to protect from accidental spills • Precision load cell technology • Color coded, sealed keypad • Pillar display standard on P versions • RS-232 bi-directional interface • External calibration • Low battery indication • Battery power (6 x AA batteries) • Auto sleep / power down function to save battery life • AC adapter

9

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

1 Year Warranty! AD-CPWPLUS6P CPWplus P Bench Scale, Capacity: 13 lbs / 6000 g, Readability: 0.005 lbs / 2 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS15P CPWplus P Bench Scale, Capacity: 33 lbs / 15 kg, Readability: 0.01 lbs / 5 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS35P CPWplus P Bench Scale, Capacity: 75 lbs / 35 kg, Readability: 0.02 lbs / 10 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS75P CPWplus P Bench Scale, Capacity: 165 lbs / 75 kg, Readability: 0.05 lbs / 20 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS150P CPWplus P Bench Scale, Capacity: 330 lbs / 150 kg, Readability: 0.1 lbs / 50 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm AD-CPWPLUS200P CPWplus P Bench Scale, Capacity: 440 lbs / 200 kg, Readability: 0.1 lbs / 50 g, Pan Size: 11.8" x 11.8" / 300 mm x 300 mm

Fax : (514) 326 8961


CPWplus W Weighing Scales

Ideal for Shipping / Receiving, Materials & Sample Testing in the Field! Applications CPWplus W Weighing Scales are ideal for weighing and animal / dynamic weighing.

1 Year Warranty! AD-CPWPLUS35W CPWplus W Weighing Scale, Capacity: 75 lbs / 35 kg, Readability: 0.02 lbs / 10 g, Pan Size: 19.7" x 19.7" / 500 mm x 500 mm AD-CPWPLUS75W CPWplus W Weighing Scale, Capacity: 165 lbs / 75 kg, Readability: 0.05 lbs / 20 g, Pan Size: 19.7" x 19.7" / 500 mm x 500 mm AD-CPWPLUS150W CPWplus W Weighing Scale, Capacity: 330 lbs / 150 kg, Readability: 0.1 lbs / 50 g, Pan Size: 19.7" x 19.7" / 500 mm x 500 mm AD-CPWPLUS200W CPWplus W Weighing Scale, Capacity: 440 lbs / 200 kg, Readability: 0.1 lbs / 50 g, Pan Size: 19.7" x 19.7" / 500 mm x 500 mm

Ideal for Water Treatment & Testing

PMB Moisture Analyzers Features • Built-in memories for storing products and settings • 3 settings for heating samples • Automatic test start setting for when the lid is closed • Date and time • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Quick and easy to configure through the keypad • Multilingual display • Large backlit display with dual text prompts • Capacity tracker • Non-slip adjustable leveling feet • Color coded, sealed keypad • Large stainless steel pan • Lock down mounting slot for Kensington™ type lock and cable • Overload protection • Precision load cell technology • Splashproof to protect from accidental spills • Spirit level • Single halogen lamp 400 W • RS-232 and USB interface • GLP print outs • Calibration facilities for temperature and weight • Power Cord • Pan lifter to easily remove samples

www.ereinc.com

BALANCES

Features • 4 weighing units (kg, g, lb, oz) • Hold function • Full range tare • Zero tracking • Simple 4 button operation • External calibration • Large backlit LCD display • Large stainless steel platform • Handlebar frame and wheeled base for mobility • Splashproof to protect from accidental spills • Non-slip adjustable leveling feet • Four load cell construction • Color coded keys • Modern low profile design • RS-232 bi-directional interface • Rechargeable battery • Auto sleep / power down function to save battery life • Low battery indication • AC adapter

Application PMB Moisture Analyzers are ideal for moisture determination.

3 Year Warranty!

Accessories AD-9028 RS-232 Cable AD-PMB53 PMB Moisture Analyzer, Capacity: 50 g, Readability: 0.001 g / 0.01%, Pan Size: 3.5" / 90 mm AD-PMB202 PMB Moisture Analyzer, Capacity: 200 g, Readability: 0.01 g / 0.01%, Pan Size: 3.5" / 90 mm

AD-9304 USB Cable AD-8023 Adam Printer AD-7996 Disposable Aluminum Sample Pans, 250/Pack

sales@ereinc.com

10


Digital Moisture Balance

BALANCES

The Digital Moisture Balance is specifically designed to be used in a production environment by non-technical personnel. Can be successfully used in the laboratory and in the production area where test results are needed on the spot. With its RS-232 interface capability, the custom printer will print a hard copy of the test data with a time and date stamp, confirmation of the test parameters used, and a message of "operator interrupt" should a test be stopped prematurely. All accomplished automatically; load a sample, press a button and walk away. Rapid, no hassle results in just minutes. Features • Flexibility Simplifies sample preparation and loading, no limitations on sample size (0-100 g), measures moisture or solids from 0.0% to 100.0% • Versatile Allows fine tuning to individual testing needs with multiple testing modes, wide selection of heat settings and readout in either solids or moisture • Accuracy Increases precision and is adaptable to critical moisture and solids testing. Readable to 0.1% moisture and solids • Durability Withstands the hard knocks of day-to-day use with rugged cast aluminum construction and enclosed sample chamber Applications The Digital Moisture Balance is ideal for use of snack foods, dairy products, cereals, grains and baked goods, sand, cement, ceramics, gypsum, fiberboard, adhesives, pharmaceuticals, chemicals, sludge and slurries.

CS-26900EMB Digital Moisture Balance (110 V)

Cenco Mechanical Moisture Balance The Cenco Mechanical Moisture Balance has become world renowned for fast and accurate readings of the percent moisture content in a variety of substances. The wide selection of heat ranges allows optimum drying of diverse materials without sample damage. The Mechanical Moisture Balance eliminates error while providing direct readings of moisture content. There is no calculation or special training needed to use this dependable equipment. The Mechanical Moisture Balance is the best cost performance moisture measurement method for most materials. Its portability makes it convenient to be used in the lab, on the production line or even in the field. The Mechanical Moisture Balance rapidly determines the percentage moisture of materials ranging from food products to chemicals, plastics, and ceramics!

Features • Direct % Reading No calculation needed No special training needed • Efficient Simultaneous weighing & drying - saves time • Flexibility Wide selection of heat ranges allows optimum drying of diverse materials without sample damage • Versatility Allows fine tuning to individual testing needs. Multiple testing modes and temperature settings • Accuracy Increases precision and is adaptable to critical moisture and solids testing. Readable to 0.1% moisture and solids

CS-26900EMB Digital Moisture Balance (110 V)

ERE

Where your Opinion Matters!

11

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Baths SHEL LAB Water Baths

Lab Armor Bead Baths are durable, dependable and are available with a variety of safety and convenience features: • Microprocessor control • Overtemperature protection • Stainless body and lid • 1 year warranty

The SHEL LAB high-performance water baths are accurate, easy to use, safe and durable. The water bath design incorporates the attractive SHEL LAB appearance, a drip free cover holster, and pocket handles so users can easily transport the water bath. A microprocessor achieves precise temperature control regardless of how the unit is loaded. Calibration is performed with the convenient, front panel touch pad. • Easy-to-clean stainless steel tank • Pocket handles for easy lifting • Recessed heating element prevents "burnout". Unique SHEL LAB design eliminates "hot spots"

SHEL LAB digital Water baths are durable and dependable. Five different models are available, each with a variety of safety and convenience features.

Specifications

W2M

W6M

W14M

W20M

Electrical Specifications

110-120V (220-230V for W2M-2)

110-120V (220-230V for W6M-2)

110-120V (220-230V for W14M-2)

110-120V (220-230V for W20M-2)

Exterior Dimensions

15"W x 12"D x 6"H 38W x 29D x 14H cm

15"W x 12"D x 9"H 38W x 29D x 22H cm

14.3"W x 18.8"D x 8.3"H 36.2W x 47.7D x 21H cm

15"W x 25"D x 9"H 38.1W x 63.5D x 22.9H cm

Bath Tank Dimensions

12"W x 6"D x 3"H 29W x 15D x 6H cm

12"W x 6"D x 6"H 29W x 15D x 15H cm

11.7"W x 13"D x 6"H 29.8W x 33D x 15.2H cm

11.5"W x 19.5"D x 6.2"H 29.2W x 49.5D x 15.8H cm

Model

Capacity

Dimensions

M706

6 L bath + 5 L beads

15.9"W x 12.3"D x 8.5"H 40.5W x 31.2D x 21.6H cm

Tank Capacity

2L

6L

14 L

20 L

M714

14 L bath + 12 L beads

15.9"W x 18.5"D x 8.5"H 40.5W x 47D x 21.6H cm

Temperature Range

Ambient +5 to 80°C

Ambient +5 to 80°C

Ambient +5 to 80°C

Ambient +5 to 80°C

M720

20 L bath + 15 L beads

15.9"W x 23.255"D x 8.5"H 40.5W x 59D x 21.6H cm

Temperature Uniformity

±0.2°C at 37°C

±0.2°C at 37°C

±0.2°C at 37°C

±0.2°C at 37°C

Over Temperature Protection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Stainless Steel Gabel Cover(s)

Yes - One Included

Yes - One Included

Yes - One Included

Yes - One Included

All models: Temperature Range: Ambient +5 ºC to 80 ºC Thermal Uniformity:  ±1.0 ºC

BATHS & CIRCULATORS

Lab Armor Bead Baths

SHEL LAB Reciprocating Water Baths The Reciprocating Water Baths deliver precise temperature control and a smooth, reciprocal shaking motion. The independent over temperature safety offers backup protection should the main controller fail. Easy-to-read

LEDs display temperature and oscillation speed. An independent oscillator control allows the bath to also be used for regular constant temperature water bath applications. The stroke length can be easily adjusted to three separate Specifications

WS17

WS27

Electrical Specifications

110-120V (220-230V for WS17-2)

110-120V (220-230V for WS27-2)

Exterior Dimensions

14"W x 25"D x 13"H 36W x 63D x 32H cm

14"W x 40"D x 13"H 36W x 102D x 32H cm

12"W x 15"D x 8"H 31W x 37D x 19H cm

12"W x 27"D x 8"H 31W x 69D x 19H cm

Bath Chamber Dimensions

www.ereinc.com

settings. This allows for various agitation speeds, ranging from mild to vigorous. The unique basket support system helps eliminate tank wear while fully supporting free action of a heavily loaded basket.

Tank Capacity

16 L

27 L

Temperature Range

Ambient +5 to 90°C

Ambient +5 to 90°C

Temperature Uniformity

±0.2°C at 37°C

±0.2° at 37°C

Over Temperature Protection

Yes

Yes

Stainless Steel Gabel Cover(s)

Yes - One Included

Yes - One Included

sales@ereinc.com

Number of flasks each model can accommodate 25 mL

24

48

50 mL

24

48

125 mL

24

48

250 mL

12

24

500 mL

6

12

1 liter

4

8

2 liter

2

4

2.8 liter

1

3

4 liter

1

2

5 liter

1

2

6 liter

1

2

12


BATHS & CIRCULATORS

PolyScience Water Baths The latest generation of PolyScience Water Baths offer superior temperature control, range, and uniformity. Bath fluids can be controlled at temperatures as high as 100ºC (60ºC without cover) with 0.1ºC precision and ±0.2ºC uniformity. Bath temperature is displayed continuously on a bright, easyto-read LED panel in your choice of ºC or ºF. Set point temperature is recalled with just the touch of a button. Three user-defined temperature preset buttons allow for quick selection of often used temperature set points. Dual thermostats provide optimum protection for your work and water bath. The high limit alarm alerts you if bath temperature exceeds your pre-set limit. A secondary Safety Set thermostat guards against thermal runaway, automatically disconnecting heater power should bath temperature get too high or the liquid level drop too low.

Capacity

Overall Dimensions LxWxH

Opening Dimensions LxWxH

Shipping Weight

Volts, Hz. Amps

Cat. No.

2 Liter

8.94" x 7.90" x 8.13" 22.71 x 20.07 x 20.65 cm

5.31" x 5.88" x 5.81" 13.49 x 14.94 x 14.76 cm

11 lbs 4.99 kg

120 V, 60 Hz, 2.5 A 240 V, 50 Hz,1.25 A

WD02A11B WD02A12E

2 Liter Shallow

9.44" x 13.65" x 8.13" 23.98 x 34.67 x 20.65 cm

5.81" x 11.69" x 2.50" 14.76 x 29.69 x 6.35 cm

12 lbs 5.44 kg

120 V, 60 Hz, 2.5 A 240 V, 50 Hz, 1.25 A

WD2SA11B WD2SA12E

5 Liter

9.44" x 13.65" x 8.13" 23.98 x 34.67 x 20.65 cm

5.94" x 11.75" x 5.94" 15.09 x 29.85 x 15.09 cm

15 lbs 6.80 kg

120 V, 60 Hz, 4.2 A 240 V, 50 Hz, 2.1 A

WD05A11B WD05A12E

10 Liter

15.43" x 14.90" x 8.13" 39.19 x 37.85 x 20.65 cm

11.69" x 12.75" x 5.94" 29.69 x 32.39 x 15.09 cm

23 lbs 10.43 kg

120 V, 60 Hz, 4.2 A 240 V, 50 Hz, 2.1 A

WD10A11B WD10A12E

20 Liter

15.19" x 21.65" x 8.13" 38.58 x 54.99 x 20.65 cm

11.50" x 19.50" x 5.88" 29.21 x 49.53 x 14.94 cm

30 lbs 13.61 kg

120 V, 60 Hz, 8.3 A 240 V, 50 Hz, 4.15 A

WD20A11B WD20A12E

28 Liter

15.19" x 21.65" x 10.13" 38.58 x 54.99 x 25.73 cm

11.63" x 19.56" x 7.94" 29.54 x 49.68 x 20.17 cm

33 lbs 14.97 kg

120 V, 60 Hz, 8.3 A 240 V, 50 Hz, 4.15 A

WD28A11B WD28A12E

PolyScience Water Baths are also designed for operating convenience. The steeply gabled, polycarbonate cover accommodates glassware of varying heights and tilts out of your way when loading or removing samples, allowing condensate to drain neatly back into the bath.

Labnet Digital Dry Baths

Single and dual block models. Two Digital Dry Bath models are available. The single block unit will accept all of the standard blocks. For increased capacity, the dual block unit accepts two standard blocks or one specially designed dual block. Each Dry Bath is supplied with a block lifter. Blocks sold separately.

A broad temperature range, to 150ºC, makes Digital Dry Baths useful for a variety of applications in molecular biology, histology, clinical, environmental and industrial laboratories. Although the price of these baths is comparable to analog models, they feature microprocessor control and digital setting / display of temperature. Digital performance at analog prices. Microprocessor control. A microprocessor regulates the high wattage heaters in the baths to provide precise, accurate control. The exact desired temperature is easily set using the arrow keys on the sloped control panel while values are shown on the large digital display. No checking of a thermometer and readjusting temperature

13

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

is necessary. The user calibration feature allows for easy calibration to in house standards when required. Additionally, there is an RS232 port for recording block temperature activity. An available data-logging software package is used to link the unit to a computer. Stainless steel block chamber. The block chamber of the Digital Dry Baths is constructed of stainless steel, which acts as a heat sink and provides a uniform transfer of heat from the heating elements to the interchangeable blocks. The resulting block uniformity is excellent, ensuring that all samples receive the same temperature treatment, regardless of their position in the block.

Specifications

Digital Dry Baths

Temperature Range

Ambient + 5º to 150ºC

Temp. Resolution

0.1ºC

Temp. Uniformity

±0.2ºC

Temp. Accuracy

±0.3ºC

Block Chamber

Stainless Steel

Block Capacity: Single Block Unit

One standard block

Dual Block Unit

Two standard blocks or one dual block

Dimensions

7.9"W x 10.4"D x 3.3"H (20W x 26.5D x 8.3H cm)

Weight

5.5 lbs (2.2 kg)

Electrical

120 V~, 50/60 Hz (also available in 230 V)

Dry Bath Blocks Construction

High grade, nonporous aluminum with anodized surface

Thermometer Well

Yes (not in plate or slide blocks), required only for calibration purposes

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Immersion Circulators Specifications

7306

712

Temperature Range

Ambient +5º to 150ºC*

Ambient +5º to 100ºC* ±0.2ºC

Controller

Standard Digital

Basic

Readout

LED

Thermometer

Temperature Readout ºC or ºF

120V, 50/60Hz, 11A (7306A11B) (73A0A11B) 2400V, 50/60Hz, 7.5A (7306A12E) (73A0A12E)

Pumping Flow

5 or 12 liters / min. 6 1/2" x 4 3/4" 16.5 x 12.1 cm

Tank Occupancy, Approx.

Min. 3" / 7.6 cm Max. 7" / 17.8 cm

Immersion

12 1/4"L x 4 5/8"W x 5 3/4"H 31.2L x 11.7W x 14.6H cm

Overall Dimensions

PolyScience Standard Digital Model 7306 The PID microprocessor controller provides precise temperature control and greater temperature stability. The 2-speed pressure (simplex) pump minimizes turbulence in small tanks and provides higher flow and greater uniformity in large tanks. An adjustable flow director accepts 1/2" (13 mm) ID tubing for external circulation.

PolyScience Basic Model 712 This low-cost circulator offers good temperature control for routine lab applications. Proportional heater control combined with redundant safety backup makes this analog model an excellent value. The 2-speed pressure (simplex) pump minimizes turbulence in small tanks and it also provides higher flow and greater uniformity in large tanks. Temperature readout is via the supplied thermometer (alcohol)

PolyScience Progammable Model 7312 The full-featured PolyScience Programmable Controller, combined with circulator placement flexibility, makes this "design your own bath" circulator a great value. Microprocessor PID control assures high accuracy and stability.

The Programmable Controller features a multilanguage graphic display and time / temperature programming. Ten programs can be stored in the controller's memory; each can have up to fifty steps and can be cycled up to 99 times. An RS232 interface and remote probe capability are standard. The included software supports LabView™ drivers and Excel® macros to offer even greater programming and data logging convenience. For internal circulation or external open and closed loop applications, the 7312 has a strong pressure and suction (duplex) pump with variable speed control. The optional remote probe gives more accurate temperature control in applications where external circulation is required. The expandable mounting bridge spans openings from 15" to 25" across to allow placement on almost any bath container. Choose from PolyScience's selection of stainless steel or acrylic baths, or use your own reservoir.

www.ereinc.com

N/A

Electrical Requirements

Heater

BATHS & CIRCULATORS

Temperature Stability ±0.05ºC

60 Hz / 1100 watts, 50 Hz / 2200 W Adjustable

Over-Temperature Cutoff Low-liquid Cutoff

Yes

Shipping Weight

11 lbs / 5 kg

Pump Inlet & Outlet

1/4" FRP Rear Discharge

* Temperature range and stability vary depending on bath volume, surface area, insulation and type of fluid. Notes: Performance specifications determined at ambient temperature of 20ºC / 68ºF

Specifications

7312

Temperature Range

Ambient +5º to 200ºC*

Temperature Stability*

± 0.01ºC

Controller/RS232

Programmable/yes

Readout

Graphics LCD

Temperature Readout

ºC or ºF

Pressure Flow

30 LPM max. (60 Hz) 22 LPM max. (50 Hz)

Suction Flow

22 LPM max. (60 Hz) 15 LPM max. (50 Hz)

Tank Occupancy, Approx.

7 1/2" x 8 3/4"

Immersion

Min. 2 1/2" / 7 cm Max. 4 1/2" / 11.4 cm

Overall Dimensions

11 1/4"L x 15"W x 9 1/2"H 28.6L x 38W x 24.2H cm

Heater

60 Hz / 1 100 Watts, 50 Hz / 2200 Watts

Over-Temperature Cutoff

Adjustable

Low-Liquid Cutoff

Yes

Pump Inlet & Outlet

1/4". FPT Rear Discharge

Shipping Weight

24 lbs / 11 kg

Electrical Requirements

120V, 60Hz, 11A (7312A11B) 240V, 50/60Hz, 9.7A (7312A12E)

* Temperature range and stability vary depending on bath volume, surface area, insulation and type of fluid. Notes: Performance specifications determined at ambient temperature of 20ºC / 68ºF

sales@ereinc.com

14


BATHS & CIRCULATORS

Cooling & Heating Circulator Baths

Model 9112

Model 912

PolyScience Basic Model 912

Model 9102

demanding requirements. Frequently used for cooling electrophoresis cells, viscometers and general lab applications.

Ideal for routine applications where extreme accuracy and stability are not critical. An excellent alternative to tap water cooling for rotary evaporators and condensers at a low price. Convenient set-point dial with supplied thermometer (alcohol) readout.

PolyScience Standard Digital Model 9106 With the same cooling capacity as more expensive models, this model combines high performance with economy. It is equipped with three user-defined temperature preset buttons for rapid set point changes. The bright LED display provides read and set capability, and its stability of ±0.05°C meets all but the most

PolyScience Advanced Digital Model 9102 The digital controller has all the advanced performance as the programmable model and is your ideal choice when remote probe, time / temperature programming and communication software are not required. The LCD display also incorporates multi-language help menus that aid in setting up operation while using the Select / Set knob.

Model 9106

PolyScience Programmable Model 9112 This top-of-the-line model features a wide temperature range and time / temperature programmability. Programs can be set directly from the front panel with the aid of the Select / Set knob and multi-language display, or from a PC using the RS-232 interface. LabView™ drivers and Excel® macros offer even greater programming and data logging convenience. Remote probe capability and variable-speed pressure / suction (duplex) pump further enhance the 9112's capabilities. Heating

Specifications

9112

9102

9106

912

Temperature Range

-20º to 200ºC

-20º to 200ºC

-20º to 150ºC

-20º to 100ºC

Temperature Stability

±0.01ºC

±0.01ºC

±0.05ºC

±0.2ºC

Controller / RS232

Programmable / Yes

Advanced Digital / Yes

Standard Digital / No

Basic / No

Readout

Graphic LCD

Graphic LCD

LED

Thermometer (supplied)

Temperature Readout

ºC or ºF

ºC or ºF

ºC or ºF

N/A

Readout Accuracy

±0.25ºC

±0.25ºC

±0.5ºC

N/A

Pressure Flow Rate

Variable-Speed 30 LPM max. (60 Hz) 22 LPM max. (50 Hz)

Variable-Speed 30 LPM max. (60 Hz) 22 LPM max. (50 Hz)

2-speed 5 or 12 liters/min

2-speed 5 or 12 liters/min

Suction Flow Rate

22 LPM max. (60 Hz) 15 LPM max. (50 Hz)

22 LPM max. (60 Hz) 15 LPM max. (50 Hz)

N/A

N/A

Heater (60Hz/50Hz)

1100 / 2200 Watts

1100 / 2200 Watts

1100 / 1600 Watts

1100 / 1600 Watts

Shipping Weight

70 lbs / 32 kg

70 lbs / 32 kg

64 lbs / 29 kg

64 lbs / 29 kg

Cat. No. 120V/60Hz/12A

9112A11B

9102A11B

9106A11B

91A0A11B

Cat. No. 240V/50Hz/7A

9112A12E

9102A12E

9106A12E

91A0A12E

Specifications

9100 Series

Reservoir Capacity

6 liters

Cooling Capacity @ +20ºC 0ºC -10ºC

200 Watts 140 Watts 100 Watts

Over-Temperature Cutoff

Adjustable

Low-Liquid Cutoff

Yes

Working Access

5 1/4"L x 5 1/4"W x 5 1/2"H 13.3L x 13.3W x 14H cm

Overall Dimensions

15 3/4"L x 8 1/4"W x 22 1/2"H 40L x 21W x 57.1H

Pump Inlet & Outlet

1/4" FPT Rear Discharge

Notes: Cooling capacity, Watts x 3.41 = BTU's/hr. Performance specifications determined at ambient temperature of 20ºC/68ºF. For 50Hz units, derate cooling capacity and pump flow by 17%

15

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Cooling

A built-in RS-232 interface is standard. The variable-speed pressure / suction pump can be used in both open and closed loop applications. Great performance for those on a budget.

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Centrifuges Labnet Spectrafuge™ Mini Centrifuges and Slide Spinner

Specifications

Spectrafuge™ Mini

Slide Spinner

Maximum Speed / RCF

6,000 rpm / 2,000 x g1

4,800 rpm

Maximum Capacity

2 x 0.2 mL strips or 6 x 1.5 / 2.0 mL

2 standard slides

Dimensions

5.9"W x 5.9"D x 4.6"H (15W x 15D x 11.7H cm)

5.9"W x 5.9"D x 4.6"H (15W x 15D x 11.7H cm)

Weight

1 lb (0.45 kg)

1 lb (0.45 kg)

Electrical

230 V-, 50 Hz or 120 V-, 60 Hz

230 V-, 50 Hz or 120 V-, 60 Hz

The Spectrafuge™ Mini is supplied with rotors and adapters to accommodate 1.5 mL, 0.5 mL and 0.4 mL tubes, as well as 0.2 mL strips and individual tubes. The rotors are easily interchanged. The Slide Spinner dries two slides in as little as 10 seconds for quality imaging and screening results. The slides are placed into cassettes that catch all liquid without splashing. Cassettes are reuseable. Both centrifuges feature a translucent lid that pivots on a durable stainless steel hinge pin. A switch on the side of the centrifuge starts and stops operation. Alternatively, with the switch in the "on" position, the centrifuge can be started and stopped by closing and opening the lid. The Spectrafuge™ Mini is available in five different lid colors: gray, blue, teal, purple and red.

CENTRIFUGES

Compact in design and personal sized, the Spectrafuge™ Mini is ideal for microfiltration and quick spin downs from the walls and caps of microcentrifuge tubes. The Slide Spinner is designed for drying microarray slides before scanning.

Labnet Spectrafuge™ 6C The Spectrafuge™ 6C has been designed for quick production of PPP (platelet poor plasma) and PRP (platelet rich plasma) as well as other applications in the clinical or research laboratory. The included 6 place rotor is capable of running round or conical bottom 15 mL or 10 mL tubes. Adapters for smaller tube sizes are available separately. The control panel of the centrifuge features easy turn knobs and large digital displays for time and speed. Time can be set as low as 30 seconds and to the "On" position for a continuous run. The Spectrafuge™ 6C is the smallest centrifuge in its class. The 8" x 9" footprint makes it ideal for almost any laboratory and it can easily be transported from lab to lab.

Specifications

Spectrafuge™ 6C

Maximum Speed

6,500 rpm

Maximum RCF

4,000 x g

Maximum Capacity

6 x 15 mL

Timer

30 seconds to 30 minutes with continuous and hold features

Accel. / Decel.

14 / 27 seconds

Dimensions

8.25"W x 9.5"D x 7"H (21W x 24D x 18H cm)

Rotor Angle

30°

Electrical

120 V or 230 V, 50-60 Hz

Labnet Spectrafuge™ 24D The Spectrafuge™ 24D combines innovations such as a unique, easy access rotor, exclusive multi-flow air cooling system and high performance drive with a digital microprocessor that precisely regulates operation. Parameters are selected with two "smart" knobs and values are shown on large, easy to read, LED displays. Speed can be set and displayed in rpm or g-force, while runs may be timed, continuous or momentary. The unique design of the 24-place rotor allows easy access to the tops of the tubes. An optional StripSpin™ adapter fits onto the rotor for spinning 0.2 mL tubes and strips. A powerful, brushless motor quickly accelerates the rotor to set speed. Air enters the centrifuge through vents on the back of the housing and is circulated in multiple directions to maximize cooling. The result is a cool running microcentrifuge that keeps samples close to ambient temperature, even during extended runs at maximum speed. For samples that require below ambient temperatures, the Spectrafuge™ 24D may be used in a cold room.

www.ereinc.com

Specifications

Spectrafuge™ 24D

Speed Range

500 rpm to 13,300 rpm

Maximum RCF

16,300 x g

Maximum Capacity

24 x 1.5 / 2.0 mL

Timer

1 to 30 minutes or continuous "Quick" button for momentary operation

Ambient Operating Range

4° to 35°C

Dimensions

9.25"W x 11.5"D x 8.5"H (23.5W x 29.3D x 21.6H cm)

Weight

18 lbs (8.1 kg)

Electrical

230 V-, 50 Hz or 120 V-, 60 Hz

sales@ereinc.com

16


CENTRIFUGES

Globe Scientific Centrifuge Tubes

1.5 mL Graduated Polypropylene (PP) Microcentrifuge Tube with Attached Snap Cap Features • Maximum rpm: 26,000 • Autoclavable at 130°C • Suitable for Spectrafuge™ 24D

1.5 mL Non-Sterile, SelfStanding Polypropylene (PP) Microtube Note: Order caps separately. Features • Suitable for Spectrafuge™ 24D

0.5 mL Polypropylene (PP) Microcentrifuge Tube with Attached Click-Seal Snap Cap

17

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

15 mL Clinical Grade Polypropylene (PP) Centrifuge Tube

50 mL Clinical Grade Polypropylene (PP) Centrifuge Tube

Features • Blue screwcap • Black printed graduations • White printed writing space • Spin rate: 8,500 rpm • Autoclavable (without cap) • Temperature range: -40°C to +80°C • Cap: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)

Features • Blue Screwcap • Black printed graduations • White printed writing space • Spin rate: 8,500 rpm • Autoclavable (without cap) • Temperature range: -40°C to +80°C • Cap: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)

50 mL Polypropylene (PP) Centrifuge Tube with Red Screwcap (HDPE) & Printed Graduations Features • Autoclavable (without screwcap) • Tubes are Rnase / Dnase free, nonpyrogenic and non-cytotoxic • Spin rate: 10,000 rpm (12,320 x g) • White graduation marks and writing area • Temperature range: Tube: -196°C to +121°C Cap: -50°C to +100°C

15 mL Centrifuge Tube Acrylic (AC) with Red Screwcap (HDPE) & Printed Graduations Acrylic is a stronger, scratch resistant material that offers equivalent chemical resistance to polystyrene, while providing exceptional clarity. Acrylic offers a greater spin rate which is 5,000 rpm (6,160 x g) compared to polystyrene, which has a limited spin rate of 1,700 rpm (3,000 x g). Features • Spin rate: 5,000 rpm (6,160 x g) • Tubes are Rnase / Dnase free, nonpyrogenic and non-cytotoxic • White graduation marks and writing area • Temperature range: Tube: -40°C to +70°C Cap: -50°C to +100°C

1.5 mL Graduated Polypropylene (PP) Microcentrifuge Tube Without Cap, Natural

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Centurion Scientific – Centrifuges, Cytology Centrifuges & Cell Washer Standard features • Stainless steel bowl • Alloy and steel main frame with composite panels • World brand leading industrial grade inverter • High quality European brushless motor

Advantages • Clean & rust free • Strong, light & quiet • Reliable & accurate • Cool

CENTRIFUGES

C2 Series Centrifuges Models • C2012 Hematocrit & Microtube Centrifuge • C2015 Micro High Speed Centrifuge • C2004 400 mL Versatile Centrifuge • C2006 Fixed Angle up to 6000 rpm • C204 1-Litre Centrifuge • C2043 3-Litre work horse • CR2000 Multi-purpose & Versatile Rotor Recognized Centrifuge Features • Light emitting diode screen • Electric blue LED display • 10 acceleration rates • 10 deceleration rates • 10 program memory • Timer 0 - 99 minutes + constant • Pulse (short run) to 90 seconds • Run in speed or RCF (G Force) in 10 rpm steps • Sound level below 60 dBs (rotor dependant)

Accessories for Centurion Centrifuges, C2 Series: Rotors available for C2012

BR5401 Micro tube 24 x capillary tubes Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13500G

BR5424 Micro tube 24 x 1.5 - 2.2 mL tubes Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13500G

BR5436 Micro tube 36 x 0.5 mL tubes Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13500G

BR5494 PCR Rotor 4 x 8 strips Max speed: 12,000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BR5448 Micro tube 48 x 0.2 mL tubes Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13500G

Rotors available for C2004 BR5431 24 x 15 mL Max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

www.ereinc.com

BR5505 4 x 100 mL Max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

BR5434 8 x 50 mL max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

sales@ereinc.com

18


CENTRIFUGES

Rotors available for C2006

Rotors available for C2015

BR5412 12 x 15 mL Max Speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 3,800G

BR5424 Micro tube 24 x 1.5 - 2.2 mL Max Speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22000G

BR5436 Micro tube 36 x 0.5 mL tubes Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22000G

BR5406 Max speed: 6000 rpm 3,800G 6 x 50 mL tube Fixed angle rotor Tube size maximum 115H x 30W mm

BR5494 PCR Rotor 4 x 8 strips Max speed: 12,000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BR5448 Micro tube 48 x 0.2 mL tubes Max Speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22000G

BR5434 8 x 50 mL Max Speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

BR5510 Swing out rotor Requires B5250 buckets 4 x 250 mL Max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,600G

Rotors available for C2041 BR5431 24 x 15 mL tubes Max Speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

Rotors available for C2043 BR5553 Rotor 4 x 750 mL Max Speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 3,600G

B3000 Buckets for above set of 4 Max speed: 4000 rpm 3,600G Sealed lids available B5319

Rotors available for CR2000 BRK5505 4 x 100 mL Max Speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

BRK5434 8 x 50 mL Max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

BRK5401 24 x capillary tubes Also 12 x 2 mL Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5436 36 x 0.5 mL tube Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5412 12 x 15 mL tubes Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 3,800G

BRK5431 24 x 15 mL tubes Max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

BBRK5424 24 x 1.5-2.2 mL tubes Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5448 48 x 0.2 mL tubes Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5494 4 x PCE strips Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5406 6 x 50 mL tubes Fixed angle rotor Tube size maximum 115H x 30W mm

19

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


K3 Series Centrifuges

CENTRIFUGES

Models • K2015 Micro Ambient • K2015R Micro Refrigerated • K241 1-Liter Ambient • K241R 1-Liter Refrigerated • K243 3-Liter Ambient • K243R 3-Liter Refrigerated • K2045 Multi-Rotor 400 mL12,000 rpm

Features • LCD display • Touch screen control • 10 acceleration rates • 10 deceleration rates • 108 program memory • Timer 0 - 999 minutes and hold • Pulse (short run) to 90 seconds • Run in speed or RCF (G Force) in 1 rpm steps • Rotor recognition • W²t plus for true repeatability • Temperature controllable, accurate to ±0.5℃ • Sound level below 60 dBs (rotor dependant)

Accessories for Centurion Centrifuges, K3 Series: Rotors available for K2015 & K2015R

BRK5424 24 x 1.5 - 2.2 mL tubes Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5436 36 x 0.5 mL tubes Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5448 48 x 0.2 mL Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5308 8 x 50 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,800G

BRK5324 24 x 15 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,800G

BRK5494 4 x PCR strips Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5436 36 x 0.5 mL Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5510 4 x 250 mL Max speed: 4000 rpm Max: RCF 2,600G

BRK5308 8 x 50 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,800G

BRK5494 4 x PCR strips Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5401 Haematocrit rotor Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5448 48 x 0.2 mL Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

Rotors available for K241 & K241R BRK5424 24 x 1.5 - 2.2 mL Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5324 24 x 15 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,800G

BRK5530 Microtitor plate buckets Max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,500G

BRK5100 6 x 100 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,500G

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

20


Rotors available for K243 & K243R

CENTRIFUGES

BRK5308 8 x 50 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,800G

BRK5424 24 x 1.5 - 2.2 mL Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5494 4 x PCR strips Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5436 36 x 0.5 mL Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

B5200 Microtitor plate carrier (4/pk) max speed: 4000 rpm 3,600G Requires BR5553 rotor

BRK5448 48 x 0.2 mL Max speed: 15000 rpm Max RCF: 22,000G

BRK5553 Requires B3000 buckets shown 4 x 750 mL Max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 3,600G

BRK5424 24 x 1.5 - 2.2 mL max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5448 48 x 0.2 mL Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5324 24 x 15 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,800G

BRK5436 36 x 0.5 mL max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5494 4 x PCR strips Max speed: 12000 rpm Max RCF: 13,500G

BRK5308 8 x 50 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,800G

BRK5100 6 x 100 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,500G

BRK5250 4 x 250 mL Max speed: 10000 rpm Max RCF: 16,100G

BRK5324 24 x 15 mL Max speed: 6000 rpm Max RCF: 4,800G

Rotors available for K2045

BRK5505 4 x 100 mL Max speed: 4000 rpm Max RCF: 2,200G

Let our Customer Service help you find the

right products for you! Toll free:

1-888-287-3732 21

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Centurion Cytology Centrifuges CYT12 with touch screen LCD display Complete with 12 place rotor and starter pack

Features • LCD touch screen display • 10 acceleration rates • 10 deceleration rates • 108 program memory • Run is speed or RCF (G force) • W²t plus for true repeatability

CYT04 with bright blue LED display Complete with 4 place rotor and starter pack Specifications Speed: 500 - 3000 rpm Max RCF: 575G Timer: 0 - 99 Minutes Size: 27H x 33W x 46D cm Weight: 16.5 kg without rotor

Safety features for both CYT12 and CYT04 • Multi-point lid locking system containment • Imbalance vibration detector with auto reset • Lid lock detector • Over-speed sensor • Set inverter values • Barrier ring • Motor overheat sensor

CENTRIFUGES

Specifications Speed: 500 - 2000 rpm Max RCF: 525G Timer: 0 - 99 minutes + hold Size: 27H x 33W x 46D cm Weight: 16.5 kg without rotor

Advantages • Best safety for lid • Easy "eye" volume loading • Unable to run with an open lid • Safe detection of speed • Electronic safety of speed • Metal protection of chamber • Motor & samples protection

Features • LED display 10 acceleration rates • 10 deceleration rates • 10 program memory • Run is speed or RCF (G force)

Accessories available for CYT12 & CYT04 Cytology Centrifuges: 4460 12 place rotor for CYT12. High quality polypropylene & stainless steel, autoclavable

4444 Single sample disposable holder complete with white filter card (up to 1 mL samples)

4462 Our stainless steel clips hold the sample chambers (both single & double)

Shandon Clip

www.ereinc.com

4446 Double sample disposable holder complete with white filter card (up to 1 mL samples)

Showing 6 mL Holder 6 mL disposable chamber intended for single use, eliminating the need for metal clips

sales@ereinc.com

22


Centurion Cell Washing Centrifuge Model CW12

CENTRIFUGES

Complete with 12 place rotor and accessories. The centurion cell washing system can simplify work and save time in the washing of blood cells for anti-globulin reagent tests. The instrument’s 12 place rotor accepts both 10 x 75 mm and 12 x 75 mm tubes. Being a manual cell washing system means our users can be precise and sure of exact saline amounts administered by themselves. These machines are perfect for performing blood grouping, blood typing, cross matching, ABO compatibility, RH testing and the Coombs test procedure.

Accessories available for CW12 Cell Washer Centrifuge: Please note our cell washing machine is supplied complete with rotor and 2 x 12 holders. Adaptors for CW12 Our adaptors enable the rotor to handle both 10 x 75 mm and 12 x 75 mm tubes. The included rotor carries 12 tubes but can operate with any balanced load of fewer tubes and any combination of sizes as long as these are properly balanced. This offers complete flexibility for the user.

Rotor for CW12 2 sets supplied, 12 of each size. High quality polypropylene. Auto-clavable. The rotor in this device can be detached and efficiently functions as a holder in which test tubes can be filled, centrifuged transported, incubated and emptied without the necessity for individual handling.

InfoZone Equation for Calculating RCF RCF = 0.000001118 x r x N RCF = relative centrifugal force r = radius from the rotor centre to the bottom of the tube (mm) N = rotating speed (rpm)

Centrifuge tubes also available!

23

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Cryoscopes & Osmometers Advanced® 4250 Single-Sample Cryoscope Superior Accuracy And Reliability In Two Minutes

Other models available.

Specifications

Model 4250

Sample Volume

2 or 2.5 mL

Test Time

Approximately 90 seconds in the 30-second timed mode

Sample Capacity

Single Sample

Units

-m°C or -m°H

Resolution

1 m°C or m°H

Range

0 to 1000 m°C or m°H

Communications

On-board printer, DTE RS-232 serial port, and optional barcode scanner

CRYOSCOPES

Ease Of Use Microprocessor control optimizes onboard data management capability and promotes seamless instrument operation.

Advanced® Model 3320 Micro-Osmometer The Advanced® Model 3320 Micro-Osmometer is a single-sample osmometer designed to provide fast, accurate test results using a 20 μL sample. It combines proven freezing point technology with an elegant design that is both simple to operate and easy to maintain. It is ideally suited for routine osmolality testing in clinical diagnostic, pharmaceutical, and industrial laboratory settings.

Specifications

Model 3320

Sample Volume

20 μL

Test time

60 seconds

Sample Capacity

Single sample

Units

mOsm/kg H2O

Resolution

1 mOsm/kg H2O

Range

0 to 2000 mOsm/kg H2O

Linearity

Less than ±1% from a straight line over calibrated range

Fiske Associates Osmometer Model 210 The Fiske Associates Model 210 Micro Osmometer determines the osmolality of solutions using freezing point depression (FPD). Ideal for serum, urine or other bodily fluids in clinical applications; and media or formulations in pharmaceutical, biotech or industrial applications. Automated, single sample, designed to process a 20 mL sample, and 90-second test time. The Model 210 provides the best accuracy and precision in the market today.

• 20 µL sample size is ideal for applications where the sample quantity is limited • Unparalleled ease of use • Solid state cooling • Internal diagnostics • Ergonomic, compact design • On-board statistical analysis • Results recall up to the last 30 tests • Multi-language operation • Automated calibration • Hot-Line® technical service available 24/7

Also available • Calibration standards • Reference solutions • Control solutions • Sample tubes and probe wipes 250/box • Bar code scanner • 20 microliter pipette • Thermal printer

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

24


Fume Hoods & Cabinets FUME HOODS & CABINETS

Envirco Biological Safety Cabinets A NSF Listed, Class II, Type A2 Biological Safety Cabinet provides product, personnel and environmental protection. The Envirco® Biological Safety Cabinet is listed under NSF/ANSI Standard 49, which verifies cabinet integrity and performance. It is suitable for Biosafety Levels 1, 2 and 3 per CDC/NIH and NCR criteria. Preparation of chemotherapeutic drugs may also be performed in the Envirco Biohazard Cabinet per OSHA requirements. In addition, the cabinet provides an engineering control per the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogen Standard. US Standard ANSI/NSF 49:2002. Airflow System • 70% air recirculation • 30% air exhausts The unit maintains a minimum average inflow velocity of 0.65 m/s and average downflow velocity of 0.37 m/s.

Performance Features • HEPA Filter (Standard for Manual Window Series) 99.999% efficient (0.3 microns) HEPA filter is constructed of borosilicate glass fibers. • Filter Life Indicator: The pressure is displayed on the control panel to show the life of the main filter and exhaust filter. • A microprocessor control system with LED display makes it clear for all control and safety functions. • True airflow velocity (both down-flow and inflow) sensing technology, with temperature compensation for improved sensor accuracy. The velocity value shows continuous digital display on the front LED control panel for constant monitoring. • UV timer function to control the decontamination cycle and maximize lamp life. • Easy to decontaminate and disinfect. The working chamber of the safety cabinet is easy to be cleaned and disinfected. The stainless steel counter surface can be removed for autoclaving. • Weight-balanced front window.

TriviaZone

Ergonomic Features • 10° sloped front enhanced mobility and depth of reach into the work area, also provides maximum protection. • Control panel is sloped downwards to provide the operator (in a setting position) a better view of and an easier access to the controls. • Inclined, sliding sash.

Safety Features • Cabinet Leak Test: Cabinets have to pass pressure decay test as defined in the US Stand ANSI/NSF 49:2002. • KI-Discus Containment Test: Cabinets are tested using the KI-Discus method for containment and operator safety at the manufacturing site. • Filter Leak Test: Cabinets are tested using an aerosol photometer according to US Standard ANSI/NSF 49:2002. This test determines the integrity of down-flow and exhaust filters, filter housings and filter mounting frames. • Automatic self-filtering cycle at start-up requires a fixed period of warm-up period during which the cabinet work zone is purged of contaminants before use. • Intrinsically-safe negative pressure design. • The motor / blower system is able to compensate automatically to maintain the down-flow air at the speed of 0.37±0.015 without interruption to guarantee the safe performance. • Interlocked UV light only operates when blower and fluorescent light are off and sash is closed. • Front window glass (standard) or nonreflecting multi-layer safety glass (optional), which provides enhanced UV protection for operators. • Audible and visual alarms prompt the operator in case of any unsafe condition.

Contact us for complete technical specifications and pricing

Q1: In 1962, the first noble gas compound was produced. Which noble gas was used? Q2: What is the only letter that doesn’t appear on the periodic table?

For answers, turn to page 92.

25

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Air Science EDU® Series Ductless Demonstration Fume Hoods • Low airflow alarm warns of unsafe conditions • Compliant with ANSI, OSHA, AFNOR and BSI safety standards • Portable unit with transparent front, back and side walls for maximum visibility. The EDU™ Series offers personnel and environmental protection, optimal energy savings and zero toxic emissions to the room. • EDU-MOBILE (Model EDU-M), shown at right

FUME HOODS & CABINETS

The EDU™ Series Ductless Demonstration Fume Hoods are designed for individual and group applications where clear front, side and rear walls permit 360° visibility. The high efficiency carbon filtration and air management system protects both the user and the classroom environment from hazardous vapors generated on and above the work surface. The EDU™ Series units are mounted on heavy duty transfer carts and are sized to fit through standard doorways for easy transportation from lab to lab. • Offers 360° visibility for full participation • Protects the class from toxic fumes • Available in four models to meet general applications • Filters are easy to change • Improved filter clamping prevents bypass leakage

The Purair® Basic ductless fume hoods are a series of high efficiency products designed to protect the user and the environment from hazardous vapors generated on the work surface. At the heart of the Purair® fume hood product line is the innovative Air Science® Multiplex™ Filtration Technology that creates a safe work environment over the widest range of applications in the industry.

Ductless Technology: The Eco-friendly Choice Advanced carbon filtration technology offers a safe, high performance alternative to conventional ducted fume hoods for a broad range of applications. • Environmental benefits. Air Science® ductless fume hoods isolate and trap chemical vapors to prevent ecological impact through release into the environment. • Versatile. Each filtration system is selected for its specific application. The Multiplex Filter broadens the range of applications. Carbon filters are available in more than 14 configurations for use with vapors or organic solvents, acids, mercury and formaldehyde. HEPA/ULPA filters can add to biological safety. • Easy to install. The ductless fume hood is self-contained and does not require venting to the outside. Many units are portable and may be moved from one location to the next with minimal downtime and without filter changes. Set-up, operation and filter maintenance are straightforward. • Energy efficient. Because filtered air is returned to the room, no demands are required of the facility HVAC capacity for make-up air. • Cost effective. Facility ductwork, HVAC and construction costs are eliminated. • Safe to use. Cabinet airflow and face velocity protect users from incidental exposures to fumes. • Self-testing (selected models). Electronic air-flow monitoring assures continuous safety. An electronic gas sensor monitors carbon filter performance.

Purair® PCR Laminar Flow Cabinet • Excellent interior protection from particulate contamination • Multiple options for customized applications • Easy-to-change HEPA filtration • Vertical laminar airflow • Powerful built-in UV lamp • Vertical laminar air flow • Choose from 2', 3' or 4' models.

sample preparation, and sample amplification. The Purair® PCR laminar flow cabinet employs the Air Science® Multiplex™ HEPA Filtration Technology to create a safe, energy-efficient contaminant-free environment. It is ideally suited for use with non-hazardous contaminants and when flexible access to the instrumentation in the cabinet is required.

Polymerase Chain Reaction* (PCR) is a simple and inexpensive technique to make multiple copies of a targeted nucleotide sequence from a DNA sample, and to amplify sequences from small samples. This technique is widely used in genetics laboratories that work with DNA and RNA. Because PCR amplification is extremely sensitive to contamination, prevention of contamination requires good laboratory practices to minimize external or cross contamination during reagent preparation,

Many more types and models of laboratory work enclosures available. Please contact us for information regarding: Ductless fume hoods, down-flow workstations, classroom demonstration hoods, forensic evidence drying cabinets, fuming chambers, laminar flow cabinets, PCR workstations, swab dryers, chemical storage cabinets, custom products, total exhaust fume hood, vented enclosure, UV-box, and evidence benches

www.ereinc.com

* Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) is a patented process owned by Hoffman La Roche

sales@ereinc.com

26


Incubators INCUBATORSS

SHEL LAB General Purpose Incubators Five strategically placed heating elements, including one in the heated outer door, deliver superior temperature uniformity in SHEL LAB general purpose laboratory incubators. The unique SHEL LAB air jacket design eliminates hot spots. Our microprocessor controller achieves exceptional temperatures control with no overshoot. Setpoint and actual chamber temperature are digitally displayed. Temperature calibration is easily performed with the touch pad control. An independent, secondary controller provides the added safety and security of over temperature protection.

Precise temperature control Superior uniformity • • • • • • • •

Microprocessor control Interior glass door with radius corner Unique warm air jacket design Heated outer door Interior electrical outlet Access port Seam welded panels & doors 24 month warranty

General Purpose Laboratory Incubators, Bench Top, Under Counter & Stackable Available in 110-120V or 220-230V GI12

Specifications

GI2

GI6

GI7

GI11

Details

Bench Top

Floor Model

Under Counter

Double Doors

Exterior Dimensions (W x D x H)

21.25" x 22.25" x 26"

25.25" x 27.25" x 28"

30" x 31" x 32.125" 42" x 27" x 37"

25.25" x 28.25" x 75.8"

Chamber Dimensions (W x D x H)

15" x 15" x 15.25"

19.5" x 20" x 26"

23.7" x 24" x 20"

36" x 20" x 27"

19.5" x 20" x 26"

Incubator Chamber cu ft Capacity

1.9

5.8

6.6

11.3

5.8 (per chamber)

Dual / Stacked

For a complete list of product specifications, contact ERE 1-888-287-3732

SHEL LAB R128 and R140 Models RI28 and RI40 incubators provide 31 & 40 cu.ft. chamber capacities while minimizing the amount of floor space used. Both models incorporate our microprocessor controller to achieve precise temperature uniformity. An independent, secondary temperature controller offers the added security of over temperature protection. The chamber floors are reinforced to support roller apparatus or shakers. Both models are supplied with six shelves capable of supporting the weight of benchtop instruments.

27

Specifications

RI28

RI40

Details

Large Capacity

Large Capacity

Electrical Specifications

110-120V (220-230V for RI28-2)

110-120V (220-230V for RI40-2)

Exterior Dimensions

38.5"W x 33"D x 75"H 98W x 83D x 191H cm

41"W x 34"D x 87"H 104W x 86D x 221H cm

Chamber Dimensions

33"W x 26"D x 64"H 84W x 66D x 163H cm

35"W x 26"D x 76"H 89W x 66D x 193H cm

Chamber Capacity

31 cu ft 899.8 L

40 cu ft 1133.3 L

Temperature Range

Ambient +8 to 70ºC

Ambient +8 to 70ºC

Temperature Uniformity

±0.8°C at 37°C

±0.8°C at 37°C

Over Temperature Protection

Yes

Yes

Temperature Alarm

Yes

Yes

Interior Outlet

4

4

Access Port

1

1

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Optimized Floor Space • Reach-in and extra large • Horizontal air flow • Four (4) interior electrical outlets • Prewired panel for chart recorder • Tempered glass viewing window

Fax : (514) 326 8961


SHEL LAB Water Jacket CO2 Incubator 3517- Floor Model HEPA Filter with a "Bacteriostatic" copper cage to trap particulate matter and reduce potential for chamber contamination.

Infrared (IR) CO2 Sensors For the fastest CO2 recovery and most stable performance, this series features IR sensors.

3517

(IR) CO2 Sensor

110-120V (220-230V for 3517-2)

Exterior Dimensions

26"W x 26.5"D x 39"H 66W x 67D x 99H cm

Chamber Dimensions

20.5"W x 20"D x 25.5"H 52W x 51D x 65H cm

Incubator Chamber Capacity

6 cu ft 171 L

CO2 Range

0 - 20%

CO2 Sensor Accuracy ±0.1% at 5%

SHEL LAB High Heat Decontamination CO2 Incubator The model 3552 is the newest addition to the SHEL LAB 3500 series CO2 incubator line. Featuring a dry heat decontamination cycle, the model 3552 has the ability to maintain 180ºC for 120 minutes. This time / temperature relationship satisfies all global standards for decontamination. Another important and unique feature is that it is not necessary to remove the IR CO2 sensor prior to activating the decontamination process. This is a more user friendly approach and eliminates potential damage to the sensitive IR sensor. This is decontamination at its easiest and most effective. Other features include a USB interface for software communication and a pre-heated copper CO2 gas inlet. This exclusive feature prevents condensation and reduces potential sites for contamination to form. Precise temperature control is achieved via an advanced microprocessor. An independent over temperature safety controller is also integral to the design.

www.ereinc.com

CO2 Recovery Rate

< 5 minutes to 5%

Relative Humidity

Up to 95% at 37ºC

Temperature Range

+8ºC to 60ºC

Temperature Uniformity

±0.35ºC at 37ºC

Over Temperature Protection

Yes

Temperature Alarm

Yes

CO2 Alarm

Yes

Number of Shelves

3 included

Specifications

3552

Details

High Heat Decontamination

(IR) CO2 Sensor

110-120V (220-230V for 3552-2)

Exterior Dimensions

28.3"W x 31"D x 39.3"H 71.8W x 78.8D x 99.7H cm

Chamber Dimensions

20.5"W x 19.7"D x 25.2"H 52W x 50.1D x 64.1H cm

Incubator Chamber Capacity

5.9 cu ft 167.5 L

CO2 Range

0 - 20%

INCUBATORS

Specifications

CO2 Sensor Accuracy ±0.1% at 5% C02 Recovery Rate

< 5 minutes to 95% to 5% of setpoint

Relative Humidity

Up to 95% at 37ºC

Temperature Range

+8ºC to 60ºC

Temperature Uniformity

±0.35ºC at 37ºC

Over Temperature Protection

Yes

Temperature Alarm

Yes

CO2 Alarm

Yes

Number of Shelves

3 included

sales@ereinc.com

28


Labnet Mini Incubator

INCUBATORSS

The Mini Incubator is compact and economically priced, yet offers features not typically found in a basic incubator. The housing is all metal, as is the door frame. A plexi-glass window in the door offers full visibility to the interior. One shelf is included, and can be adjusted to three different levels - additional shelves can be purchased to increase storage capacity. The heating elements in the Mini Incubator are incorporated into the bottom and sides of the housing. This provides better temperature stability and uniformity than other incubators in its class. A grommet hole in the top of the unit can hold a thermometer for accurate temperature setting. In addition, the Mini Incubator has a port in the rear of the chamber which allows for an electrical cord to be routed out the back. The Mini LabRoller is a perfect fit and can be used in the Incubator with any of the available rotisseries. A combo package is available which includes the Mini Incubator and Labroller, along with the accessory rotisseries.

Specifications

Mini Incubator

Ext. Dimensions

11.2"L x 11"W x 13.2"H 28.5L x 28W x 33.5H cm

Int. Dimensions

9" x 7.9" x 7.9" (23 x 20 x 20 cm)

Weight

18.4 lbs (8.3 kg)

Capacity

0.375 cu ft (9.2 L)

Temperature Range Ambient

+5° to 60°C

Controls

Analog

Stability

±0.6°C at 37°C (N.I.S.T. traceable thermometer)

Uniformity

0.65°C at 37°C

Electrical

120 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.6 A; 230 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.3 A

Labnet 211DS Shaking Incubator A small footprint, compact, stackable design and expanded temperature range make the 211DS Incubators ideal for molecular biology and general use. Its integral orbital shaker makes it highly versatile. The exclusive SmartChek temperature control system guarantees precise temperature control. Mechanical convection maintains a stable temperature environment and provides quick recovery after opening the door. A safety thermostat is located on the back of the unit. The insulated door has a large, double glass observation panel and opens nearly 180° for easy access.

Specifications

211DS Shaking Incubator

Chamber Volume

1.7 cu ft

Temp. Range / Display

Ambient + 5° to 80°C in 0.1° increments / digital

Two full and one half shelf are supplied with each incubator. A flat platform and predrilled flask platform (clamps sold separately) are available for the 211DS. Internal electrical outlet allows using small equipment such as GyroMini or Mini LabRoller Rotator inside the chamber of the 211DS.

Temp. Uniformity / Accuracy ±0.25°C / ±0.1°C

29

Shaker Speed / Orbit

Variable, 20 to 400 rpm / 19 mm

Flask Capacity

4 x 1 L, 5 x 500 mL, 9 x 250 mL, 16 x 125 mL

Construction

Interior - mirrored stainless, Exterior - cold rolled steel

Chamber

13.5"W x 14.75"D x 15"H (34.3W x 37.5D x 38.1H cm)

Exterior

16.75"W x 21.75"D x 23"H (42.5W x 55D x 58H cm)

Weight

83 lbs (37.7 kg)

Electrical

120 V~, 60 Hz

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


SHEL LAB Bench Model SI4 Compact and Durable The SI4 has a transparent hood that lifts up via a hydraulic system, so it can function in tight places.

Each unit has an easy-to-read LED display. The rotation platform is included with each unit and is self-centering for easy installation. The SI4 features a small footprint and slim hood design to maximize space and functionality.

INCUBATORS

All of our shaking incubators feature stainless steel interiors which provide excellent durability and an easy-to-clean surface.

• Small footprint accommodates tight bench space • Transparent hood for clear visibility • Robust, temperature resistant hydraulic piston opens the hood with ease and reliability • 0.75" stroke length

SHEL LAB Large Capacity Shaking Incubator The SHEL LAB SI9 delivers all the features you appreciate in the SHEL LAB Shaking Incubator line, with even greater load capacity. The unit performs from 30-400 RPM’s with a smooth, quiet oscillation. The door of the SI9 is designed with hydraulic pistons making it easy to lift during loading and unloading. These state of the art orbital shaking incubators feature a universal shaker platform, which accommodates a wide range of flask clamps, test tube racks and micro titer plate clamps. To support the loads over many years of use, four load-bearing positions are incorporated for optimal weight distribution. For maximum load flexibility, the unique counter-balanced weighting system is adjustable to accommodate off-center loads and varying capacities. • • • • • •

Stackable for additional capacity without losing lab floor space Interior light for improved visibility Unit comes with shaking platform Easy to lift hydraulic doors Safety features and alarms throughout Exclusive SHEL LAB horizontal air flow design for superior uniformity Specifications

SI9

SI9R

Details

Standard

Refrigerated

Electrical Specifications

110-120V (220-230V for SI9-2)

110-120V (220-230V for SI9R-2)

Exterior Dimensions

55.0"W x 33.5"D x 33.5"H 139.7W x 85.1D x 85.1H cm

55.0"W x 333.5"D x 33.5"H 139.7W x 85.1D x 85.1H cm

Chamber Dimensions

35.5"W x 25.5"D x 19.7"H 90.1W x 64.7D x 50.1H cm

35.5"W x 25.5"D x 19.7"H 90.1W x 64.7D x 50.1H cm

10.3 cu ft 293 L

10.3 cu ft 293 L

Incubator Chamber Capacity Platform Dimensions

32" x 22" x 3" 81 x 56 x 7 cm

32" x 22" x 3" 81 x 56 x 7 cm

Temperature Range

8°C + ambient to 60°C*

10°C - 60°C

Temperature Uniformity

±0.5°C at 37°C

±0.5°C at 37°C

Platform Weight Capacity

45 lbs (20 kg)

45 lbs (20 kg)

Orbital-Shaking Range

30 - 400 RPM

30 - 400 RPM

Timer Functionality

1 - 999 mins

1 - 999 mins

Over Temperature Protections

Yes

Yes

Temperature Alarm

Yes

Yes

Orbital-Shaking Speed Alarm

Yes

Yes

www.ereinc.com

Specifications

SI4

Electrical Specifications

110-120V (220-230V for S14-2)

Exterior Dimensions

22.0"L x 25.5"W x 28.0"H 55.9L x 64.8W x 71.2H cm

Chamber Dimensions

19.0"L x 18.0"W x 16.5"H 48.2L x 45.7W x 41.9H cm

Incubator Chamber Capacity

3.3 cu ft 92 L

Temperature Range

8°C + Ambient to 60°C

Temperature Uniformity

±0.5°C at 37°C

Orbital-Shaking Range

30 - 400 RPM

Timer Functionality

1 - 999 mins

Shaking Incubator Flask Clamp & Test Tube Rack Capacity Part Number Description

Size

SI4

SI9

9530528

Flask Clamp

25 mL

50

107

9530529

Flask Clamp

50 mL

50

107

9530530

Flask Clamp

125 mL

25

53

9530531

Flask Clamp

250 mL

25

35

9530526

Flask Clamp

500 mL

10

23

9530532

Flask Clamp

1000 mL

6

19

9530551

Flask Clamp

2000 mL

4

12

9530554

Flask Clamp

4 liter

4

10

9530555

Flask Clamp

6 liter

2

6

9530553

Flask Style

2.8 liter

2

6

9751177 (100 Max)

Test Tube Shaking Rack

10 - 13 mm

3

7

9751178 (80 Max)

Test Tube Shaking Rack

14 - 16 mm

3

7

9751179 (60 Max)

Test Tube Shaking Rack

18 - 20 mm

3

7

9751180 (36 Max)

Test Tube Shaking Rack

22 - 25 mm

3

7

9751181 (29 Max)

Test Tube Shaking Rack

50 mm

3

7

sales@ereinc.com

30


SHEL LAB Refrigerated Incubators Refrigerated incubators are ideal for testing B.O.D of sewage and wastewater, as well as other low temperature and room temperature applications.

INCUBATORSS

• • • • •

Microprocessor control Fan assisted / forced-air circulation LED display of setpoint and chamber temperature High and low limit thermostats Interior electrical outlet

Units are equipped with a hermetically sealed compressor, a circuit breaker to protect from electrical overload, and an easy-to-clean, fully insulated chamber. Gentle, continuous forced-air circulation ensures temperature uniformity and reproducible test conditions.

Specifications

LI5

LI15 Diurnal Plant Chamber

Details

Under Counter

Diurnal Chamber

Electrical Specifications

10 - 120 V, 60 Hz

10 - 120 V, 60 Hz

Exterior Dimensions

24"W x 21.25"D x 34"H 61W x 54D x 86.4H cm

24.5"W x 24.5"D x 77.5"H 62.2W x 62.2D x 196.9H cm

Chamber Dimensions

16"W x 11.5"D x 22.5"H 40.6W x 29.2D x 57.2H cm

27"W x 20"D x 55.5"H 68.6W x 50.8D x 141H cm

Incubator Chamber Capacity

2.4 cu ft 67.8 L

16.5 cu ft 467.2 L

Temperature Range

-10ºC to 45ºC (at 20ºC ambient)

-10ºC to 45ºC (at 20ºC ambient)

Temperature Uniformity

±0.5°C at 20°C

±0.5°C at 20°C

Over Temperature Protection

Yes

Yes

Temperature Alarm

No

No

Interior Outlet

110V-1 / 220V-2

110V-1 / 220V-2

Number of Shelves

2

4

Bottle Capacity

62

317

SHEL LAB LI20P BOD Incubator

SHEL LAB brings energy efficiency to the low temperature incubator market! Model LI20P B.O.D. Thermoelectric Cooled Incubator, 20 Cu.Ft. (300 Bottle) Capacity. Using innovative thermoelectric cooling technology, the LI20P eliminates the need for a refrigeration compressor. This means that these units use 78% less power than alternative models and reduce room air conditioning loads by 75%. They also include 75 pound capacity shelves, which eliminates sagging. These incubators meet APHA specifications for Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) and include a mechanical convection system to ensure even air distribution, digital temperature set controller, safety high / low limit controls, and a digital display. • Microprocessor control system • P.I.D. temperature control • LED display of set point and chamber temperature

31

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Specificiations

LI20P BOD

Capacity

20 cu.ft.

Interior Dimensions

26"W x 24"D x 59"H 66 x 61 x 150 cm

Exterior Dimensions

30"W x 31"D x 70"H 77 x 79 x 178 cm

Temperature Range

15°C to 40°C (at 20°C ambient)

Temperature Uniformity

±0.5°C at 20°C

Electrical Specifications

120 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 1300 W

Capacity of Standard B.O.D. Bottles

300

Temperature Control

0.1°C Display Increments

Shelving

5 Supplied, Adjustable

Interior Outlet

110V-1

• • • •

High and low limit thermostats Interior electrical outlet Fan assisted / forced-air circulation TUV certified

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Elite Compound Microscopes Motic BA210E Objectives N.A.

W.D (mm)

EC Plan 4x

0.10

15.90

EC Plan 10x

0.25

17.40

EC Plan 20x

0.45

0.90

EC Plan 40x

0.65

0.50

EC Plan 60x

0.80

0.35

EC Plan 100x-Oil

1.25

0.15

New EC Optics Motic’s new generation of EC Plan Achromat objectives sets a new price-performance standard in optical quality. With excellent spherical aberration correction to significantly improve field flatness and resolution, the EC optics offer superior

Convenient rackless stage! Specifications

BA210 ELITE

Optical System

Color Corrected Infinity Optical System [CCIS®]

Observation Tube

Widefield binocular 30° [F.N.20] Widefield trinocular 30° [F.N.20] - light distribution 100:0/20:80

Interpupillary Distance

55 - 75 mm (48 - 75 mm optional)

Nosepiece

Reversed quadruple

Objectives

CCIS® EC Plan 4X, 10X, 20X (optional), 40X, 60X (optional) and 100X-Oil

Rackless Stage

150 x 150 mm surface, 80 x 30 mm movement, coaxial controls

Condenser

N.A. 1.25 Abbe condenser with slider slot

Focusing Block

Brass gears. Z-Axis movement with 25 mm stroke; Fine focus with 2 μm minimum increments, coarse focus with torque adjustment.

Illumination

Built-in transmitted 6 V / 30 W Halogen Fixed Koehler illumination or

colour fidelity through new multi-layer coated lenses. A lead-free manufacturing process according to RoHS standard sets new features for these CCIS® objectives, derived from the flagship model BA410. Significantly increased working distances of the objectives reduce contamination risk when changing from oil lenses to dry lenses. To protect the system from fungus growth in high-humidity environments, an anti-fungus treatment is applied to prolong the life of both microscope and objectives.

MICROSCOPES

Description

Rackless Stage The new rackless stage enables a convenient movement of the x/y stage without prominent gear rack interference; while a new specimen holder design gives a soft but solid grip to the glass slides. These new mechanical improvements greatly enhance user safety in educational environments of schools and Universities. Halogen / LED Interchangeability The importance of LEDs as safe and long-term illumination devices has increasingly become the norm in educational and clinical microscopy environments. Nevertheless, experienced users may still prefer the "warm" Halogen illumination with a large portion of long wavelengths. To cover this situation, Motic has implemented a full interchangeability between its Halogen and LED light sources. Coming with a standard 6V/30W Halogen bulb, the BA210Elite lamp socket also accepts a new LED module, which can be inserted instead of the Halogen bulb. The choice of (2) different color temperatures (4500 K, 6000 K) enhances illumination options in a user-friendly way. LED module

Halogen bulb

3 W LED Fixed Koehler illumination (6000 K & 4500 K)

Motic BA310E Specifications

BA310 ELITE

Optical System

Color Corrected Infinity Optical System [CCIS®]

Observation Tube

Widefield binocular 30° [F.N.20] Widefield trinocular 30° [F.N.20] - light distribution 100:0/20:80 Widefield trinocular 30° [F.N.20] - light distribution 100:0/0:100

Interpupillary Distance

48 - 75 mm

Nosepiece

Reversed quadruple

Objectives

CCIS® EC Plan 4X, 10X, 20X (optional), 40X, 60X (optional) and 100X-Oil

Rackless Stage

180 x 170 mm surface, 80 x 55 mm movement, coaxial controls

Condenser

N.A. 0.9 / 1.25 Abbe condenser with slider slot

Focusing Block

Brass gears. Z-Axis movement with 25 mm stroke; Fine focus with 2 μm minimum increments, coarse focus with torque adjustment. Stage lock for high samples, free definable

Illumination

Built-in transmitted 6 V / 30 W Halogen Fixed Koehler illumination or 3 W LED Fixed Koehler illumination (6000 K & 4500 K)

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

32


Compound Microscope Motic BA210

MICROSCOPES

Objectives

The BA210 is designed for both educational and teaching environments delivering a new higher level of optical performance. The new BA210 series is setting a new standard in microscope performance through inprovements both in optical and mechanical features. Designed to be used in Educational Life Science, Medical as well as a variety of biological applications, this new microscope is built around Motic's complete understanding of the daily demands placed on the standard educational microscope. Student proof features together with a new generation of EF-N Plan Achromatic objectives provide a fully corrected intermediate image for crisp and clear visual and digital results. The BA210 is a robust student instrument that brings professional, repeatable image quality results to all of its intended applications.

Observation Tubes • Ergonomic 30 degree viewing angle • 55 - 75 mm interpupillary distance • Large field of view with 18 mm or 20 mm options • Binocular, Trinocular (with 20/80 or 0/100 light split), Digital Eyepieces • N-WF 10x / 18 mm • N-WF 10x / 20 mm • N-WF 15x / 13.3 mm • N-WF 12.5x / 16 mm

Illumination Options • 6 V / 30 W Halogen • 3 W LED • Mirror

Description

N.A.

W.D (mm)

EF-N Plan 4x

0.1

6.3

EF-N Plan 10x

0.25

4.4

EF-N Plan 20x

0.4

4.66

EF-N Plan 40x

0.65

0.35

EF-N Plan 60x

0.85

0.13

EF-N Plan 100x

1.25

0.13

EF-N Plan Phase 10x

0.25

4.4

EF-N Plan Phase 40x

0.65

0.35

Condenser • Abbe 1.25NA with slot for accessories and condenser lock available Stage • Hard coated mechanical stage with 76 x 30 mm travel range • Left or right stage drive available Other Options • Simple phase contrast 10x and 40x sliders for condenser • Darkfield slider for condenser • Simple polarisation with analyser and polarizer

Motic BA310 The new BA310 is designed for the rigors of daily routine work specifically for diverse applications in Haematology and Cytology. The demands placed on any routine microscope for daily work needs careful focus on every microscope detail. The new BA310 features a powerful adjustable light source to meet both delicate and detailed lighting requirements for all sample types while the fully featured Koehler illumination helps in highlighting even the weakest stained specimens. New CCIS EF-N Plan Achromat objectives provide optimal image contrast through newly designed multi-layer lens coatings. Objectives

33

Magnification

N.A.

W.D (mm)

EF-N Plan 4x

0.1

6.3

EF-N Plan 10x

0.25

4.4

EF-N Plan 20x

0.4

4.66

EF-N Plan 40x

0.65

0.35

EF-N Plan 60x

0.85

0.13

EF-N Plan 100x

1.25

0.13

EF-N Plan Phase 10x

0.25

4.4

EF-N Plan Phase 40x

0.65

0.35

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Illumination Options • 6 V / 30 W Halogen • 3 W LED Eyepieces • N-WF 10x / 20 mm • N-WF 15x / 13.3 mm • N-WF 12.5x / 16 mm Condenser • Full Koehler 0.9 / 1.25 NA Stage • Hard coated mechanical stage with 76 x 50 mm travel range • Left or right stage drive available Other Options • Simple phase contrast 10x and 40x sliders for condenser with EF-N Plan objectives • Full phase contrast 1.25NA Turret Condenser (BF, 10xPh, 20xPh, 40xPh, 100xPH) or (BF, DF, 10xPh, 40xPh, 100xPh) with Plan Phase Objectives • Darkfield slider for condenser • Simple polarisation with analyser and polarizer • Multi-viewing device available as side-by-side or face-to-face

Observation Tubes • Ergonomic 30 degree viewing angle • 55 - 75 mm interpupillary distance • Large field of view with 20 mm • Binocular, Trinocular (with 20/80 or 0/100 light split), Digital

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Motic BA410 Rounding out the update of our popular BA series, the BA410 is the flagship platform for expansion.

Imaging has also been improved through new CCD adapters, optimizing the use of all Motic digital cameras with CMOS and CCD sensor targets. The completely lead-free manufacturing of the microscope and its optics follow the RoHS regulations of environment and user protection.

MICROSCOPES

Motic has launched its new upright microscope, the BA410, a newly designed, modular stand especially for routine-clinical, lab, and teaching applications suitable for a wide range of transmitted light applications for the life science markets. A completely redesigned optical system ensures that the BA410 will provide the best image quality in the demanding cytology, pathology, and histology fields from both demanding amateur to professional levels. A variety of new viewing heads are also available, including a trinocular head with three light splits (100:0/20:80/0:100) and two ergonomic heads with tilting and (optional) telescopic functions.

The improved CCIS Optical system includes a variety of contrast techniques like fluorescence, dark field, polarization as well as an improved phase contrast: one condenser covers both positive as well as negative phase contrast lenses. While a solid-state quintuple nosepiece is standard, an optional sextuple nosepiece is now also available.

Motic BA210MET To meet the demands of a Basic Metallurgical Microscope, Motic introduces its entry level model, the BA210MET, for the observation of all opaque materials. Designed with educational purposes in Engineering and Material professions in mind, the newly developed BA210MET offers quality performance at a very favourable price point. The overall optical performance of the BA210MET is defined by a new generation of Metallurgical M Plan Achromatic objectives made of high-quality glass with anti-reflex coating.

New M Plan Optics Motic’s new generation of M Plan Achromat objectives for incident light samples sets a new performance standard at an affordable price level. Through new multi-layer coated lenses, the M offers improved field flatness and resolution, while maintaining sufficient working distance to avoid sample and objective contact.

Description

N.A.

W.D (mm)

M Plan 5X

0.15

14.5

M Plan 10X

0.25

16.0

M Plan 20X

0.40

10.5

M Plan 50X

0.55

5.1

Specifications

BA210MET

Optical System

Color Corrected Infinity Optical System (CCIS®)

Eyepieces

N-WF 10X / 20 mm, with diopter adjustment

Observation Tube

Widefield Binocular 30° Widefield Triocular 30° - light distribution 100:0/20:80

Interpupillary Distance

55 - 75 mm

Nosepiece

Reversed quadruple

Focus

Coaxial movement; 30 mm stroke; Fine focus with 2 μm minimum increments

Stage

159 x 135 mm surface; 75 x 50 mm movement; Coaxial movement

Incident Illumnation

6 V / 30 W Halogen Epi-Illumination, power supply built-in

Max. Specimen Thickness

30 mm

Q3: What did Galileo call his compound microscope before the term "microscope" was coined?

TriviaZone

Q4: What home appliance did Albert Einstein work to improve in the 1930s?

For answers, turn to page 92.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

34


MICROSCOPES

Motic BA310MET

Specifications

Motic is expanding the success of its popular BA Series microscope line into the industrial market, and is pleased to introduce the new BA310MET series, an affordable and powerful metallurgical microscope line of robust incident light microscopes. Now industrial quality control can be performed for all opaque materials like minerals and metal samples with ease and efficiency. Also, the BA310MET performs well in the educational environments of engineering and material professions, where affordability and ease-ofuse are key demands.

BA310MET

Optical System

Color Corrected Infinity Optical System (CCIS®)

Eyepieces

N-WF 10X / 20 mm, with diopter adjustment

Observation Tube

Widefield Binocular 30° [F.N. 20] Widefield Triocular 30° [F.N. 20] - light distribution 100:0/20:80 Widefield Triocular 30° [F.N. 20] - light distribution 50:50 fixed, erect image

Nosepiece

Reversed quintuple

Stage

180 x 1240 mm surface; 75 x 50 mm movement; coaxial controls

Focus

Brass gears; Z-Axis movement 30 mm

Fine Focus

2 μm minimum increment

Incident Light

12 V / 50 W Halogen illuminator with external power supply Halogen bulb exchangeable with 3 W LED (4500 L, 6000 K), > 20,000 hrs lifespan

Specimen Thickness

Max. 30 mm

The Epi-Illuminator with a 12 V / 50 W Halogen illumination offers a powerful and adjustable light source ideal for all reflective samples. For increased illumination options, an easy replacement of the Halogen bulb is possible by an LED module of different color temperatures (4500 K, 60000 K). A built-in field diaphragm and aperture diaphragm helps to optimize image quality by reducing stray light and increasing control.

Two other additions are also available. The BA310MET-T model has a transmitted light option that allows easy handling and viewing also of transparent samples and greatly increases the number of industrial applications. The BA310MET-H setup contains a more flexible focusing device, dedicated to the examination of large samples with only little limitation in size.

Motic PSM-1000 and PSM-100E "All - In One" laser ready microscope for inspection, testing and corrections in the semiconductor industry.

Specifications

PSM-1000

Trinocular tube

Image

Siedentopf type, adjustment range: 55 mm - 75 mm

Interpupillary distance

24 m

Field Number Optical pass ratio Observation angle adjustment Main Unit

Tube lens [correction] Laser work Applicable laser

/

3° to 30° 1x [ultraviolet and infrared] and 2x [visible] Pull out beam splitter for laser work 1064 / 532 / 355 nm NWR laser

With coaxial coarse and fine focusing wheels [right/left] [50 mm travel range, 0.1mm/rev. for fine adjustment, 4mm/rev. for coarse adjustment]

Focus Adjustment Loading weight on optical tube

20.5 kg C-mount adapter

Camera mount Light source [optional]

150 W cold light source, light guide length 2 m

Objective nosepiece

Parcenterable, outward, rotary type for bright field lens [with 4 mounts], detachable ELWD Plan Apo ULWD Plan Apo

2x, 5x, 10x, 20x, 50x 50x,100x

ELWD Plan Apo [Parfocality Adjustable]

2x, 5x, 10x, 20x, 50x

ULWD Plan Apo [Parfocality Adjustable]

50x ,100x

NIR Apo Mass [main unit / light source]

35

Switchable [eyepiece/laser = 100/0 or 0/100]; Simultaneous observation [50:50]

20X – 2000X

Magnification range

Objectives [optional]

PSM-1000E Erect Image

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

20x, 50x 6.8 kg / 2.5 kg

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Inverted Microscopes Motic AE2000

Motic’s new AE2000 Inverted Microscope is designed for routine live cell inspection with an easy and flexible set up, ideal for university, routine-clinical, and lab environments. The model’s main applications offer superior image quality when viewing cell cultures in microbiology, living organisms and tissue culture samples.

observation position, especially useful for prolonged sample viewing. The auto on / off function of the power supply extends the lifespan of the sample and light bulb and at the same time saves energy. Another added feature, a modular interchangeable illumination concept, allows for the easy transition from halogen to LED to fulfill a wide-range of customer viewing expectations. The improved phase contrast quality of the model makes the instrument suitable for a greater range of applications that demand precision optics.

The newly designed Binocular Ergo tubes with 360° swiveling "butterfly" design and optional telescopic feature offers the most comfortable

The entire microscope including optical system is manufactured now completely lead free, following the International RoHS regulations.

Supporting all these applications and functions is the AE30/31's stable inverted "Y" designed stand. The inverted "Y" provides the necessary stability and weight distribution to handle the attachment of Epi-fluorescence and other accessories. The stand features low position focus mechanisms to alleviate wrist strain while adjusting the focus at 1 mm minimum increments throughout the 10 mm stroke range. The stage sits at a height of 207 mm for rapid sample changes. A universal mechanical stage [tilted adjustment] is available as an option plus a series of Petri dish holders.

Features • CCIS optics • Field flatness up to F.N. 22 • Centrable ELWD 0.30 N.A. condenser [WD = 72 mm] • Standard centrable Phase Contrast slider [PH 1 / PH 3] • Externally mounted and centrable 30 W / 6 V quartz halogen illumination • Epi-fluorescence attachment available

MICROSCOPES

A revolutionary design packed with features, the AE2000 sets a new benchmark in affordable inverted microscopy.

Motic AE30/31 The AE30/31 is an inverted microscope for the routine realm, but offers upscale research functions, such as fluorescence and an externally mounted and centrable 30 W / 6 V halogen Koehler illumination. Complementing the uniform illumination is the ELWD 0.30 N.A. condenser with its 72 mm working distance for large sample and carriers, which can be adjusted and centered to provide the optimum amount of illumination for each sample. Furthermore, the condenser is equipped with a slider stop for the equipped standard centrable PH 1 and PH 3 Phase slider. An optional LWD 0.50 N.A. condenser [WD = 28 mm] is available should the need arise. Driven for applications, the AE30/31 incorporates the Colour Corrected Infinity Optical System [CCIS®] to power system expansions and to produce, along with the CCIS® Plan Achromat inverted objectives, crisp, flat and high contrast images in field flatness up to F.N.22. These images can be viewed for hours upon hours in fatigue free manner thanks to the comfortable 45° observation angle and viewing height of 380 mm [400 mm – trinocular], which is the ideal height from the laboratory tabletop to the users’ eyepieces. Assisting the angle is the Siedentopf system [50 - 70 mm] for setting the correct interpupillary distance and the adjustable high eye point WF10X eyepiece, which can be adjusted ±5° for individual astigmatism and aligning reticules.

www.ereinc.com

Fluorescence – The AE-30/31 system is designed to accept an attachable EpiFluorescence illuminator capable of handling fluorescence microscopy markers FITC to GFP. The attachment inserts into the back of the AE-30/31 stand with filter selection located near the focus control mechanism.

sales@ereinc.com

36


Zoom Stereomicroscopes Motic SMZ-140 Compact Greenough zoom stereomicroscope solution for demanding applications

The SMZ140's vast assortment of accessories create a modular feel to the microscope, opening solutions to demanding applications.

MICROSCOPES

The following are some sample applications: The SMZ-140 line is the most versatile stereomicroscope manufactured by Motic. The list of applications may seem only a few, but each day presents another opportunity to incorporate this fantastic microscope into one’s system. The basic model is a zoom stereomicroscope system with a zoom ratio of 1:4 and a working distance of 80 mm based upon the Greenough optical system. The Greenough optical system displays crisp, stereoscopic images while having the ruggedness to handle harsh environments of the laboratory or machines. With three optical carrier options and numerous stands and accessories, the SMZ-140 can be configured to your requirements. The overall system produces a maximum magnification of 180X and a maximum working distance of 200 mm depending on the configuration chosen by you. In addition, the compact size of the SMZ-140 permits it into areas of limited space or the option of having several units where one could only fit with regular zoom stereomicroscopes. Another option with the SMZ-140 series is the built-in digital versions DM-143 [2-megapixal camera] and DMW-143 [3-simultaneous outputs] versions.

Motic SMZ-168 The SMZ-168 Series of stereomicroscopes incorporates a zoom ratio of 1:6.7, one of the industry's largest, with a standard working distance of 113 mm inside a Greenough optical stereo system. Moreover, the standard system provides a maximum magnification of 50X [with standard 10X eyepieces] and guaranteed parfocality throughout the magnifications. Designed for long term usage, the SMZ-168 is available in both a 35° and 60° observation angle format to fit the application and environment setup. Assisting in fatigue preventation is the high eyepoint system of the standard 10X eyepieces, which allows the user to assume a more comfortable posture when using the microscope and eyeglass wearers to observe without the fear of scratching their lenses. The standard eyepieces offer a field of view of 30.7 mm to cover more of sample in less time. Fabricated for versatility, the SMZ-168 is offered in a modular format to conform the requirements of the task and environment. Expansion is possible with a varity of accessories to handle the complex needs of today as well as tomorrow.

37

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Economic Wire Bonders: The addition of the SMZ-140 with industrial holder onto one’s economic or small-scale wire bonder gives one’s customers the optical power and performance of an upscale model at an entry level price. SMZ-140 for Die Bonders: The size and the optical performance of the SMZ-140 allows one the opportunity to add a high-performance optical microscope for inspection of one’s die bonder without reconfiguring the system. Spot Inspection: Integrating the SMZ-140 with one of the available stands and illumination provides a spot inspection site to randomly test the quality of working being performed during that particular shift. LED Inspection: Combining the optical quality of the SMZ-143 with the real-time filters of the Moticam 2000, defects or potential sources of defects can be identified before the damage [both economically and mechanically] can happen.

Features • Compact size • Available in a trinocular and 60° head versions • Two choices of built in digital camara head • 5 Achromat auxiliary objectives • Max system magnification of 180X • Wide range of arms and stands • Available in two digital versions: DM-143 and DMW-143

The following is a brief reference list of possible industrial applications for the SMZ-168: Wire Bonder: The role of the SMZ-168 60, plus industrial arm, on a wire bonder is to periodically inspect the bond head’s alignment in placing the wire. Manual Probe Station: For inspection of bonding pads and large geometrics, the SMZ168 Trinocular is the ideal choice. The trinocular version provides the option of video output for a convenient observation or digital for documentation and later analysis. Pull Tester: The SMZ-168 with an industrial arm is the optical inspection unit to view the process of pull testing a random wire bonded substrate for failure analysis. Medical Device Inspection: Using the SMZ168 on a boom stand with an exterior light source [i.e. MLC-150 with ring light guide] provides the working surface and/or space saving needed for this inspections. Using the SMZ-168 trinocular with either a Moticam or a third party camera converts the inspection station into a documentation and analysis centre.

Features • 6.7 : 1 Zoom Ratio • 6.7X - 50X standard magnification • 113 mm working distance • 35° ergonomic observation angle • 6 Achromat auxiliary objectives • Available in trinocular and 60° head versions

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Motic FBGG LED 3W LED illumination upgrade of the FBGG stand for the SMZ-168.

Elite Microscope Cameras

Features • 5500 K colour temperature • 3W Lambertian LED individual bulb for incident / transmitted • Adjustable intensity control; linear

Moticam Pro Series Microscope Cameras The Moticam Pro range consists of 12 feature rich options providing a large platform for highquality digital microscopy. A Moticam Pro is a sensitive piece of equipment designed to deliver high-quality CCD based images and yet still be affordable and flexible enough for a large variety of applications. Choose from Colored / Monochrome and Standard / Peltier Cooled options. The Moticam Pro marks an extension of Motic’s Camera solutions from the affordable high-resolution CMOS market to the scientific grade CCD range while still offering many choices. Whether your application calls for a Full Color 5.0 MP camera for documentation or a Cooled Monochrome camera with 6.45 x 6.45 micron pixels for low light microscopy, there is a Moticam Pro available for you. Designed exclusively in the new labs in Vancouver BC, and assembled under clean-room conditions in the Motic factory headquarters, these cameras are ready to be shipped at a moment’s notice. As with all Motic Digital Solutions, the Moticam Pro is shipped with a full complement of application software and tools to get you started right away.

Sensor Size

MICROSCOPES

The Motic FBGG LED stand is the LED upgrade of the existing FBGG stand for the SMZ-168 series of stereomicroscopes. The stand is equipped with individual 3W LED bulbs for incident and transmitted illumination, which can be used in conjunction or separately. Both the incident and transmitted illumination's intensity can be adjusted from 0% to 100% via the linear intensity control located on the right side of the stand.

The FBGG LED's transmitted illumination is an indirect illumination to avoid the hot spot problems of the other LED stands when used with a digital camera. While the incident illumination is able to be adjusted from an angle of 0° to 33° with a working field of 50 mm. Both operate in the 5500 K colour temperature range for smooth and comfortable usage.

Pixel Size (Micron)

Resolution (Pixel)

Features

MoticamPro

Sony Sensor

252A

ICX252AQ

1/1.8"

3.45 X 3.45

2080 X 1542

Color

252B

ICX252AQ

1/1.8"

3.45 X 3.45

2080 X 1542

Color With Peltier Cooling

282A

ICX282AQ

2/3"

3.40 X 3.40

2580 X 1944

Color

282B

ICX282AQ

2/3"

3.40 X 3.40

2580 X 1944

Color With Peltier Cooling

205A

ICX205AK

1/2"

4.65 X 4.65

1360 X 1024

Color

205B

ICX205AK

1/2"

4.65 X 4.65

1360 X 1024

Color With Peltier Cooling

205C

ICX205AL

1/2"

4.65 X 4.65

1360 X 1024

Monochrome

205D

ICX205AL

1/2"

4.65 X 4.65

1360 X 1024

Monochrome With Peltier Cooling

285A

ICX85AQ

2/3"

6.45 X 6.45

1360 X 1024

Color

285B

ICX285AQ

2/3"

6.45 X 6.45

1360 X 1024

Color With Peltier Cooling

285C

ICX285AL

2/3"

6.45 X 6.45

1360 X 1024

Monochrome

285D

ICX285AL

2/3"

6.45 X 6.45

1360 X 1024

Monochrome With Peltier Cooling

www.ereinc.com

Hardware • Sony ICX CCD imaging sensor • Motic control, processing & imaging boards • Built-in 4 frame buffer* • Built-in FPGA* • TTL trigger port* • Schott BG-40 filter • CS/C mount (C-ring provided) • USB 2.0 Data mini port (USB cable provided) • Universal power supply (for cooled cameras only) • Peltier cooling device (for cooled cameras only) • Cooling up to 10 degrees below ambient with temperature readout * Unlockable with SDK integration

Software • MOTIC IMAGES PLUS application software • MOTIC IMAGES ADVANCED application software for windows computer only* • Twain Drivers • Motic SDK • Motic direct show drivers • Motic MI devices live imaging module with live calibration, grid, scale cross and scale bars * Available through free download

Recommened Computer Specifications • Intel Centrino 1,6 GHz or better • 1 GB RAM or better (2 GB recommended if using shared memory graphics card) • USB 2.0 • Windows XP (SP3) or better • Macintosh OSX

sales@ereinc.com

38


Basic Microscope Cameras MICROSCOPES

Moticams Moticams are known around the globe for their ease-of-use and their adaptability to a number of applications. Motic strives to ensure that everything you may need to attach the Moticam to your microscope is included in one box.

Moticam 1 and 1SP

Moticam 2 and 3

Each includes: • An attachable camera • A focusable coated glass lens • Two adjustable size eyepiece adapters • A 4-dot calibration slide • The macro viewing tube • All cables • A full version of Motic Images Plus application software

Moticam 1 • Live resolution: 800 x 600 pixels • Sensor type: CMOS • Optical calculation: 1/4" • Focusable lens: 8 mm

Moticam 2 • Live resolution: 2.0 Mega pixels • Sensor type: CMOS • Optical calculation: 1/3" • Focusable lens: 12 mm

Moticam 1SP • Live resolution: 1.3 Mega pixels • Sensor type: CMOS • Optical calculation: 1/3" • Focusable lens: 12 mm

Moticam 3 • Live resolution: 3.0 Mega pixels • Sensor type: CMOS • Optical calculation: 1/2" • Focusable lens: 16 mm

Moticam 5 and 10

Moticam 580

Moticam X

Moticam 5 • Live resolution: 5.0 Mega pixels • Sensor type: CMOS • Optical calculation: 1/2.5" • Focusable lens: 12 mm

This camera does not require a computer for standard operation once it has been setup on a microscope.

The Moticam X is a next generation microscope camera that will transform almost any old conventional microscope into a wireless device capable of sending live high resolution images to your WIFI laptop or tablet devices.

Moticam 3 • Live resolution: 10.0 Mega pixels • Sensor type: CMOS • Optical calculation: 1/2.5" • Focusable lens: 12 mm

39

• • • • •

Sensor type: CMOS Sensor resolution: 5.0 MP Optical calculation: 1/2.5" Focusable lens: 12 mm Output possibilities: HDMI, Analog Video, USB, SD Card • Recording possibilities: 1080 Video and 5.0 MP onto SD Card • Remote control

• • • • • • •

Sensor type: CMOS WIFI resolution: 1280 x 1024 pixels Optical calculation: 1/3" Focusable lens: 12 mm Calibration slide Macro tube Power supply: Through provided switching power adapter

Motic Images Plus 2.0

Motic Images Advanced 3.2

• Multi-language application software • Turn images into knowledge through capture, measurement, editing, amalgamation and reporting tools • Software for Macintosh OSX included where available

• Same tools as Motic Images Plus 2.0 plus • Manual and single point segmentation • Multi focus: Assembles a single focused image from a stack • Assembly: Assembles series of x/y images • Save images in DICOM standard

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Meiji Techno Microscopes

EMZ-8TR TRINOCULAR ZOOM STEREO BODY

Features • Binocular zoom body with crisp, high resolution, precision optics provide an excellent, erect, unreversed stereoscopic image • Rugged all metal body designed to last a lifetime • Zoom Range: 0.7X to 4.5X • Zoom Ratio: 6.5:1 • Ergonomically positioned bilateral zoom controls • Binocular eyetubes inclined at 45° for fatigue free viewing • Total magnification range available with auxiliary lenses and eyepieces: 2.1X to 270X • Dual dioptric adjustments (±5 diopters) allows the specimen to remain in focus throughout the entire zoom magnification range • Interpupillary distance adjustment from 54 mm to 75 mm • Binocular body can be rotated a full 360° and locked in any position • Standard working distance: 93 mm • Working distance with optional auxiliary lenses: 34 mm to 251 mm

Features • Trinocular zoom body for use in photographic and video applications. When the beamsplitter is engaged, 100% of the light from the left optical path is directed to the phototube. The image can still be viewed through the right eyetube. • Crisp, high resolution, precision optics provide an excellent, erect, unreversed stereoscopic image • Rugged all metal body designed to last a lifetime • Zoom Range: 0.7X to 4.5X • Zoom Ratio: 6.5:1 • Ergonomically positioned bilateral zoom controls • Binocular eyetubes inclined at 45° for fatigue free viewing • Total magnification range available with auxiliary lenses and eyepieces: 2.45X to 202.5X • Dual dioptric adjustments (±5 diopters) allows the specimen to remain in focus throughout the entire zoom magnification range • Interpupillary distance adjustment from 54 mm to 75 mm • Binocular body can be rotated a full 360° and locked in any position • Standard working distance: 104 mm • Working distance with optional auxiliary lenses: 57 mm to 250 mm

MT-EMZ-5 Binocular Zoom Stereo Body, 0.7X to 4.5X, W.D. 93 mm MT-MA502 10X Super Wide Field Eyepiece MT-P-STAND Basic Pole Stand W/ "F" Focusing Holder Mounted On A Plain Base

MICROSCOPES

EMZ-5 BINOCULAR ZOOM STEREO BODY

MT-PK-STAND An Extended Working Distance Ergonomic Pole Stand W/ 250 mm Pole & "F" Focusing Holder Mounted On An Ergo Base MT-PKL2-STAND An Ergonomic Pole Type Stand W/ Dual LED Illumination System MT-PBH-STAND Pole Type Stand W/ Focusing Holder & W/ Dual Halogen Illumination System

P Stand Basic pole stand with "F" focusing holder mounted on a plain base. Supplied with one 94.5 mm diameter reversible black and white stage plate and two stage clips. (8.35" / 212 mm pillar)

PK Stand An extended working distance ergonomic pole stand with 250 mm pole and "F" focusing holder mounted on a ergo base. Supplied with one 94.5 mm diameter reversible black and white stage plate and two stage clips. The PK can be accessorized with an optional 20 watt halogen incident illuminator with stand alone power supply. Base Dimensions: 330 mm (12.99") wide x 280 mm (11") deep.

PKL-2 Stand An ergonomic pole type stand with transmitted and incident LED illumination system, coarse focusing holder, 5 watt LED incident llumination, dual variable intensity control, removable glass stage plate, two stage clips, and power cord. Transmitted light base features an extremely bright multiple LED array with milk white diffusion plate and clear glass stage plate. Automatic voltage (100 V to 240 V) sensing power supply. Optional accessories include analyzer/polarizer for transmitted light pol work, white/black stage plate, 4" pole extension, and mechanical stages. Base Dimensions: 330 mm (12.99") wide x 280 mm (11") deep

MT-EMZ-8TR Trinocular Zoom Stereo Body, 0.7X to 4.5X, W.D. 104 mm

PBH Stand

MT-PK-STAND An Extended Working Distance Ergonomic Pole Stand W/ 250 mm Pole & "F" Focusing Holder Mounted On An Ergo Base

Illuminated pole stand with "F" focusing holder. Provides both transmitted and incident halogen illumination with variable intensity control. Supplied with 94.5 mm diameter clear glass stage plate, reversible black and white stage plate and two stage clips. Illuminators may be operated independently or simultaneously. Total Height: 280 mm (11.02"). Pillar Height: 212 mm (8.35"). Base Dimensions: 160 mm (6.30") wide by 240 mm (9.44") deep.

www.ereinc.com

MT-EMZ-13TR Trinocular Zoom Stereo Body, 1X to 7X, W.D. 90 mm MT-MA502 10X Super Wide Field Eyepiece MT-P-STAND Basic Pole Stand W/ "F" Focusing Holder Mounted On A Plain Base

MT-PKL2-STAND An Ergonomic Pole Type Stand W/ Dual Led Illumination System MT-PBH-STAND Pole Type Stand W/ Focusing Holder & W/ Dual Halogen Illumination System

sales@ereinc.com

40


MICROSCOPES

RZ SERIES RZ Series CMO Stereo Microscopes are advanced, high-performance, modular, stereo microscopes specifically designed with today's demanding microscopy applications in mind. Engineered around a common main objective and parallel optical paths, the RZ Series offers crisp, distortion-free, high-resolution images at magnifications ranging from 3.75X to 300X. Browse the optical components, photo/video accessories, and stands to configure a system to meet your needs. The RZ features a 10:1 zoom ratio with built-in variable dual-iris diaphragms and 12 positive click stops through the zoom range. Two perpendicular columns of eight zoom lenses in four groups move in smooth motion controlled by ergonomically sized and positioned zoom knobs. A magnification indicator is conveniently located on the zoom control. Exterior components are painted with special anti-static finish which is especially useful when working in sensitive environments. Two types of viewing heads are available.

The body is the heart of the modular zoom stereo microscope design. It contains the objectives and prisms that capture the image of the specimen, magnify it, and direct it to the eyetubes. The body by itself cannot be used to view an object; it also needs eyepieces that further magnify the image and allow the viewer to see, and it must be mounted on a stand that has a focus mechanism for raising and lowering the body.

MT-RZ-B Zoom Body & Focus Block, 1:10 Zoom Ratio W/ Built-In Iris Diaphragm & Click Stops * MT-748 Binocular Head, 45째 Incline MT-749 Ergonomic Binocular Head, Inclination Adjustable Vertically From 10째 To 150째 * MT-730 UWF 10X Eyepiece, High Eyepoint, Focusable, Fn 24 (Each), Receives 25 mm O.D. (Reticule) * MT-742 Plan Objective, 1.0X For The MT-RZ-B, W.D. 76 mm * MT-RZP-STAND Plain Stand W/ Black Plastic Stage Plate, 12.79" (325 mm) Tall Pillar MT-RZT-STAND Transmitted Light Stand For Brightfield Illumination, 12.79" (325 mm) Tall Pillar * MT-MA-964 LED Ring Illuminator W/ Transformer, 115 V - Mounts Directly To RZ Series Objective W/O Adapter MT-MA-751 Photo / Video Attachment * As shown in picture.

Zoom stereo microscope bodies are the most flexible because they offer a wider range of magnification than turret (EMT) or fixed (EMF) bodies. Much like the zoom lens on a camera, zoom objectives increase and decrease magnification progressively, causing the specimen to grow or shrink smoothly in the eyes of the viewer.

Meiji Techno offers EM Series zoom stereo microscope bodies with a wide range of magnifications and working distances. All EM bodies come with dust covers and rubber eyeshields. Eyepieces are sold separately and we have a wide selection to offer.

Compound Biological Microscope MT4000 The Meiji MT4000 Series Biological Laboratory Microscopes include the advanced Infinity Corrected Optical System. The MT4000 series includes: Objective Lenses: DIN Infinity Corrected Optical System (ICOS) Plan brightfield 4X, 10X, s40X and s100X oil mounted in smooth-operating, ball bearing mounted, quintuple nosepiece. Viewing Heads: Siedentopf-type binocular head or trinocular head for camera integration. Each head has the eyetubes inclined at 30째 with the left eyetube having graduated diopter settings. The interpupillary distance is adjustable between 53 mm - 75 mm. An 80/20 beamsplitter for the trinocular tube can be engaged for photo work. (100% to eyetubes or 80% to phototube & 20% to the eyetube.) Eyepieces: 10X Widefield High Eyepoint eyepieces F.N.20 are standard with a 19 mm reticle mount. 15X and 20X eyepieces are available as an option. Also avilable - Widefield High Eyepoint 10X focusable eyepiece that accept 25 mm reticles. Total Magnification: 40X, 100X, 400X and 1000X Specimen Stage: Ceramic coated right-handed (left-handed avilable upon request), flat top stage measures 171 mm x 115 mm and travels 78 mm(X) x 52 mm(Y). Ergonomically positioned coaxial drop down controls. Illumination: Powerful white LED or 30 watt halogen illumination provides enhanced image quality and brightness for the observation of specimens and photomicroscopy. Light Focusing: Abbe 1.25 NA Condenser in quick change dovetail mount. Size & Weight: Binocular - 390 mm (15.4") D x 410 mm (16.1") H x 210 mm (8.3") W, 8 kg (17.6 lbs) Trinocular - 390 mm (15.4") D x 465 mm (18.3") H x 210 mm (8.3") W, 8.7 kg (19.2 lbs)

41

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

MT-4200L Binocular Compound Biological Microscope W/ LED Illuminator MT-4200H Binocular Compound Biological Microscope W/ 30 W Halogen MT-4300L Trinocular Compound Biological Microscope W/ LED Illuminator MT-4300H Trinocular Compound Biological Microscope W/ 30 W Halogen

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Metallurgical MT7000

Made in Japan MICROSCOPES

The MT7000 Metallurgical Reflected Light Microscope includes: Objective Lenses: DIN Infinity Corrected Optical System (ICOS) Plan Epi 5X, 10X, 20X and 50X mounted in smooth-operating, ball bearing mounted, quintuple nosepiece. Viewing Heads: Siedentopf-type binocular head or trinocular head for camera integration. Each head has the eyetubes inclined at 30° with the left eyetube having graduated diopter settings. The interpupillary distance is adjustable between 53 mm - 75 mm. An 80/20 beamsplitter for the trinocular tube can be engaged for photo work. (100% to eyetubes or 80% to phototube & 20% to the eyetube.) 30 mm I.D. eyetube. Eyepieces: SWH10X Widefield High Eyepoint eyepieces F.N.22 are standard with a 25 mm reticle mount. 15X and 20X eyepieces are available as an option. Also available - Widefield High Eyepoint 10X focusable eyepiece that accept 25 mm reticles. Total Magnification: 50X, 100X, 200X and 500X Specimen Stage: Ceramic-coated flat-top stage 191 mm x 126 mm, with 100 mm x 100 mm of travel. Equipped with precision ball bearing guides and low position drop down coaxial controls for X-Y movement. Illumination: Vertical illuminator with full Koehler design equipped with high intensity 6 V, 30 Watt halogen light source, field iris, aperture iris and filter slots. Capable of brightfield or simple reflected light polarization techniques. Includes blue clear, green clear, polarizing and neutral density (ND 50) filters in mounts. Automatic voltage (100 V~240 V) sensing power supply and variable rheostat control are built into the microscope base. Focusing: Ergonomically low positioned coaxial focusing controls allow the operator to work with their forearms relaxed on the working surface. Range of travel is 23 mm. Rotation of fine focus is 0.2 mm per revolution. Size & Weight: Binocular - MT7000 424.5 mm (16.7") D x 471 mm (18.5") H x 210 mm (8.3") W, 8.5 kg (18.7 lbs) Trinocular - MT7100 424.5 mm (16.7") D x 526 mm (20.7") H x 210 mm (8.3") W, 9.2 kg (20.3 lbs)

MT-7000 Binocular Metallurgical Microscope MT-7100 Trinocular Metallurgical Microscope

Asbestos Combo PLM - PCM Microscopes The MT6800 Series Combo PLM - PCM (Polarized Light and Phase Contrast) Microscopes for Asbestos fiber identification applications are manufactured pursuant to NIOSH 9002 Reference methods and NIOSH 7400 and OSHA ID 160 Reference methods. Each model comes with Strain free Plan DIN brightfield POL objectives, rotatable stage with 360 degree graduations, POL / PHASE / Dispersion Staining Abbe condenser and builtin Koehler illuminator as standard equipment. Viewing Heads: Model MA952 is the Siedentopf-type binocular head and Model MA953 is the trinocular head for camera integration. Each head has the 23.2 mm eyetubes inclined at 30 degrees with the left eyetube having graduated diopter settings. The interpupillary distance is adjustable between 53 mm - 75 mm. An 80/20 beamsplitter for the trinocular tube can be engaged for photo work. Each head has the new integrated reticle angle compensation system. When the IP distance or number is changed, the crossline reticle remains perpendicular in the FOV. Eyepieces: 10X Widefield High Eyepoint eyepiece F.N.20, 10X Widefield High Eyepoint

www.ereinc.com

focusable eyepiece that has a 21 mm crossline reticule and guide pin, and 10X Widefield High Eyepoint Compensating Focusing eyepiece, F.N.20 with Walton & Beckett reticle are standard.

Objective Changer: The smooth-operating, ball bearing mounted, quadruple nosepiece provides effortless objective changes. Objectives: Assortment of U. Planachromat Phase and S. Planachromat Polarizing Infinity Corrected objectives are available. Stage: Ceramic coated 360 degree rotatable fully indexed stage with vernier and stage clips. Condenser: Strain free Abbe condenser, N.A. 1.25 with centerable annuli for 10X, 20X, 40X phase or 10X, 20X, 40X dispersion staining objectives in sliding mount, with iris diaphragm and dovetail mount. Illumination: Powerful 30 watt transmitted light Koehler halogen illumination provides enhanced image quality and brightness for the observation of specimens. Accessories: All MT6800 series models come with a first order red compensating plate (also called gypsum or sensitive tint plate), an analyzer in sliding mount, bertrand lens, blue clear and green interference filters, centering telescope, and stage micrometer. MT-6820 Binocular PLM-PCM Microscope MT-6830 Trinocular PLM-PCM Microscope

sales@ereinc.com

42


MICROSCOPES

MT-9900 The MT9900 series incident and transmitted light polarizing microscopes include the following: Objective Lenses: DIN Infinity Corrected Optical System (ICOS) Strain Free Plan 4X, 10X and s40X mounted in smooth-operating, ball bearing mounted, quintuple nosepiece. Viewing Heads: Siedentopf-type binocular head or trinocular head for camera integration. Each head has the eyetubes inclined at 30° with the left eyetube having graduated diopter settings. The interpupillary distance is adjustable between 53 mm - 75 mm. An 80/20 beamsplitter for the trinocular tube can be engaged for photo work. (100% to eyetubes or 80% to phototube & 20% to the eyetube.) Eyepieces: One KHW10X Focusing eyepiece with guide pin and crossline reticle and one widefield compensating eyepiece F.N.20 are standard with a 21 mm reticle mount. Tube O.D. 23.2 mm. Total Magnification: 40X, 100X, 400X Specimen Stage: Ceramic-coated 360 degree rotatable fully indexed stage with vernier and stage clips. Stage is 175 mm in diameter. Illumination: Transmitted Koehler 6V, 30W halogen illumination and reflected 6 V, 30 W Koehler halogen illumination. Condenser: Strain Free Abbe N.A. 1.25 condenser with iris in dovetail mount with swing-out top lens for lower power objectives Focusing: Ergonomically low positioned coaxial focusing controls allow the operator to work with their forearms relaxed on the working surface. Range of travel is 23 mm. Rotation of fine focus is 0.2 mm per revolution. Included: MT-9900 series incident and transmitted brightfield models with focusable bertrand lens, rotatable analyzer, and 3-position slider with 1st order red, 1/4 wave plate, brightfield position.

MT-9920 MT-9930

Note: C-mount adapter and digital camera are optional items and are not included in the price below. MT-9920 Binocular Polarizing Microscope W/ Incident & Transmitted Illumination MT-9930 Trinocular Polarizing Microscope W/ Incident & Transmitted Illumination

Microscope Accessories Plain Microscope Slides

Superfrost / Colorfrost Microscope Slides

Made from the highest purity, corrosion-resistant glass. Slides are packed in airtight wrapper to keep out dust and moisture that can cause sticking.

Slides have a raised printed writing surface that eliminates the need for tedious relabeling of slides. The unique opaque coating provides a bright background for excellent contrast and smooth surface makes it easier to write on. The durable, opaque tab is inert to common laboratory, chemicals and reagents.

Features • Autoclavable • Durable, opaque tab • Available in an array of tab colors

43

Coverglass

Superslip Cover Glass

Made of the finest optical borosilicate glass. The coverglass is corrosion resistant, and ready for use. Manufactured of glass which is stickresistant. It is available in squares, circles and rectangles. Packed in 1 oz plastic boxes with custom-molded bases for easy one-at-a-time dispensing. Available in all standard and non-standard sizes.

Superslip® Cover Glass is uniquely manufactured to eliminate sticking and reduce waste. Our processing techniques result in superior quality. This product combines specialized production methods and moisture resistant packaging to prevent sticking. Superslip Cover Glass is the product you need to make your coverslipper run smoothly.

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Jaw Crushers

Retsch Jaw Crushers BB 100/BB and 200/BB 300

RETSCH Jaw Crushers are primarily used in laboratories and pilot plants, often under rough conditions. For applications such as the quality control of raw materials the BB 200 and BB 300 can be integrated into the process line for continuous operation.

Features • Powerful size reduction with high throughput • High final fineness (down to d90 < 2 mm) • Wear compensation due to zero point adjustment • Batch-wise and continuous operation • Wide selection of breaking jaw materials • Safe and simple handling and cleaning

Rotor Mills

Retsch Jaw Crusher BB 51

Retsch Ultra Centrifugal Mill ZM 200

The BB 51 jaw crusher is particularly useful in reducing small laboratory samples with a large feed size down to < 0.5 mm in one easy step. Samples such as stone, minerals, ores, glass, synthetic resins and many other hard or brittle substances are ground without contamination, using grinding tools of manganese steel, stainless steel, wear-resistant tungsten carbide, zirconium oxide or heavy metal-free steel. The grind size is controlled through a digital gap width setting. The BB 51 features a zero-point-adjustment to compensate for wear and assure reproducible samples at all times. With its small footprint and dust-tight housing, this unique jaw crusher easily fits on any laboratory bench.

The powerful and versatile ZM 200 offers the ultimate in performance and operating comfort. This widely used mill pulverizes a great variety of substances extremely fast, thus allowing for a high sample throughput without degradation of sample properties. The grinding sets can be cleaned easily without any tools which helps to avoid cross contamination from frequently changing samples.

BB 51

BB 100

BB 200

Medium-hard, hard, brittle, tough

Type of Material:

Specifications

ZM 200

Application:

Fine grinding

Feed Material:

Soft, medium-hard, brittle, fibrous

Feed Size*:

< 10 mm

Final Fineness*:

< 40 μm

BB 300

Coarse and pre-crushing

Application:

Thanks to the vast range of accessories with different rotors, ring sieves and collecting systems, the ZM 200 can be easily adapted to suit a wide range of applications.

Features • Robust high torque motor with speed range from 6,000 to 18,000 rpm • Rapid and gentle size reduction by 2step rotor / screen system • Easy to operate and clean • Automatic feeding system for sample volumes of up to 4.5 liters

Features • High final fineness (d90 < 0.5 mm) • Digital gap width setting • Breaking jaws in 5 different materials • No-rebound feed hopper • Dust-tight, no maintenance required

Specifications

MILLS & GRINDERS

The powerful RETSCH Jaw Crushers are designed for the rapid, gentle coarse and primary crushing of hard, brittle and tough materials. The breaking jaws are available in a variety of materials which include heavy-metalfree steel. Their efficiency and safety makes these pulverizers ideal for sample preparation in laboratories and industrial plants. Four basic models are available: from the compact benchtop model BB 51 to the biggest floor model, BB 300 which allows for feed sizes up to 130 mm. RETSCH jaw crushers combine increased operating convenience with maximum working safety.

Feed Size*:

< 35 mm

< 50 mm

< 90 mm

< 130 mm

Final Fineness*:

< 0.5 mm

< 4 mm

< 2 mm

< 5 mm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration/settings

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration/settings

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

44


MILLS & GRINDERS

Retsch Rotor Beater Mills SR 200 and SR 300 Due to their robust design and their ability to process large amounts of sample, the Rotor Beater Mills SR 200 and SR 300 are ideal for smallscale production and are also suitable for installation into automated preparation systems. The SR 300 is the leader among the Rotor Beater Mills. Its high speed allows a high sample throughput. Grinding chamber, feed hopper and material inlet and outlet are completely made from highquality stainless steel.

Specifications

SR 200 / SR 300

Application:

Size reduction, deagglomeration

Feed Material:

Soft, medium-hard

Feed Size*:

< 15 mm

Final Fineness*:

< 80 μm / < 50 μm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

High final fineness Features • High throughput • Final fineness down to 50 μm • Easy handling and cleaning • Exchangeable grinding and sieve inserts • Distance rotor for thermally sensitive samples • Quick-action door lock and motor brake

Size reduction and deagglomeration in the SR 200 and SR 300 are achieved by impact and shear effects. The feed material passes from the hopper into the center of the grinding chamber where it is crushed between the rotor, sieve and grinding inserts.

Retsch Cyclone Mill TWISTER

Retsch Cross Beater Mill SK 100

The cyclone mill TWISTER is used for the sample preparation prior to NIR analysis. It is suitable for the quick and gentle grinding of fibrous and soft products down to analytical fineness. Typical applications include feeds, forage and grain. The high speed and the optimized form of the rotor and the grinding chamber generate an air jet which carries the sample through the cyclone into the sample bottle and also has a cooling effect on the material.

Like the Rotor Beater Mills, the Cross Beater Mill SK 100 is suitable for coarse and fine size reduction, either in batches or continuously. This robust mill is used in the laboratory as well as under rough conditions in production facilities. Due to its powerful drive, it is often possible to achieve a fineness < 100 μm in a single working step. Moreover, the SK 100 offers the highest possible degree of operating safety.

Features • 3 controlled speeds • Cyclone separator with 250 mL collecting bottle for quick sample extraction • No cross contamination thanks to easy cleaning

Specifications

TWISTER

Application:

Sample preparation for NIR analysis

As soon as the material is smaller than the aperture size of the sieve it enters the collecting receptacle. The quick-acting door lock ensures easy access to the grinding chamber for quick cleaning. With their motor brake (braking time 0.5 s), safety switch, splashback and access barrier in the inlet and outlet areas, the SR 200 offers the highest degree of operating safety.

Features • High throughput • Final fineness down to 100 μm • Easy handling and cleaning • Wide range of accessories including various collection and feeding systems, rotors and sieves Specifications

SK 100

Application:

Size reduction

Feed Material:

Medium-hard, brittle

Feed Size*:

< 15 mm

Final Fineness*:

< 100 μm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings Feed Material:

Fibrous, soft

Feed Size*:

< 10 mm

Final Fineness*:

< 500 μm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

45

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Cutting Mills

Retsch Cutting mills SM 100, SM 200 and SM 300

The RETSCH Cutting Mills SM 200 and SM 300 excel especially in the tough jobs where other cutting mills fail. They provide highly efficient primary size reduction of such heterogeneous materials as waste or electronic components but are also suitable for many other types of samples. The mills offer a high level of operational safety and a long service life of the grinding tools. A wide selection of screens, hoppers, collection systems as well as a cyclone-suction-combination allow for easy adaptation to the individual application task. All units are also available in a special version for heavy-metal-free size reduction.

Specifications

SM 100 / SM 200 / SM 300

Application:

Size reduction

Feed Material:

Soft, medium-hard, tough, elastic, fibrous

Feed Size*:

Max. 60 x 80 mm

Final Fineness*:

0.25 - 20 mm

MILLS & GRINDERS

The cutting mill SM 100 processes soft, medium-hard, elastic and fibrous products which can be comminuted without requiring extremely high forces. The mill is particularly suited for routine applications. It is easy to operate and can be mounted on a solid table or on the optional base frame.

Features • Powerful size reduction, including heterogeneous materials • SM 300 with variable speed • Defined final fineness • Low heat build-up • Quick and easy cleaning • Wide range of accessories

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

Knife Mills Features • Perfect homogenization • Results with minimum standard deviation • Variable speed • For sample volumes up to 700 mL or 4,500 mL • Autoclavable grinding tools • Unique lids for volume adaptation of grinding chamber • Accessories for heavy-metal-free grinding

Retsch Knife Mills Grindomix GM 200 and GM 300 The Grindomix Knife Mills set new standards in food sample preparation. The cutting effect produced by the steel blades in conjunction with the patented gravity lid results in the size reduction and perfect homogenization of samples high in water or oil content. It is possible to take a random, yet representative sub-sample from any location in the grinding chamber and still obtain a meaningful analysis result. The GM 200 and GM 300 produce representative samples with a minimum standard deviation in as little as 30 seconds. With its sturdy design, industrial motor, high safety standard and digital parameter settings including memory the Grindomix mills are truly professional laboratory devices that easily outperform any household mixer or conventional knife mill. A wide range of containers and lids makes it easy to adapt the mill to various applications. The GM 300 is suitable for the fast and reproducible grinding and homogenizing of sample volumes up to 4,500 mL.

Grinding jar in plastic, stainless steel and glass available www.ereinc.com

Specifications

GM 200 / GM 300

Application:

Size reduction and homogenization

Feed Material:

Soft, medium-hard, elastic, high water, oil or fat content, dry

Feed Size*:

< 40 mm / < 130 mm

Final Fineness*: < 0.3 mm * Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

sales@ereinc.com

46


MILLS & GRINDERS

Disc Mills

Mortar Grinders

Retsch Vibratory Disc Mill RS 200

Retsch Mortar Grinder RM 200

No grinder can beat the speed of a Vibratory Disc Mill when it comes to preparing samples for spectral analyses. The RETSCH RS 200 with its powerful stabilized plane drive achieves grind sizes between 40 and 100 microns within seconds and with excellent reproducibility. The powerful instrument runs steadily and smoothly, even with heavy grinding sets and at maximum speed. Thanks to grinding sets in various materials and sizes, this mill can be used for a wide range of sample materials.

The RM 200 is the latest generation of the classic "RETSCH Mill" which replaced manual mortars and pestles more than 80 years ago. It is widely used for reproducible sample preparation in R&D, materials testing and especially in pharmaceutics and homeopathy. Many different materials can be easily and efficiently processed in wet or dry condition. The grinding sets of the RM 200 can be selected out of 7 different materials which allows for neutral-to-analysis sample preparation. The new generation of mortar grinders is exceptionally powerful, safe and easy to operate.

Features • Analytical fineness in seconds • Excellent reproducibility • Powerful stabilized-plane-drive • Easy 1-button operation with graphics display • 10 parameter combinations can be stored

Features • Reproducible dry and wet grinding • Easy exchange of pestle and mortar without tools • Closed, dust-tight grinding chamber with windows • Grinding sets in 7 different materials • High-performance drive with electronic control

Specifications

RS 200

Application:

Size reduction, mixing, triturating

Feed Material:

Medium-hard, hard, brittle, fibrous

Feed Size*:

< 15 mm

Specifications

RM 200

Final Fineness*:

< 40 μm

Application:

Size reduction, mixing, triturating

Feed Material:

Soft, hard, brittle, pasty, dry and wet

Feed Size*:

< 8 mm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

Final Fineness*: < 10 μm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

Mixer Mills

Retsch Disc Mill DM 200 The Disc Mill DM 200 allows for the fine grinding of larger batches of hard, abrasive substances. The rugged design permits use under rough conditions in laboratories and pilot plants as well as in-line for quality control of raw materials. The Disc Mill achieves an average final fineness of approximately 100 microns often in a single grinding process. Features • Short grinding times, high final fineness • Accurate gap setting ensures reproducible grinding • Grinding discs made of 4 different materials

Specifications

DM 200s

Application:

Size reduction, pre-crushing

Feed Material:

Medium-hard, hard, brittle

Feed Size*:

< 20 mm

Final Fineness*:

< 100 μm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

47

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Excellent crushing performance

Retsch Mixer Mill MM 400 The RETSCH Mixer Mill MM 400 is a true laboratory "all-rounder". It has been developed specially for dry, wet and cryogenic grinding of small sample amounts. This high-performance ball mill usually grinds and homogenizes powders and suspensions in only a few seconds and achieves grind sizes down to the nano range. It is also perfectly suitable for the disruption of biological cells as well as for DNA / RNA recovery. Due to its great versatility, the MM 400 is used in many different industries ranging from pharmaceutics and biology to mineralogy, environment or plastics.

Features • Rapid and efficient pulverization and homogenization • Reproducible results due to digital parameter setting • Grinding jars in various sizes and materials • 9 parameter combinations can be stored • Simultaneous preparation of up to 20 samples

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Retsch CryoMill

The Mixer Mill MM 200 is also used for efficient size reduction and homogenization of 2 samples simultaneously. It works with the same functional principle as the MM 400. This mill is highly suitable for grinding dry samples in small quantities and offers a favourably priced alternative to the MM 400 for routine applications. The grinding jars for the MM 200 have a push-fit lid.

The CryoMill has been specially designed for cryogenic grinding. It features an integrated cooling system which continually cools the grinding jar with liquid nitrogen before and during the grinding process. Thus the sample is embrittled and volatile components are preserved. The liquid nitrogen circulates through the system and is continually replenished from an autofill system in the exact amount which is required to keep the temperature at -196°C. The automatic cooling system guarantees that the grinding process is not started before the sample is thoroughly cooled. This results in reduced consumption and guarantees reproducible grinding results. The size reduction principle is the same as that of the MM 400. With a vibrational frequency of 25 Hz the CryoMill grinds most materials very effectively in a few minutes. The combination of impact and friction leads to substantially finer grind sizes compared to other cryogenic mills. The CryoMill is equipped with one grinding station for grinding jar volumes of 25 mL, 35 mL and 50 mL. It is also possible to use adapters for 4 grinding jars of 5 mL each as well as for reaction vials.

Planetary Ball Mills

Features • Fast, efficient cryogenic grinding at -196°C • Ideal for plastics, temperature-sensitive materials and samples with volatile components • Particularly safe due to autofill system for liquid nitrogen • Highly reproducible grinding results • Programmable cooling and grinding cycles • Also suitable for dry and wet grinding Specifications

The innovative Planetary Ball Mills meet and exceed all requirements for fast and reproducible grinding down to the nano range. They are used for the most demanding tasks, from routine sample processing to colloidal grinding and mechanical alloying. The grinding parameters are easily selected and stored with one single button. All planetary mills feature programmable starting time, power failure backup with storage of remaining grinding time and a built-in fan which cools the grinding jars during operation. The comfort grinding jars are dust-tight and unusually simple and safe to handle. Features • Extreme speed, final fineness down to the nano range • Reproducible results due to energy and speed control • 1-button operation with graphics display • 10 parameter combinations can be stored • Smooth and stable operation • Automatic grinding chamber ventilation • Suitable for long-term trials and continuous use

Retsch Planetary Ball Mill PM 100 This single station ball mill pulverizes and mixes a wide range of materials and can be operated with grinding jars from 12 mL to 500 mL. It is especially safe to operate on a laboratory bench thanks to the new FFCS technology which helps to compensate vibrations.

MM 200

Application:

MM 400

MILLS & GRINDERS

Retsch Mixer Mill MM 200

CryoMill

Size reduction, mixing, homogenization, cell disruption

Feed Material:

Soft, medium-hard, hard, brittle, elastic, fibrous

Feed Size*:

< 6 mm

< 8 mm

< 8 mm

Final Fineness*:

< 10 μm

< 5 μm

< 5 μm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

Retsch Planetary Ball Mill PM 100 CM

Powerful and quick grinding down to nano range This ball mill offers all the performance and convenience of the classic PM 100, only the speed ratio of sun wheel to grinding jar is 1:-1 instead of 1:2. This results in a different ball movement so that the sample is not so much crushed by impact effects but more gently ground by pressure and friction. This not only leads to less abrasion but also reduces the heat build-up inside the jar.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

48


Retsch Planetary Ball Mill PM 400

The PM 200 is equipped with two grinding stations and accepts grinding jars up to 125 mL. It is used for the pulverization and mixing of smaller sample volumes.

The robust floor model features four grinding stations and accepts jars from 12 mL to 500 mL. It can process up to 8 samples simultaneously thus generating a high sample throughput. The PM 400 is also available with 2 grinding stations and different speed ratios. The model "MA-type" was especially developed for mechanical alloying of hardbrittle materials.

MILLS & GRINDERS

Retsch Planetary Ball Mill PM 200

Automatic grinding chamber ventilation Specifications

PM 100

PM 100 CM

PM 200

PM 400

Size reduction, mixing, homogenization, colloidal grinding, mechanical alloying

Application:

Soft, medium-hard, hard, brittle, fibrous, dry and wet

Feed Material: Feed Size*:

< 10 mm

< 10 mm

< 4 mm

< 10 mm

Final Fineness*:

< 0.1 μm

< 0.1 μm

< 0.1 μm

< 0.1 μm

* Depending on feed material and instrument configuration / settings

Jaw Crushers

Rotor Mills

Knife/Cutting Mills

BB BB BB BB ZM TWISTER SK SR SR GM 51 100 200 300 200 100 200 300 200

Disc Mills

Mortar Grinders

GM SM SM SM RS DM 300 100 200 300 200 200

RM 200

Feed size* approx. (mm)

35 50

90 130 10

10

15 15 15 10-40 130

80x60

15 20

8

Final fineness* approx. (mm)

0.5 4

2

5

0.04

0,5

0.1 0.08 0.05 0.3

0.3

0.25-20

0.04 0.1

0.01

o ✓

✓ ✓

Chemicals products Coal, coke

o ✓

o ✓

o ✓

Construction materials

✓ ✓

Electronic scrap, circuit boards

✓ ✓

Food

✓ ✓

o

o o

Plants, hay, straw

Plastics, cables, rubber

Secondary fuels Soils, sewage sludge Wood, bones, paper

o o o

o

o

o o

o o

o o

o

✓ ✓

o

o

✓ ✓

PM PM 100 200

10

4

PM MM MM Cryo400 200 400 Mill

10

6

8

o ✓

✓ ✓

✓ ✓

✓ ✓

✓ ✓

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

✓ ✓

o o ✓ ✓

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

✓ ✓

o

✓ ✓ o

o

o ✓

o o

✓ o

✓ o o

✓ o

✓ o

o

o

o

o

✓ ✓

✓ ✓

✓ ✓

✓ ✓

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

✔ Suitable o Suitable to a limited extent *Depending on sample and grinding time This chart serves only for orientation purposes. The selection of the appropriate mill depends on a variety of parameters of the actual application. Please contact us to discuss the best solution.

49

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

8

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.005 0.005

o ✓

o

Pharmaceutical products

o

Minerals, ores, stones

o

o ✓

Leather, textiles

o

o

Feed

Glass, ceramics

o ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ o

Ball/Mixer Mills

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Electrophoresis Systems & Transilluminators UVP Transilluminators

Chromato-Vue Viewing Cabinets from UVP provide a darkroom environment for viewing materials.

All UVP transilluminators carry a two year warranty. All UV transilluminators are equipped with a UV blocking cover, adjustable to different angles for access to the work surface. Select transilluminators can be used with UVP's BioImaging Systems as well as selected Chromato-Vue Cabinets.

The comfortable soft rubber viewport utilizes a contrast control viewing filter. This filter protects the eyes from harmful shortwave radiation and blocks the "blue haze" associated with longwave UV. Viewport has adequate space for eyeglasses. A lightweight access curtain allows for easy entry and blocks out external light. A variety of cabinets are available to choose from including mini cabinets for viewing minerals and education uses to larger cabinets for applications such as chromatography.

MOLECULAR BIOLOGY

UVP UV Viewing Cabinets

Many models available! Labnet Enduro™ Gel Systems and Power Supplies

Two Enduro models are available to meet your needs. The Model 300V can produce output to 300 V or 500 mA, while the Model 250V produces a maximum output of 250 V or 3,000 mA. Both are compact in design and require a minimal amount of valuable benchspace. Units are stackable to save space. For easy viewing and setting of parameters on the bench or shelf, the front of the power supply can be raised with the integral folding feet.

www.ereinc.com

Enduro™ Horizontal Gel Boxes

Enduro Horizontal Gel Boxes have been designed for ease of use, safety and durability. A variety of sizes are available, from a mini gel system to a large maxi gel system that can accommodate as many as 450 samples in a single run. A wide range of accessories are available to customize your system, including multichannel compatible gel combs. Available sizes from 7 x 7 cm to 20 x 20 cm.

Enduro™ Modular Vertical PAGE System Modular System

The Enduro System is based on three operational inserts and a common buffer tank. All three inserts, PAGE, electroblotting and 2D electrophoresis, have their own electrode assembly that connects into the lid of the buffer tank.

sales@ereinc.com

50


Labnet MultiGene™ OptiMax Thermal Cycler

Labnet MultiGene™ Mini Personal Thermal Cycler

The new MultiGene™ OptiMax replaces our successful and reliable MultiGene™ Gradient thermal cycler and brings new speed and advanced features to our Labnet Thermal Cycler line providing premium performance at an affordable price.

MOLECULAR BIOLOGY

Thermal Cyclers

Labnet’s MultiGene Mini is a compact and lightweight thermal cycler, but do not let its small size fool you. This cycler is packed with features typically found only on larger thermal cyclers. The OptiMax’s heated lid is fully adjustable to provide optimum pressure for use with a broad range of tubes and microplates. For optimum performance, the lid can also be programmed to hold different temperatures between 60° to 65°C and 100° to 115°C. The OptiMax lid prevents condensation and slides away and back from the user to provide full access to samples and reduce the risk of coming in contact with a hot surface.

Features . • Fast ramping - up to 5°C/second • Intuitive graphic programming • Lightweight and compact • Interchangeable blocks - 24 x 0.2 mL and 18 x 0.5 mL • Economical - half the price of a full size unit • Easy to read graphic interface • Slip gear lid won’t crush tubes • Reliable Peltier technology • Simple programming • Heated lid Specifications

MultiGene™ Mini

Block Capacity

51

24 x 0.2 mL or 18 x 0.5 mL tubes

The MultiGene™ OptiMax employs a new protocol optimization process improving on older gradient features. The OptiMax utilizes FlexTemp™ technology that effectively separates the 96 well plate into 6 – (4 x 4) temperature regions that allow you to pick the temperatures you want to test against. These regions are easily identified by the blue and black squares visible on the microplate platen, Instead of having the thermal cycler choose temperatures for you, you can choose any temperatures you want within a 24°C range. The MultiGene™ OptiMax has a heating rate of 4°C/sec and a cooling rate of 3°C/sec. We have minimized overshooting and undershooting so that your reactions only see the temperatures they are supposed to see. This also leads to faster runs time.

The OptiMax’s heated lid is fully adjustable to provide optimum pressure for use with a broad range of tubes and microplates. For optimum performance, the lid can also be programmed to hold different temperatures between 60° to 65°C and 100° to 115°C. The OptiMax lid prevents condensation and slides away and back from the user to provide full access to samples and reduce the risk of coming in contact with a hot surface.

Features . • Unique flexible programming with FlexTemp™ technology • Fast run times • PC viewer • Simple user interface • No condensation after overnight cooling at 4°C • 3 year warranty

Specifications

MultiGene™ OptiMax

Sample Capacity

1 x 96 well plate, 12 8 x 0.2 mL strip tubes, 96 x 0.2 mL tubes

Programmable Temperature Range

4°C to 99.9°C

Temperature Control

Calculated or block

Temperature Accuracy / Uniformity

±0.5°C / ±0.5°C

Heating / Cooling Method

Peltier

Gradient Temperature Range

30°C to 99°C. Temperature of 6-segment blocks can be set independently. 24°C

Temp. Control Range

4° to 99°

Maximum Temperature Difference between 6-segment Temperature Blocks

Max. Heat / Cool Rate

5°C per sec / 4°C per sec

6-segment Temperature Blocks

6 temperature blocks in 4 x 4 well format

Accuracy / Uniformity

±0.3°C / ±0.5°C at 55°C

Programmable Lid Temperature

60° to 65°C, 100° to 115°C

Heated Lid Temperature

105°C

Program Memory

200 complete programs

Max. Number of Cycles

99

Temp. Increments / Decrements

Yes

Gradient Temperature Range

30°C to 99°C

Time Increments / Decrements

Yes

Max. Number Segments

9

User Program Folders

50 sets

Max. Holding Time / Step

99 minutes 59 seconds

Password Protected Programs

Yes

Program Memory

Up to 100 programs

Communication

USB and RS232 ports

Dimensions

21.8W x 28.5D x 17.8H cm

Dimensions

24W x 42D x 25H cm

Weight

7.1 lb / 3.2 kg

Weight

9 kg

Electrical

230 V~ or 120 V~, 50/60 Hz

Electrical

240 V or 120 V, 50/60 Hz

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961

3 Year Warranty!


O2 and CO2 Testing Quantek Instruments Oxygen Analyzers

The pump is electronically timed to draw in the precise amount of sample required for the analysis, and then turns itself off after the preset sampling time (5 to 10 seconds). The oxygen concentration is read on the display within 15 - 20 seconds.

Model 901 The Quantek Model 901 is a battery-operated, portable headspace oxygen analyzer used primarily for the measurement of residual oxygen in gas-flushed (CAP/MAP) food packages. This hand-held unit can be used by nontechnical personnel where you need it, in the lab or at the packaging line, or at less than 3 pounds, it can be easily transported to other locations.

Model 905 The Quantek Model 905 is a benchtop, portable oxygen analyzer used primarily for the measurement of residual oxygen in gas-flushed (CAP/MAP) food packages.

The expected oxygen sensor life is typically 5 years, unlike other analyzers with a sensor that last 1 - 2 years, reducing total cost of ownership, and analyzer downtime. The sensor is unaffected by high levels of background gases such as nitrogen or carbon dioxide. The Model 901 oxygen analyzer can also be used for applications where the oxygen level is very high (50 to 100%), without overloading the sensor. It is unaffected by trace hydrocarbons or high levels of CO2, which can poison other types of sensors.

Ideal for package testing: • Meats • Dairy products • Produce • Snack foods • Baked foods • Prepared meals • Coffee • Pet foods • Dessert foods • and many more!

Features • Economically priced • Internal pump & sample probe included • Range 0.1% - 100% • Results in 15 - 20 seconds • Rechargeable battery operation • Liquid blocking filters • Requires very little headspace (> 10 cc in a flexible package) • Adjustable pump time • Optional 5 second response sensor • Includes starter pack of foam septas, needles & filters, and international compatible 100-240 V charger

OXYGEN & CARBON DIOXIDE TESTING

Easy Sampling and Analysis The Quantek headspace oxygen analyzer sample probes are tipped with a particulate filter and luer fit syringe needle with side-port holes to prevent plugging. When the pump is activated, sample is drawn through the probe and tubing and then to the oxygen sensor.

Features • Economically priced • Internal pump & sample probe included • Range 0.1% - 100% • Results in 15 - 20 seconds • AC or battery operation • Liquid blocking filters • Rugged enclosure • Requires very little headspace (> 10 cc) • Adjustable pump time • Optional fast responding sensor for 5 second response time

Q5: Why did miners choose canaries to accompany them into mines?

TriviaZone

Q6: What are the symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning?

For answers, turn to page 92.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

52


OXYGEN & CARBON DIOXIDE TESTING

Quantek Instruments Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Analyzers Research Applications • Bioreactors • Gas blending systems • Fruit storage areas • Fermentation • Biofuel experiments • Algae offgas analysis • Welding gases • Controlled atmosphere rooms • Carbon capture and storage • Incubation experiments • and many more!

Model 902D The Quantek Model 902D is a benchtop, portable oxygen analyzer used primarily for the measurement of residual oxygen and carbon dioxide in gas-flushed (CAP/MAP) food packages.

Give us a call for complete technical information Sensor The solid-state infrared CO2 sensor has no moving parts, a compact optical cell, and microprocessor-based calibration factors using a 6th order polynomial equation and 32 bit processor to linearize the full range measurement up to 100%.

The expected oxygen sensor life is typically 5 years, unlike other analyzers with a sensor that last 1 - 2 years, reducing total cost of ownership, and analyzer downtime. This O2 CO2 Analyzer contains an internal pump to draw in sample from your package and display results in 30 seconds.

Model 907 The Quantek Model 907 is a highly portable oxygen and CO2 analyzer used for the measurement of oxygen and carbon dioxide in gas-flushed (CAP/MAP) food packages and process applications (such as sampling chambers). Highly portable The Model 907 weighs only 2 lbs and comes with a nylon protective case and internal rechargeable battery pack. Ultra fast The Model 907 incorporates the latest fast response O2 and CO2 sensors, which allows results to be obtained in 5 - 7 seconds for rapid spot checks.

53

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Features • Economically priced • Internal pump & sample probe included • Range 0.1% - 100% • Results in 15 - 20 seconds • AC or battery operation • Liquid blocking filters • Rugged enclosure • Requires very little headspace (> 10 cc) • Adjustable pump time • Optional fast responding sensor for 5 second response time • Includes starter pack of foam septas, needles & filters, and international compatible 100 240 V charger / power supply

Features • 0 - 100% Carbon Dioxide • 0 - 100% Oxygen • Less than 2 lbs • 10 - 12 hour runtime on full charge • Sample results in 5 - 7 seconds • Economically priced • Two year warranty Includes • Durable nylon bag with removable shoulder carry strap • Internal rechargeable battery pack • 100 - 240 V DC, 47 - 63 Hz charger • Internal sampling pump • Sampling probe • Starter pack of accessories (200 foam septa, 2 needles, 2 particulate filters) • Starter pack of 2 moisture block filters

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Hanna ORP Tester

pH

This new micro-processor based tester provides the most advanced solution in ORP and temperature measurement. Further, the HA-98121 provides pH measurement.

Hanna pHep®4 & pHep®5

pHep®4, pHep®5 includes protective cap, electrode removal tool, 4 x 1.5 V batteries and instructions.

Features • Replenishable junction • Dual level LCD • Battery life percentage indication • Stability indicator • Floating and waterproof body HA-98120 & HA-98121 includes protective cap, electrode removal tool, 4 x 1.5 V batteries and instructions. Specifications

Specifications

pHep®4

pHep®5

Model

HA-98127

HA-98128

Range

-2.0 to 16.0 pH

-2.00 to 16.00 pH

Accuracy Calibration

±0.1 pH

Dimensions

-5.0 to 60°C, ±0.5°C accuracy

Temp. Range pH Range

Automatic at 1 or 2 points with 2 sets of memorized buffer values

HA-98121

±1000 mV, ±2 mV accuracy

ORP Range

±0.05 pH

Temp. Compensation

HA-98120

-2 to 16.00 pH, ±0.05 accuracy

n/a Factory calibrated

Calibration (ORP) Calibration (pH)

Automatic

Automatic 1 or 2 points with 2 sets of memorized buffers

n/a

6.4" x 1.6" x 1.0", 3.5 oz

Dimensions

6.4" x 1.6" x 1.0", 3.5 oz

Hanna Combo pH/EC/Temp/TDS Testers in One Unit!

Hanna Dist® 5 & Dist® 6 EC/Temp/TDS Testers Unmatched 3-in-1 tester measuring electrical conductivity, temperature and total dissolved solids in one small compact unit. Features • Floating waterproof casing • Dual level LCD displays • Replaceable graphite probe Dist® 5 & Dist® 6 includes protective cap, electrode removal tool, 4 x 1.5 V batteries and instructions.

Unmatched 4-in-1 tester measuring pH, electrical conductivity, temperature and total dissolved solids in one small compact unit. Features • Floating waterproof casing • Dual level LCD displays • Replaceable pH probe HA-98129 & HA-98130 includes protective cap, electrode removal tool, 4 x 1.5 V batteries and instructions.   Specifications

HA-98129

HA-98130 0.00 to 14.00 pH

Specifications

Dist® 5

Dist® 6

pH Range

Model

HA-98311

HA-98312

EC Range

0 to 3999 µS/cm

0.00 to 20.00 mS/cm

EC Range

0.00 to 20.00 mS/cm

0 to 3999 µS/cm

TDS Range

0 to 2000 ppm

0.00 to 10.00 ppt

TDS Range

0.00 to 10.00 ppt

0 to 2000 ppm

Temp. Range

Temp. Range

0.0 to 60°C, ±0.5°C accuracy

Calibration

Automatic, 1 point

Temp. Compensation

Automatic, with ß adjustable from 0.0 to 2.4%/°C 6.4" x 1.6" x 1.0", 3.5 oz

Dimensions

pH

These testers use the exclusive replaceable pull-out cartridge pH electrode. Its exposed temperature sensor provides fast response time and its proximity to the pH electrode guarantees much more accurate temperature compensated readings.

0.0 to 60°C, ±0.5°C accuracy

Calibration (EC/TDS) Calibration (pH) Temp. Compensation

Automatic, 1 point Automatic, at 1 or 2 points with 2 sets of memorized buffers pH: automatic, EC/TDS: automatic, with ß adjustable from 0.0 to 2.4%/°C

Dimensions

6.4" x 1.6" x 1.0", 3.5 oz

We offer buffer solutions, conductivity solutions, and other calibration solutions for all Hanna handheld meters. HA-7061L Electrode Cleaning Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-7031L 1413 µS/cm Conductivity Calibration Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-70300L Electrode Storage Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-7032L 1382 ppm TDS Calibration Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-7004L pH 4.01 Buffer Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-7021L 240 mV Test Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-7007L pH 7.01 Buffer Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-7091L Reducing Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-7010L pH 10.01 Buffer Solution, 500 mL Bottle

HA-7092L Oxidizing Solution, 500 mL Bottle

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

54


Hanna Research Grade Combination Meters

pH

Features • 240 x 320 dot matrix color display • Logging and graphing capabilities • USB and RS232 for computer compatibility • Auto recognition of probe type (2 or 4 ring, and nominal cell constant) • Stages 1, 2 and 3 USP mode • 3 salinity scales: Practical Salinity, Natural Sea Water, Percent • Linear and natural water temperature compensation • Exclusive HANNA Calibration Check™

Specifications

HA-4521

HA-4522

-2.000 to 20.000 pH 0.1 pH; 0.01 pH; 0.001 pH ±0.1 pH; ±0.01 pH; ±0.002 pH

mV Range Resolution Accuracy

±2000 mV 0.1 mV ±0.2 mV

ISE Range Resolution Accuracy Conductivity Range

Resolution Accuracy Resistivity Range

Resolution Accuracy TDS Range Resolution Accuracy Salinity Range Practical Salinity Percent Resolution Accuracy

1 x 10-7 to 9.99 x 1010 concentration 1; 0.1; 0.01 concentration ±0.5% (monovalent ions); ±1%

Calibration pH ISE Conductivity Salinity

N/A N/A N/A

0.000 to 9.999 μS/cm; 10.00 to 99.99 μS/cm; 100.0 to 999.9 μS/cm; 1.000 to 9.999 mS/cm; 10.00 to 99.99 mS/cm; 100.0 to 999.9 mS/cm; 1000 mS/cm 0.001 μS/cm; 0.01 μS/cm; 0.1 μS/cm; 0.001 mS/cm; 0.01 mS/cm; 0.1 mS/cm; 1 mS/cm ±1% of reading (±0.01 μS/cm)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1.00 to 99.99 Ohm•cm; 100.0 to 999.9 Ohm•cm; 1.000 to 9.999 kOhm•cm; 10.00 to 99.99 kOhm•cm; 100.0 to 999.9 kOhm•cm; 1.00 to 9.99 MOhm•cm; 10.0 to 100.0 MOhm•cm 0.01 Ohm•cm; 0.1 Ohm•cm; 0.001 kOhm•cm; 0.01 kOhm•cm; 0.1 kOhm•cm; 0.01 MOhm•cm; 0.1 MOhm•cm ±2% of reading (±1 Ohm•cm)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.000 to 9.999 ppm; 10.00 to 99.99 ppm; 100.0 to 999.9 ppm; 1.000 to 9.999 ppt; 10.00 to 99.99 ppt; 100.0 to 400.0 ppt 0.001 ppm; 0.01 ppm; 0.1 ppm; 0.001 ppt; 0.01 ppt; 0.1 ppt ±1% of reading (±0.01 ppm)

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

0.00 to 42.00; Natural seawater: 0.00 to 80.00 ppt; 0.0 to 400.0% 0.01 for practical salinity/natural sea water; 0.1% for percent scale ±1% of reading

N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A

-20.0 to 120°C; -4.0 to 248.0°F; 253.15 to 393.15K 0.1°C; 0.1°F; 0.1K ±0.2°C; ±0.4°F; ±0.2K Automatic, up to 5 points with 8 memorized values (pH 1.68, 3.00, 4.01, 6.86, 7.01, 9.18, 10.01, 12.45) + 5 custom buffers Automatic, up to 5 points with 5 standard N/A Automatic, up to 5 points with 5 standard + 5 custom values + 5 custom values auto standard recognition, user standard single Auto standard recognition, user N/A point / multi-point standard single point / multi-point Percent scale—1 point (with HA-7037 buffer) N/A

Relative mV Offset Range Input Channel(s)

N/A N/A N/A

±2000 mV 1 pH/mV/ISE + 1 EC

1 pH/mV + 1 EC

Calibration Check Temperature Compensation

HA-4221

1 x 10-6 to 9.99 x 1010 concentration 1; 0.1; 0.01; 0.001 concentration ±0.5% (monovalent ions); ±1%

Temperature Range Resolution Accuracy

pH: Automatic or manual from -20.0 to 120.0°C (-4.0 to 248.0°F) EC: Disabled, linear and non-linear

2 pH/mV/ISE pH electrode and buffer condition pH: Automatic or manual from -20.0 to 120.0°C (-4.0 to 248.0°F)

Log-On-Demand

100 lots with 10,000 record / lot

PC Connection

Opto-isolated USB and RS232

Power

12 V DC adapter (included)

Dimensions / Weight

55

HA-4222

pH Range Resolution Accuracy

160 x 231 x 94 mm (6.3" x 9.1" x 3.7"), 1.2 kg (2.64 lbs)

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961

1 pH/mV

N/A


Hanna Laboratory pH Meters with Backlit, Graphic LCD HA-3220 • HA-3221 • HA-3222

pH

Specifications

Features • Single (HA-3220 & HA-3221) or dual (HA-3222) input channels • Backlit, graphic LCD • Exclusive Calibration Check™, electrode diagnostics • Prompts and messages on the graphic LCD • Stability, interval and log-on-demand logging • 5 point calibration with 7 standard and 5 custom buffers • Relative mV measurements • Up to 400 samples memory capacity • Auto HOLD to freeze readings on the display • GLP to view last calibration data for pH, Rel mV or ISE • User selectable "Outside Calibration Range" warning • User-selectable "Calibration Timeout" to remind when a new calibration is necesary • PC compatible via USB

HA-3220

Range pH mV ISE

HA-3221 -2.0 to 20.0; -2.00 to 20.00; -2.000 to 20.000 pH ±2000 mV From 1.00 x 10-3 to 1.00 x 105 ppm

N/A

Temperature

0.1; 0.01; 0.001 pH 0.1 mV 3 digits 0.01; 0.1; 1; 10 concentration

N/A 0.1°C (0.1°F)

Accuracy pH mV ISE Temperature

±0.01; ±0.002 pH ±0.2 mV ±0.5% of reading (monovalent ions), ±1% of reading (divalent ions) ±0.2°C (±0.4°F) (excluding probe error)

N/A

Calibration pH

Up to 5 point calibration, 7 standard buffers available (1.68, 4.01, 6.86, 7.01, 9.18, 10.01, 12.45) + 5 Custom Buffers Up to 2 point calibration, Up to 5 point calibration, 6 6 standard solutions Standard solutions (in units (0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000 ppm) selected) From 80 to 110%

N/A

ISE

Slope

Manual or automatic from -20.0 to 120.0°C (-4.0 to 248.0°F)

Temperature Compensation (pH) Logging

From 1.00 x 10-7 to 9.99 x 1010 concentration (choice of units)

-20.0 to 120.0°C (-4.0 to 248.0°F)

Resolution pH mV ISE Temperature

Probes

HA-3222

HA-1131B pH with BNC connector and HA-7662-T stainless steel temperature probe (included) Log-on-demand 200 samples

Lot Logging

Log-on-demand 300 samples

Log-on-demand 400 samples

5, 10, 30 sec 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120, 180 min (max 600 samples)

PC Connectivit

Opto-isolated USB (with HA-92000 software)

Input Impedance

1012 Ohms

Power Supply

12 V DC

Environment

0 - 50°C (32 to 122°F) Max. RH 55% non-condensing

Dimensions / Weight

235 x 207 x 110 mm (9.2" x 8.14" x 4.33"), 1.8 kg (4.1 lbs)

Hanna pH Meters with Large LCD HA-2210 • HA-2211 Features • New benchtop design • Extra wide LCD (6.25" x 1.5") • Automatic calibration • 5 standard buffers • Simultaneous display of pH and temperature • Automatic temperature compensation • Extended mV range (HA-2211)

Specifications Range pH mV Temperature Resolution pH mV Temperature Accuracy (@20°C) pH mV Temperature pH Calibration Temperature Compensation pH Electrode Temperature Probe Input Impedance Power Supply Environment Dimensions / Weight

www.ereinc.com

HA-2210

HA-2211 -2.00 to 16.00 pH

N/A

± 399.9 mV ; ± 2000 mV -20 to 120.0°C 0.01 pH

N/A

0.1 mV; 1 mV 0.1°C ± 0.01 pH

N/A

± 0.2 mV (± 399.9 mV); ± 1 mV (± 2000 mV) ± 0.4°C (0.0 to 100.0°C); ± 1°C (outside) (excluding probe error) Automatic, 1 or 2 points with 5 automatically recognized buffers (pH 4.01, 6.86, 7.01, 9.18, 10.01) Automatic (with HA-7669/2W probe) or manual from -9.9 to 120°C HA-1131B, glass-body, single junction, refillable, BNC connector, 1 m cable (included) HA-7662 with 1 m (3.3') cable (included) 1012 Ohms 12 V DC adapter (included) 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); RH max 95% 235 x 222 x 109 mm (9.2" x 8.7" x 4.3"), 1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)

sales@ereinc.com

56


Hanna pH & ORP Electrodes

Accuracy at its best!

pH

Includes electrode with 1 m (3.3') coaxial cable with BNC connection (some models are available with a screw cap or BNC + PIN connection)

HA-1043B

HA-1053B

HA-1131B

HA-1144B

HA-1230B

HA-3131B

HA-FC200

HA-FC210

HA-1332B

Part Number

Recommended Use

Description

Range

Length & Dia.

Reference Cell

HA-1043B

Hydrocarbon, Paints, Solvents, Sea Water, Strong Acid & Base, High Conductivity Samples, Tris Buffer

Refillable, Combination pH Electrode With Double Junction

pH: 0 to 14 T: 0 to 100°C (32 to 212°F)

120 x 12 mm

Double, Ag/AgCl

HA-1053B

Fats & Creams, Soil Samples, Potable Water, Semi Solid Products Low Conductivity Solutions, Emulsions

Refillable, Combination pH Electrode With Conical Bulb

pH: 0 to 12 T: -5 to 100°C (23 to 212°F)

120 x 12 mm

Single, Ag/AgCl

HA-1131B

Laboratory General Purpose, Beer

Refillable, Combination pH Electrode

pH: 0 to 13 T: -5 to 100°C (23 to 212°F)

120 x 12 mm

Single, Ag/AgCl

HA-1144B

Tris Buffer

Refillable, Combination pH Electrode With Calomel References

pH: 0 to 14 T: 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)

120 x 12 mm

Single, Hg/Hg2Cl2

HA-1230B

Field Applications

Combination pH Electrode

pH: 0 to 13 T: 0 to 80°C (32 to 176°F)

120 x 12 mm

Double, Ag/AgCl

HA-3131B

Laboratory General Use, ORP Titrations

Refillable Combination ORP Electrode

ORP T: -5 to 100°C (23 to 212°F)

150 x 12 mm

Single, Ag/AgCl

HA-FC200

Milk, Yogurt, Dairy Products, Semi Solid Foods

pH Electrode

pH: 0 to 12 T: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)

75 x 10 mm

Single, Ag/AgCl

HA-FC210

Milk, Yogurt, Creams

pH Electrode

pH: 0 to 12 0 to 50°C

120 x 12 mm

Double, Ag/AgCl

(32 To 122°F)

57

HA-3230B

HA-1332B

Chemicals, Field Applications, Quality Control

pH Electrode

pH: 0 to 13 T: 0 to 80°C (32 to 176°F)

120 x 12 mm

Double, Ag/AgCl

HA-3230B

Municipal Water, Quality Control

ORP Electrode

ORP: ±2000 mV T: 0 to 80°C (32 to 176°F)

120 x 12 mm

Single, Ag/AgCl

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Hanna Ion Selective Electrodes HANNA’s Ion Selective Electrodes can be grouped into three general categories based upon construction: • Solid state electrodes • Liquid membrane electrodes • Gas sensors Includes BNC Connection, 12 mm O.D., 120 mm length & 1 m coxial cable

The new generation! pH

HA-4101

HA-4004

HA-4104

HA-4007

HA-4107

HA-4010

HA-4110

Part Number

Ion Selective

Application

Type

Range

pH & Temp.

HA-4101

Ammonia

Determination Of Ammonium, Ammonia In Wine, Beer, Water, Waste Water & Soil

Gas-Sensing; Combination (Delrin)

1M To 1X 10-6M 17000 to 0.02 ppm

>11 0 to 40°C

HA-4004

Calcium

Determination Of Free Calcium In Beverages, Water & Seawater

Polymer Membrane; Half-Cell (PVC)

1M To 3X 10-6M 40080 to 0.12 ppm

4 to 10 0 to 40°C

HA-4104

Calcium

Determination Of Free Calcium In Beverages, Water & Seawater

Polymer Membrane; Combination (PEI/PVC)

1M to 3X 10-6M 40080 to 0.12 ppm

4 to 10 0 to 40°C

HA-4007

Chloride

Determination Of Free Chloride Ions In Emulsified Food Products, Beverages, Plants, Soils & As An Indicator For Titration

Solid-State; Half-Cell (Epoxy)

1M to 5X 10-5M 35000 to 1.8 ppm

2 to 11 0 to 80°C

HA-4107

Chloride

Determination Of Free Chloride Ions In Emulsified Food Products, Beverages, Plants, Soils & As An Indicator For Titration

Solid-State; Combination (PEI)

1M to 5X 10-5M 35000 to 1.8 ppm

2 to 11 0 to 80°C

HA-4010

Fluoride

Determination Of Free Fluoride In Potable Water, Soft Drinks, Wine, Plants, Emulsified Food Products, Plating & Pickling Acids

Solid-State; Half-Cell (Epoxy)

1M to 1X 10-6M Sat. to 0.02 ppm

5 to 8 0 to 80°C

HA-4110

Fluoride

Determination Of Free Fluoride In Potable Water, Soft Drinks, Wine, Plants, Emulsified Food Products, Plating & Pickling Acids

Solid-State; Combination (PEI/Epoxy)

1M to 1X 10-6M Sat. to 0.02 ppm

5 to 8 0 to 80°C

HA-5315

Reference

To Complete The Electrical Circuit & To Provide A Stable Reference Voltage For ISE Half-Cells

PEI

0 to 80°C

HA-5315

Other ion selective electrodes available upon request: Bromide • Cadmium • Carbon Dioxide • Cupric • Cyanide • Iodide • Lead / Sulfate • Nitrate • Potassium • Silver / Sulfide • Sodium

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

58


pH

pH Technical Calibration Solutions

ISE Standards ISE Standards are required for direct and incremental measurement techniques and are available with a Certificate of Analysis.

Features • (±0.01 pH) for each point of the pH scale • pH Value @ 25°C • Available in sachets, liters and gallons upon request

HA-4001-01 0.1 M Ammonia Std., 500 mL HA-5001 1.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-5007-01 7.01 pH, 1 L

HA-4001-02 100 ppm Ammonia Std. (As N), 500 mL

HA-5016 1.68 pH, 500 mL

HA-5007-G 7.01 pH, Green, 500 mL

HA-4001-03 1000 ppm Ammonia Std. (As N), 500 mL

HA-5002 2.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-5074 7.41 pH, 500 mL

HA-4004-01 0.1 M Calcium Std., 500 mL

HA-5003 3.00 pH, 1 L

HA-5008 8.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-4007-01 0.1 M Chloride Std., 500 mL

HA-5037 3.79 pH, 500 mL

HA-5009 9.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-4007-02 100 ppm Chloride Std., 500 mL

HA-5004 4.01 pH, 500 mL

HA-5091 9.18 pH, 500 mL

HA-4007-03 1000 ppm Chloride Std., 500 mL

HA-5004-01 4.01 pH, 1 L

HA-5010 10.01 pH, 500 mL

HA-4010-01 0.1 M Fluoride Std., 500 mL

HA-5004-R 4.01 pH, Red, 500 mL

HA-5010-01 10.01 pH, 1 L

HA-4010-02 100 ppm Fluoride Std., 500 mL

HA-5046 4.63 pH, 500 mL

HA-5010-V 10.01 pH, Violet, 500 mL

HA-4010-03 1000 ppm Fluoride Std., 500 mL

HA-5005 5.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-5011 11.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-4010-10 10 ppm Fluoride Std. Premixed W/ TISAB II, 500 mL

HA-5006 6.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-5012 12.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-4010-11 1 ppm Fluoride Std. Premixed W/ TISAB II, 500 mL

HA-5068 6.86 pH, 500 mL

HA-5124 12.45 pH, 500 mL

HA-4010-12 2 ppm Fluoride Std. Premixed W/ TISAB II, 500 mL

HA-5007 7.01 pH, 500 mL

HA-5013 13.00 pH, 500 mL

HA-4010-30 (4) 1, (4) 10 ppm Fluoride Std. W/ (4) TISAB II, 500 mL Other ISE solutions available upon request.

pH Millesimal Calibration Solutions with ±0.002 pH Accuracy Features • HA-60XX has been prepared to meet the increasing need for assured accuracy in pH measurements. Each bottle of the series HA-60XX is provided with a certificate of analysis, prepared by comparison with NIST standards.

59

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

• pH Value @ 25°C • Also available in 1 Liter bottles add -01 to the end of the part number HA-6001 1.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6007 7.010 pH, 500 mL

HA-6016 1.679 pH, 500 mL

HA-6074 7.413 pH, 500 mL

HA-6002 2.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6008 8.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6003 3.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6009 9.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6037 3.788 pH, 500 mL

HA-6091 9.177 pH, 500 mL

HA-6004 4.010 pH, 500 mL

HA-6010 10.010 pH, 500 mL

HA-6046 4.630 pH, 500 mL

HA-6011 11.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6005 5.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6012 12.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6006 6.000 pH, 500 mL

HA-6124 12.450 pH, 500 mL

HA-6068 6.862 pH, 500 mL

HA-6013 13.000 pH, 500 mL

Fax : (514) 326 8961


pH, Conductivity, TDS, ORP, Turbidity, Storage, Cleaning & Sample Preperation Solutions

pH

Features • Excellent quality • Complete range of solutions and sizes • Certificates of analysis available upon request • FDA approved bottles available upon request • Temperature reference chart on each solution

Numerous Solutions to Choose From ... Which One is Best for You? pH 4.01 Buffer Solutions HA-70004P 4.01, 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box Continuation Of Conductivity Standards

HA-7004L 4.01, 500 mL HA-7004/1L 4.01, 1 Liter HA-7004/1G 4.01, 1 US Gallon

HA-7031L 1413 µS/cm (µmho/cm), 500 mL

Cleaning Solutions For General Use

HA-70030P 12880 µS/cm (µmho/cm), 20 mL Sachet 25/Box

HA-7061L General Purpose, 500 mL

HA-7030L 12880 µS/cm (µmho/cm), 500 mL

HA-7073L Proteins, 500 mL HA-7074L Inorganic Substances, 500 mL

pH 7.01 Buffer Solutions

TDS Standards

HA-70007P 7.01, 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box

HA-70080P 800 ppm (mg/L), 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box

HA-7007L 7.01, 500 mL

HA-70032P 1382 ppm (mg/L), 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box

HA-7007/1L 7.01, 1 Liter

HA-7032L 1382 ppm (mg/L), 500 mL

HA-7007/1G 7.01, 1 US Gallon

HA-70442P 1500 ppm (mg/L), 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box

HA-7077L Oil & Fats, 500 mL HA-8061L General Purpose, FDA, 500 mL HA-8073L Proteins, FDA, 500 mL HA-8077L Oil & Fats, FDA, 500 mL

HA-70442L 1500 ppm (mg/L), 500 mL

Specific Application Cleaning Solutions

HA-70038P 6.44 ppt (g/L), 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box

HA-70620L Cleaning & Disinfection Solution For Skin Residuals (Cosmetic Industry), 500 mL

HA-7010L 10.01, 500 mL

Turbidity Standard Solutions

HA-70621L Cleaning Solution For Skin Grease & Sebum (Cosmetic Industry), 500 mL

HA-7010/1L 10.01, 1 Liter

HA-93102-0 AMCO-AEPA-1 Calibration Solution At 0 NTU, 30 mL

HA-7010/1G 10.01, 1 US Gallon

HA-93102-20 AMCO-AEPA-1 Calibration Solution At 20 NTU, 30 mL

pH 10.01 Buffer Solutions HA-70010P 10.01, 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box

HA-70630L Acid Cleaning Solution For Meat Grease & Fats (Food Industry), 500 mL

HA-93703-0 AMCO-AEPA-1 Calibration Solution At 0 FTU, 30 mL

HA-70631L Alkaline Cleaning Solution For Meat Grease & Fats (Food Industry), 500 mL

HA-93703-05 AMCO-AEPA-1 Calibration Solution At 500 FTU, 30 mL

HA-70640L Cleaning Solution For Milk Deposits (Food Industry), 500 mL

HA-93703-10 AMCO-AEPA-1 Calibration Solution At 10 FTU, 30 mL

HA-70641L Cleaning & Disinfection Solution For Dairy Products (Food Industry), 500 mL

ORP Test & Pretreatment Solutions HA-7020L ORP Test Solution At 200/275 mV (@ 20°C), 500 mL HA-7021L ORP Test Solution At 240 mV (@ 20°C), 500 mL HA-7022L ORP Test Solution At 470 mV (@ 20°C), 500 mL

Electrode Storage Solutions

HA-70642L Cleaning Solution For Cheese Deposits (Food Industry), 500 mL

HA-7091L Reducing Pretreatment Solution, 500 mL

HA-70300L Electrode Storage Solution, 500 mL

HA-70663L Cleaning Solution For Soil Deposits (Agriculture), 500 mL

HA-7092L Oxidizing Pretreatment Solution, 500 mL

HA-80300L Electrode Storage Solution, FDA, 500 mL

HA-70664L Cleaning Solution For Humus Deposits (Agriculture), 500 mL

Conductivity Standards

Sample Preparation Solutions

HA-70033P 84 S/cm (µmho/cm), 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box

HA-7051M Soil Sample Preparation Solution, 250 mL

HA-70671L Cleaning & Disinfection Solution For Algae, Fungi & Bacteria (Industrial Processes), 500 mL

HA-7033L 84 S/cm (µmho/cm), 500 mL

HA-7051L Soil Sample Preparation Solution, 500 mL

HA-70680L Cleaning Solution For Cellulose Deposits, 500 mL

HA-70031P 1413 µS/cm (µmho/cm), 20 mL Sachet, 25/Box

HA-70960 Preparation Solution for Solid Or Semi Solid Samples, 30 mL

HA-70681L Cleaning Solution For Ink Stains, 500 mL

www.ereinc.com

HA-70670L Cleaning Solution For Salt Deposits (Industrial Processes), 500 mL

sales@ereinc.com

60


Plant Physiology PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

CID Bio-Science Digital Plant Canopy Imager CI-110 and CI-120 The CI-110’s digital platform enables you to simultaneously capture wide-angle plant canopy images and estimate Leaf Area Index (LAI) and Photosynthetically Active Radiation (PAR) levels from a single canopy scan. No more taking multiple scans above and below the canopy… leave your tree-climbing equipment at home! One measurement provides a full complement of data, unlike systems which require the user take multiple measurements and attach various masking devices to obtain meaningful data. • Instant Data: Captures Canopy image and calculates Leaf Area Index (LAI) and Photosynthetic Active Radiation (PAR) levels • Onsite Evaluation: The CI-110 digital process needs only one scan beneath the canopy, allowing on-site evaluation under any daylight conditions • User-Defined: User-selected number of zenith divisions (rings) and azimuthal divisions allows investigation of any canopy sectors desired • Lightweight: 0.5 kg instrument is handheld and simple to use • Lightweight and fast, the CI-110 revolutionizes data collection for forest management, crop science and environmental research!

CID Bio-Science Miniature Leaf Spectrometer CI-710 Numerous analyses are possible with the CI710, including color measurement, pigment concentration estimation, and physical properties: • Chlorophyll concentration • Leaf surface characterization, such as reflectance properties of leaf hairs • Proportional light absorbance by leaves to calculate electron transport rates in chlorophyll fluorescence • Concentration of plant pigments, including anthocyanins and carotenoids • Truly portable, field-ready unit with built-in leaf probe

Specifications

CI-110

CI-120

Single Measurement for LAI, PAR and Sunflecks

X

X

Ideal for Environmental, Forestry, and Crop Science Applications

X

X

Viewing Angle

180°

150°

User Selected Azimuthal and Zenith Divisions

X

X

On-site Gap Fraction Analysis

X

X

Calculation of Diffuse Radiation Transmission Coefficients

X

X

Calculation of Mean Foliage Inclination

X

X

Calculation of Canopy Extinction Coefficients

X

X

On Image Plotting of Sun Paths

X

X

Non-Destructive LAI and PAR Measurement

X

X

Integrated Self-Leveling CCD

X

Integrated Array Style Wand to Measure PAR / Sunflecks

X

Ideal for Measuring Low-Lying Crops and Grasses

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

X

X

• Wide-range spectrum (400 nm - 950 nm) covering PAR and NIR • High-resolution (~1.5 nm) • Real-time display of measured spectrum • Lightweight - 290 g • Measures: Transmittance, absorbance and reflectance Introducing SpectraSnap! Part of the power of the CI-710 Miniature Leaf Spectrometer is its ability to scan and record across a wide spectrum, from 400 - 1000 nm. Many researchers wish to analyze multiple, discrete peaks or integrate across wavelength bands. These functions are readily accomplished with the SpectraSnap! software that ships with the CI-710. Other users of the CI-710 have expressed a need to rapidly estimate vegetation properties using published and accepted indices. These indices include: estimates of greenness like the widely-used Normalized Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI); plant stress, such as the Plant Senescence Reflectance Index (PRSI); pigment concentrations, including carotenoids and anthocyaninst; and leaf water status estimated by the Water Band Index (WBI).

61

CI-120

CI-110

Why SpectraSnap? SpectraSnap! simplifies data analysis by offering several real time computations in an intuitive and easy-to-operate system. Researchers can choose from a convenient selection of popular vegetation indices (NDVI, PRI, CRI, ARI, etc) or simply add their own algorithms. These indices can be easily and simultaneously monitored and recorded. In essence, SpectraSnap! gives the CI-710 user the power of many single-measurement instruments in one package.

Fax : (514) 326 8961


CID Bio-Science Laser Leaf Area Meter CI-202 Includes • Laser scanner with built-in control unit • Scan board • Internal batteries • Battery charger • Communication software • One additional transparent film • Operation manual • Hard shell carrying case

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

The CI-202 collects length, width, perimeter, and area measurements directly using a combination of a sweeping laser beam and an optical motion sensor. After activating the device by pressing the <start> key, a low energy laser beam sweeps across the laser window 500 times per second at a rate of 150 m/s. As the user moves the CI-202 control unit down the pallet, an optical sensor records the motion along the specially textured aluminum rail. The onboard processing unit collects the data from each laser sweep and uses the optical sensor data to correctly accumulate the area and perimeter measurements. Specifications

CI-202

Measuring Thickness

15 mm maximum

Measuring Width

150 mm maximum

Measuring Length

3 m maximum

Resolution

0.01 mm²

Accuracy

±1% for samples >10 cm²

Interface

USB 2.0

Scanner

675 nm Laser Diode

Memory Size

8,000 measurements

Display

16 characters × 2 lines LCD

Scanning Speed

200 mm/second

Battery

7.2 volt rechargeable NiMH

Battery Capacity

Over 250 scans per charge

Operating Temperature

0 - 50°C

CID Bio-Science Laser Leaf Area Meter CI-203 To measure leaf area, simply sweep the leaf through the instrument, and the CI-203 instantly scans and calculates the leaf area, width, length, perimeter, shape factor and aspect ratio. The CI-203 is flexible as well as fast: use in the field to measure living leaves on plants one-byone, or add the conveyor attachment to perform high-throughput measurements of whole plant leaf area. The CI-203 has virtually unlimited data storage, and displays the leaf image on its LCD screen. You can easily download data sets into a spreadsheet for analysis via the USB 2.0.

www.ereinc.com

Includes • Laser leaf area meter main unit • Internal battery • Battery charger • USB cable • Communication software • Operating manual • Hard-shell instrument carrying case

Portable, lightweight devices!

Specifications

CI-203

Measuring Thickness

15 mm maximum

Measuring Width

150 mm maximum

Measuring Length

3 m maximum

Resolution

0.01 mm²

Accuracy

±1% for samples > 10 cm²

Interface

USB serial interface

Measuring Units

cm² (area), cm (length, width, and perimeter)

Memory Size

4 GB SD card; virtually unlimited measurements

Display

Transflective Graphic display

Scanning Speed

200 mm/second

Battery

7.2 volt rechargeable NiMH

Battery Capacity

250 scans on single charge

Operating Temperature

0 - 50°C

Dimensions

35.5L × 4.5W × 5H cm

Weight

750 g

sales@ereinc.com

62


PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

CID Bio-Science Handheld Photosynthesis System CI-340 The CI-340 Handheld Photosynthesis System is a much improved version of the first lightweight, hand-held photosynthesis system introduced by CID in 1997. The latest version, the CI-340, features a new design concept and compact solid-state structure. The entire system: the display, key pad, computer, data memory, CO2 / H2O gas analyzer, flow control system and battery are contained in a single, hand-held chassis. Everything required to measure photosynthesis, transpiration, stomatal conductance, PAR and internal CO2 is conveniently included in one easy to operate instrument. Because the chamber is connected to the CO2 / H2O gas analyzer, there is virtually no delay when measuring CO2 / H2O in the chamber. These features make the CI-340 not only the smallest, but the quickest Handheld Photosynthesis System available for field or laboratory applications.

Lightweight Complete system in one handheld package that weighs only 1.5 kg.

Control Optional modules enable you to control CO2, H2O, temperature, light intensity and measure chlorophyll florescence and photosynthesis simultaneously.

Flexiblity Nine custom leaf chambers and a soil respiration chamber enable a multitude of measurement possibilities.

The CI-340 can also control temperature and light intensity with the optional temperature and light control modules. Furthermore, a chlorophyll fluorescence module can be attached to the CI-340 to simultaneously measure photosynthesis and chlorophyll fluorescence.

Temperature Control Module CI-510CS Type

Thermoelectric cooler

Range

-25 - +25°C from ambient temperature

Cooling Head Dimensions

55 × 43 × 14 mm

Dimensions

64 × 100 × 160 mm

Adjustable H2O and CO2 Control Module CI-301AD CO2 Supply

CO2 cartridge

CO2 Range

0 - 2000 ppm optional

H2O Supply

Water vapor generator

H2O Range

0 - 100% RH

Dimensions

64 × 100 × 160 mm

Chlorophyll Fluorescence Module CI-510CF

63

Modulated Light Intensity

0.25 uE at 12 mm

Flash Light Intensity

3000 uE at 12 mm

Modulation Frequency

8 - 80 Hz

Fiber Optic Probe

Bifurcated light guide

Dimensions

64 × 100 × 160 mm

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Soil Respiration Chamber CI-301SR Because soil respiration is the major pathway of carbon transfer from soil to atmosphere, understanding soil respiration is crucial for the study of carbon balance in terrestrial ecosystems. The CI-340 Handheld Photosynthesis System coupled with the CI301SR soil respiration chamber enables researchers to collect soil surface CO2 efflux data. The amount of soil respiration that occurs in an ecosystem is controlled by several factors: soil temperature, soil moisture, root nitrogen concentrations, soil texture, substrate quantity and quality, among which soil temperature and moisture dominate. The CI-301SR soil respiration chamber comes equipped with internal fans for proper air mixing and its small geometry aids in rendering more accurate CO2 flux measurements that are less affected by excess humidity. The CI-310SR is light (180 g), practical and versatile. Its rugged stainless steel frame can be used on uneven terrain, and in small spaces between rocks, vegetation or tree roots.

Fax : (514) 326 8961


CID Bio-Science Portable Ethylene Gas Analyzer CI-900 Engineering and design of the instrument provides: High C2H4 sensitivity down to 1 ppb CO2 and 1-MCP sensing capability (optional) Compact and portable form factor (2.43 kg) Real-time, continuous monitoring Internal data logging and storage (4 GB SD card) • User adjustable sampling rate • Transflective display enables easy viewing in direct sunlight • Rechargeable Li-Ion battery provides 8 hours of uninterrupted field use

Features • Lightweight: The CI-900 weighs just 2.43 kg • Portable: Performs non-destructive in vivo measurements in the field • Precise: The CI-900 sets the standard for portable measurements of ethylene in the field.

The CI-900 Portable Ethylene Analyzer provides accurate real-time measurement of ethylene gas concentrations, in a compact package suitable for field and laboratory use. At the core of the instrument, the CI-900 uses an electrochemical sensor technology that offers extraordinary sensitivity to ethylene, with accurate readings as low as 10 ppbv in air. Ethylene production is known to increase in response to plant stress and during ripening and maturity (ethylene is a plant hormone produced by trees, plants, fruits, and vegetables). Until recently, sensitive ethylene measurements were available only through elaborate and expensive gas sampling and gas chromatography analysis. The intent of the CI-900’s portable design is to aid the research community in developing real-world ethylene management applications for the benefit of growers, processors, and consumers. Why CI-900? Ethylene production rates have traditionally required elaborate and expensive sample collection and gas chromatography procedures. The CI-900 eliminates the need to fill syringes and travel back to the lab or outsource samples. The challenge of measuring ethylene production of in-vivo fruits, vegetables and flowers has resulted in a limited understanding of the phenological correlation of ethylene production over the life-cycle of most plants. The CI-900 Portable Ethylene Analyzer provides the accuracy, real-time response, and portability necessary to provide ethylene production measurements in the field or in a laboratory environment. The CI-900 chamber allows a single fruit (apple, pear, avocado, etc.) to be left intact on the plant/vine while performing measurements in continuous mode. Therefore, taking ethylene samples with the CI-900 is non-detrimental to plant growth or fruit ripening. In addition to ethylene sensing the CI-900 has been designed to carry two additional sensors; one for measuring 1-Methylcyclopropene (1-MCP), and the second Carbon Dioxide (CO2). Measurements of 1-MCP can help the research community understand and develop protocols to delay ripening, maturation and the sprouting of plants. Measurements of CO2 gas exchange offer researchers vital information regarding respiration and photosynthesis.

Specifications

C2H4 and 1-MCP Sensor

Sensor Type

Electrochemical

Air Sampling Rate

0.4 liters/min

Sampling Rate

Closed-loop < 3 min / Open loop monitoring @ 5 sec interval

Nominal Range

0 - 10 ppm

Resolution

1 ppb

Accuracy

±5% adjusted for temperature and humidity

Display

Sunlight visible transflective graphic LCD

Operating Environment

5°C - 45°C (10 - 90% humidity non-condensing)

Battery Capacity

4 Hours - rechargeable LiIon (5000 mAh)

Dimensions

183.5 x 111 x 120 mm

Weight

2.43 kg

Enclosure

Anodized aluminum

Warm-up Time

< 5 minutes

Specifications

CO2 Sensor

Sensor Type

Low power Non-Dispersive Infrared Gas Analyzer

Chopping Frequency

1 Hz

Source Life

5000 hours

Measuring Range

0 to 2000 ppm (Standard) 0 to 3000 ppm (Optional)

Resolution

0.1 ppm

Repeatability

±0.1 ppm (short term)

Accuracy

< ±2% up to 3000 ppm

Sample Cell

100 x 10.2 mm (3.94" L x 0.40" Dia)

Warm-up Time

< 3 minutes

CI-900 Package

CI-900FK Package

The base model includes ethylene (C2H4) gas sensor and operations manual.

The Field Kit includes ethylene (C2H4) gas sensor, GPS chip, 1 liter chamber, pump and flexible tubing assembly, syringe and sampling bags, hydrocarbon scrubber, hard-shell carrying case and operation manual.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

• • • • •

64


CID Bio-Science In-Situ Root Imager CI-600

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

• Provides a high-resolution underground color image of living roots in the soil • Enables observation of root system architecture and soil profile over time • Portable and field ready for fast, accurate root and soil images

The study of fine root dynamics (production, turnover, and lifespan) and root system architecture (RSA) is at the forefront in the fields of ecology and agronomy / plant breeding. Future gains in plant productivity will be driven by selection for traits that optimize acquisition of resources such as water and mineral nutrients under limiting conditions. The CI-600 leads the fine root-imaging field by offering researchers the ability to acquire high-resolution images of roots over time. The CI-600 allows researchers the ability to scan multiple tubes in the field with one handheld unit.

Features • High-resolution image - up to 88 million pixels • Quick image capture - 5 to 15 seconds per scan • Linear scanning with no distortion • Each scan generates a near 360-degree image (21.59 × 19.56 cm) at up to 1200 dpi resolution • Very portable and quick operation • Enables observation of root system architecture and behavior during the entire growth season • USB interface for laptop computer image storage How to use The CI-600 is designed for long-term root studies on living plants in the field. Install clear acrylic tubes within the study area prior to the growing season. When the plant begins to build a network of roots, simply slide the CI-600 scanner head within the tube at the desired depth and download images to your computer via USB connection. The images collected by the CI-600 can be imported and analyzed with RootSnap! root image analysis software.

Includes • Root imaging unit • Three 105 cm clear tubes with end caps (custom length tubes available) • Calibration tube • Scanning software and operating manual • Hard shell instrument case • Optional hand-held computer • Optional RootSnap! root image analysis software

Specifications

CI-600

Scanner Resolution

Maximum 1200 dpi - up to 88 million pixels

Image Size

21.6W × 19.6L cm 8.5"W × 7.7"L

Scan Speed

5 to 15 seconds - depending on scanning resolutions

Interface

USB port

Power Supply

Computer USB port

Scan Head Dimensions

34.3 cm long × 6.4 cm diameter

Standard Clear Tube Dimensions

6.4 cm inner diameter × 105 cm length (2.5 inches × 3.4 feet); custom lengths available upon request

Scanner Unit Weight

750 g

CID Bio-Science RootSnap! Automated Root Image Analysis CI-690 RootSnap! removes hours of tedious tracing by offering a revolutionary user interface that employs a multi-touch screen which enables users to more quickly and easily trace roots using a finger. The software has tracing enhancements like the "Snap-to-Root" function which automatically moves root tracing points to the center of the root. Additionally, RootSnap! has integrated image enhancement features which enables users to optimize each scanned image for more accurate processing. Monitor root growth, dynamics, taxonomy, morphology, and behavior over time with RootSnap! Simplify root mapping using the multi-touch screen and our proprietary "Snap-to-Root" functionality. The superior RootSnap! user interface is intuitive and efficient. It uses familiar commands to manipulate images and files and stores information in common file formats (XML) and supports exporting data to Excel.

65

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Features • Intuitive user interface • Multi-touch screen functionality • Measures root length, area, volume, & diameter • Integrated image enhancement • Automated "Snap-to-Root" functionality • Comprehensive data analysis package • Time series analysis • Files stored in common formats

Benefits • Easy to use • Map roots in a fraction of the time! • Trace roots with a finger • Easily manipulate images (colors, sharpness, contrast, etc.) • Designed to work with Excel • Monitor root growth, disease, and behavior over time

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Refractometers Hanna Sugar Refractometers Analyze: fruits, energy drinks, puddings, soy milk, juices, jam, marmalade, honey, soups, jelly, tofu, condiments.

Specifications

HA-96801

HA-96802

Range Sugar Content Temperature

0 - 85% Brix

0 - 85% (by weight)

Resolution Sugar Content Temperature

±0.1% Brix

Accuracy (@ 20°C) Sugar Content

HA-96803

HA-96804

0 - 85% (by weight)

0 - 85% (by weight)

±0.1

±0.1

±0.2%

±0.2%

REFREACTOMETERS

Sugar Refractometers meet the requirements of the food industry. The HA-96801 Sucrose, HA-96802 Fructose, HA-96803 Glucose and HA96804 Invert Sugar Digital Refractometers are rugged, portable and water resistant for measurements in the lab or field. Each instrument offers a specific analysis to determine accurate sugar concentration. The actual measurement of refractive index is simple and quick and provides the operator a standard accepted method for sugar content analysis. Samples are measured after a simple user calibration with deionized or distilled water. Within seconds these instruments measure the refractive index of the sample and convert it to % by weight concentration units (or % Brix for HA-96801). These digital refractometers eliminate the uncertainity associated with mechanical refractometers and are easily portable for measurements in the field.

0 - 80°C (32 to 176°F)

±0.1 ±0.1°C (0.1°F)

±0.2% Brix

±0.2%

Temperature

±0.3°C (0.5°F)

Temperature Compensation

Automatic between 10 and 40°C (50 to 104°F)

Measurement Time

Approximately 1.5 seconds

Minimum Sample Volume

100 μL (to cover prism totally)

Light Source

Yellow LED

Sample Cell

Stainless Steel ring and flint glass prism

Auto-Off

After 3 a of non-use

Enclosure Rating

IP 65

Battery Type / Battery Life

9 V / Approx. 5000 readings

Dimensions / Weight

192 x 102 x 67 mm (7.6" x 4" x 2.6"), 420 g

Hanna Sodium Chloride Refractometer

Specifications

HA-96821

Analyze: salad dressings, cheeses, pickles, canned foods, jarred foods, condiments, energy drinks, milk, juices, soups, brines, whey.

Range g/100 g & g/100 mL Specific Gravity °Baumé Temperature

0 - 28 & 0 - 34 1.000 - 1.216 0 - 26 0 - 80°C (32 - 176°F)

Resolution g/100 g & g/100 mL Specific Gravity °Baumé Temperature

0.1 & 0.1 0.001 0.1 ±0.1°C (0.1°F)

Accuracy (@ 20°C) g/100 g & g/100 mL Specific Gravity °Baumé Temperature

±0.2 & ±0.2 ±0.002 ±0.2 ±0.3°C (0.5°F)

HA-96821 Digital Sodium Chloride Refractometer meets the requirements of the food industry. This optical instrument employs the measurement of the refractive index to determine sodium chloride concentration in aqueous solutions used in food preparation. It is not intended for sea water salinity measurements. The measurement of refractive index is simple and quick and provides the user an accepted method for NaCl analysis. Samples are measured after a simple user calibration with deionized or distilled water. Within seconds the instrument measures the refractive index of the solution. The digital refractometer eliminates the uncertainty associated with mechanical refractometers and is easily portable for measurements where you need them.

www.ereinc.com

Temperature Compensation

Automatic between 10 and 40°C (50 to 104°F)

Measurement Time

Approximately 1.5 seconds

Minimum Sample Volume

100 μL (to cover prism totally)

Light Source

Yellow LED

Sample Cell

Stainless Steel ring and flint glass prism

Enclosure Rating

IP 65

Battery Type / Battery Life

9 V / Approx. 5000 readings

Dimensions / Weight

192 x 102 x 67 mm (7.6" x 4" x 2.6"), 420 g

sales@ereinc.com

66


Hanna Seawater Refractometer

REFRACTOMETERS

HA-96822 Digital Seawater Refractometer is a rugged portable, water resistant device that utilizes the measurement of the refractive index to determine the salinity of natural and artificial seawater, ocean water or brackish intermediates. Within seconds, the refractive index and temperature are measured and converted into one of 3 popular measurement units: Practical Salinity Units (PSU), Salinity In Parts Per Thousand (ppt), or Specific Gravity (S.G. (20/20)). All conversion algorithms are based upon respected scientific publications using the physical properties of seawater (not sodium chloride). Specifications

HA-96822

Range PSU ppt Specific Gravity (20/20) Temperature

0 - 50 0 - 150 1.000 - 1.114 0 - 80°C (32 to 176°F)

Resolution PSU ppt Specific Gravity (20/20) Temperature

1 1 0.001 ±0.1°C (0.1°F)

Accuracy (@ 20°C) PSU ppt Specific Gravity (20/20) Temperature

±2 ±2 ±0.002 ±0.3°C (0.5°F)

Temperature Compensation

Automatic between 10 and 40°C (50 to 104°F)

Measurement Time

Approximately 1.5 seconds

Minimum Sample Volume

100 μL (to cover prism totally)

Light Source

Yellow LED

Sample Cell

Stainless steel ring and flint glass prism

Auto-Off

After 3 minutes of non-use

Enclosure Rating

IP 65

Battery Type / Battery Life

9 V / Approx. 5000 readings

Dimensions / Weight

192 x 102 x 67 mm (7.6" x 4" x 2.6"), 420 g

Extech Portable Refractometers Measure the concentration of sugar, salt, lubricants, antifreeze, cutting fluids & more. Available with or without Automatic Temperature Compensation. Features • Easy to operate, provides accurate and repeatable measurements on easy to read scales • Requires only 2 or 3 drops of solution • The prism and lens with a simple focus adjustment provides repeatable results • Complete with case, calibration screwdriver, and calibration solution

Part Number

Type

Ranges

Resolution

Accuracy

EX-RF16

Sucrose

0 - 10% Brix

0.1

±0.1%

EX-RF11

Sucrose (ATC)

0 - 10% (10 to 30°C)

0.1

±0.1%

EX-RF18

Lubricants / Cutting Fluids

0 - 18% Brix

0.2

±0.2%

EX-RF12

Lubricants / Cutting Fluids (ATC)

0 - 18% Brix (10 to 30°C)

0.2

±0.2%

EX-RF10

Sucrose

0 - 32% Brix

0.2

±0.2%

EX-RF15

Sucrose (ATC)

0 - 32% Brix (10 to 30°C)

0.2

±0.2%

EX-RF20

Salt (ATC)

0 - 100 ppt (10 to 30°C)

0.001

±0.1%

2°F

±2%

2°F

±2%

1.000 - 1.070 Refractive Index EX-RF40

Coolant (ATC)

-60 - 32°F Propylene Glycol Freeze Point -60 - 25°F Ethylene Glycol Freeze Point 1.15 - 1.30 Specific Gravity

0.01

of Battery Acid EX-RF41

Coolant (ATC)

-50 - 0°C Propylene

1°C

±2%

1°C

±2%

Glycol Freeze Point 50 - 0°C Ethylene Glycol Freeze Point 1.15 - 1.30 Specific

0.01

Gravity of Battery Acid EX-RF30

67

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Triple Range

0 - 41% Brix

0.2

±0.2%

General Service

42 - 71% Brix

0.2

±0.2%

72 - 90% Brix

0.2

±0.2%

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Bellingham + Stanley OPTi Digital Range

Features • Ergonomic design • Wide application scope • Single and Duo scale models • Zero calibrate with water • Shallow prism dish • Small hand print

Specifications

OPTI Digital

Resolution (°Brix / Refractive Index)*

0.1 / 0.0001

Accuracy (°Brix / Refractive Index)*

±0.2 / ±0.0003

Automatic Temperature Compensation*

ICUMSA / App. Specific / None

Ambient Temperature Range

Single Scale Models

5 – 40°C

Measurement Time

2 seconds

Battery Life

10,000 readings

Battery Type

3 V 2 x AAA (LR03)

REFREACTOMETERS

Bellingham + Stanley designed OPTi digital hand held refractometers are manufactured in the UK as highly reliable premium quality instruments suitable for use in the harshest of environments across a wide application scope. OPTi refractometers are constructed using the latest manufacturing techniques including stainless steel injection molding to construct the easy clean prism dish, ultrasonic welding to bond the housings and a rubberized switch membrane to further protect against moisture ingress and excess wear. The OPTi refractometer may be used to control the dissolved solids or blend ratios of numerous products from fresh fruit to industrial chemicals.

Code

Range

38-02

0 - 54 % Sugar (°Brix)

38-20

1.33 - 1.42 RI

38-22

0 - 30 % Starch

38-23

0 - 40 % Urea

38-28

0 - 28 % Salinity (NaCl)

Also available in Dual Scale Models!

* Call for model specific details.

Bellingham + Stanley Eclipse Professional Range Manufactured in the UK using only the highest quality optical components and the most modern manufacturing practices, the Eclipse refractometer is the ultimate optical hand held refractometer on the market today. A comprehensive choice of scale types offers versatility across a wide application scope from testing fruit ripeness in the field to monitoring industrial fluids in harsh machine shop environments. Eclipse refractometers have a number of unique features not available on many other brands of refractometer. Code

Food, Beverage, Sugar & General Models

Range

Scale Division

45-01

Sugar % (°Brix)

0 - 15

0.1

45-02

Sugar % (°Brix)

0 - 30

0.2

45-07

Sugar % (°Brix)

0 - 32

0.2

45-03

Sugar % (°Brix)

0 - 50

0.5

45-08

Sugar % (°Brix)

28 - 65

0.2

45-05

Sugar % (°Brix)

45 - 80

0.2

45-06

Sugar % (°Brix)

72 - 95

0.2

45-22

Wine - °Zeiss (ABV)

10 - 135

1

45-27

Water-in-Honey (%)

10 - 30

0.2

45-81

Low Volume (Nectar <1-micro-litre)

0 - 50

0.5

45-82

Low Volume (Nectar <1-micro-litre)

45 - 80

0.2

Special features make measurement easy and reliable • All metal construction • Rubber handgrip for insulation • Robust ergonomics for easy handling • Anti-roll supports • High precision, clear scale • Sample "dribble" feed • Zero adjust with lock • Push on prism flap • Ideal for hot & cold samples • Serial numbered • Certificate of conformity

Industrial Models 45-26

Starch (%)

0 - 30

0.2

45-41

Refractive Index

1.330 - 1.420

0.001

45-44

Antifreeze

- °C Protection - Battery acid SG

45-45

Antifreeze

- °F Protection - Battery acid SG

45-46

Antifreeze

- % Ethylene Glycol - % Propylene Glycol

0 to -40 1.1 - 1.35 30 to -40 1.1 - 1.35 0-6 0 - 60

5 0.05 5 0.05 2.5 2.5

45-65

Salinity (% NaCl)

0 - 28

0.2

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

68


Bellingham + Stanley Abbe 60 Direct Reading Refractometer More stringent requirements of quality control and, in some cases, legislation, mean that greater accuracy is being demanded of refractometers. The Abbe 60 Direct Reading models, available in two measuring ranges, have been designed to meet these requirements.

REFRACTOMETERS

The latest designs incorporate an externally mounted LED light source for sample illumination. A wavelength compensation device is used to 'achromatise' to the mean sodium wavelength (589.3 nm). Refractive Index can be read directly from a scale divided to 0.001 allowing for estimation to ±0.0001. Temperature control can be achieved by circulation of water; prism temperature is displayed in digital form. Direct reading models are particularly suitable for the measurement of sugar solutions and sugar content of food and drink products. They can also be used to determine the refractive index of pure liquids, solutions and formulated products including; flavourings, fragrances, oils and fats, solvents, plastics, resins, adhesives and many other industrial chemicals. Instruments come complete with external power supply, standardisation plate, contact liquid, and instructions for use. Scale and scale division Code

Model

Sugar % (Brix)* Refractive Index

10-99

60/DR

0 - 95 x 0.5

1.30 - 1.74 x 0.001

10-03

60/95

0 - 50 x 0.2 50 - 95 x 0.1

1.30 - 1.535 x 0.001

Features • Integral LED light source • Direct reading of RI & Brix • Extremely robust

Abbe 60/95

Bellingham + Stanley High Accuracy Range of Abbe 60 Refractometers The high accuracy models are designed for use with monochromatic light sources such as the sodium and spectral range available from Bellingham+Stanley. A PC program for conversion of scale readings to refractive index (RI) or Brix (Sugar%) and spectral line identification is available through free download. With good temperature control and use of the micrometer Vernier Scale, an average accuracy of ±0.00004 RI can be achieved across the specified measuring range. Temperature can be controlled by use of a water bath and circulator; prism temperature can be read from the digital display on the instrument. High Accuracy Abbe 60 Refractometers are ideal for use in academic, research and development, quality control and other industrial laboratories where the highest accuracy and precision is often sought. The Abbe 60/ED Refractometer conforms to the requirements of ASTM D1218 and is used widely throughout the petroleum industry. The Abbe 60/LR is uniquely ideal for measuring liquid anaesthetic. Instruments come complete with external power supply, digital thermometer, traceable standardisation plate, contact liquid, sodium D line calibration tables, and instructions for use.

Code

Model

Refractive Index Range

10-04

60/ED

1.30 - 1.74 approximately

10-06

60/LR

1.20 - 1.70 approximately

Features • High accuracy • Dispersion measurement • Conforms to ASTM D1218, 1747 & 5006 • Free software from internet

Abbe 60/LR

69

General Specifications

Abbe 60

Operating Temperature

5 - 75°C

Temperature Resolution

0.1°C

Temperature Accuracy

±0.2 °C (15 to 30 °C) ±0.5 °C (rest of range)

Temperature Stability

±0.1

Storage / Ambient Temperature

5 - 40 °C

Power Source

90 - 250 v~, 50 / 60 Hz. Supplied with instrument

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Bellingham + Stanley RFM700 Refractometers RFM700 series refractometers are robust, low cost, fully automatic instruments that are ideally suited to the food, sugar and beverage industries but can also be used in many other non-food applications where temperature control is not required. The instruments are configured to operate in the °Brix scale with results temperature-compensated to 20°C in accordance with ICUMSA. Additionally, two standard user scales may be installed from an extensive online library, or product specific custom scales and temperature compensation may be created using PC software available free of charge from the Bellingham+Stanley website prior to downloading to the instrument.

Other software features include special AG temperature compensation that facilitates a SPAN calibration when using AG calibration fluids and a time delay before reading, thus ensuring reliable results every time.

RFM745

Specifications

RFM712

RFM732

RFM742

Order Code

29-12

29-32

29-42

29-45

Scales: °Brix User Defined (RI equivalent)

0 - 50 2 (1.33 - 1.42)

0 - 100 2 (1.33 - 1.54)

0 - 100 2 (1.33-1.54)

0 - 100 No

Resolution (°Brix/RI equivalent)

0.1 (0.0001)

0.1 (0.0001)

0.01 (0.00001)

0.01 (NO)

Accuracy (°Brix/RI equivalent)

±0.1 (±0.0001)

±0.1 (±0.0001)

±0.04 (±0.00005)

±0.04 (NO)

Other Scales

User Defined – RI, Oechsle, Probable Alcohol (A.P.), Báume, Babo, Sodium Chloride, HFCS, Butyro, FSII2 etc. or custom scales, all loaded by PC software.

42% HFCS 55% HFCS 90% HFCS

REFREACTOMETERS

Inherent to the robust design is a sapphire prism mounted in an easy-clean stainless steel dish and an outer casing that is sealed and shaped to withstand sample spillage and moisture ingress. This, together with the external power supply and bright LED display, makes the RFM700 ideal for use in busy laboratories or harsh factory environments. The instrument can also be connected to a printer or laboratory PC, with results being output in standard or CSV formats.

5 - 40°C

Temperature Range

ICUMSA, AG, None or User Defined

Temperature Compensation

ICUMSA, AG, None

None – Temperature Compensation (ATC)

Temperature Control Temperature Sensor Accuracy

±0.05°C

Temperature Stability Checks

Delay time (programmable in seconds)

Interface

RS232

Bellingham + Stanley RFM300+ Refractometers RFM300+ series refractometers are considered by many leading companies as the ultimate instrument for installation in demanding factory environments, as well as for use as a primary quality control tool. A shallow, easy-to-clean prism dish houses a single sapphire prism optical system protected by a sample presser that may also be used to instigate a measurement without the need to press the read button.

Specifications

RFM330+

RFM340+

Order Code

22-30

22-40

Scales: Refractive Index Sugar (°Brix) User Defined

1.32 - 1.58 0 - 100 100

1.32 - 1.58 0 - 100 100

Resolution: Refractive Index Sugar (°Brix)

0.0001 0.1

0.00001 0.01

Accuracy: Refractive Index

±0.0001

±0.00002 (1.32 - 1.36 RI) ±0.00004 (1.36 - 1.58 RI) ±0.01 (0 - 20 °Brix) ±0.03 (20 - 100 °Brix)

Sugar (°Brix)

±0.1

User Scale Library on-board

20+ preprogrammed scales including HFCS (3), wine (5), sugar (4), urine SG (3), Urea, sucrose SG (3), FSSI, NaCl, Butyro etc. Plus customer programmable scales by PC software.

Presser Type

Polyacetal

Reading Time

Minimum 4 seconds

Measuring Temperature Range

10°C below ambient to 70°C

Temperature Sensor Accuracy

±0.03°C

Sample Temperature Stability

±0.05°C

Temperature Compensation: Sucrose (Brix°) AG Fluids User Defined Temperature Stability Checks

5 - 70 °C 5 - 40 °C Simple coefficient (units/°C) or polynomial function None / delay time / repeatability / Smart (independently selectable by Method)

Ambient Humidity Range

A large sampling area on the prism surface allows measurement of not only homogenous fluids like juices, sodas, sauces and edible oils, but also difficult to read samples like fruit pulps and industrial resins. The instrument is available in two formats, the most popular being the 2decimal place RFM340+ refractometer, which, following improvements to the thermodynamic control system, now has an increased measurement performance between 0 - 20°Brix. This reduces potential measurement error in the critical range covering finished products like the aforementioned juices and sodas. By improving the performance at the low end of the scale, users may now trim syrup dilution to the absolute minimum without the risk of breaching manufacturing specifications. SG scales for sucrose are also common to the series. These scales may be used to express the relative density of pure sucrose solutions and, when used in conjunction with a product offset from within the Methods system, can express finished beverages as an equivalent SG. By doing so, contract packers of beverage products may now use a refractometer in situations where density °Brix or SG is dictated as the method of analysis, whilst retaining all the measurement advantages held by a refractometer.

< 90% RH

Interfaces

1 Parallel (printer), 2 x Serial (RS232)

Prism Seal

Silicon / Resin

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

70


Bellingham + Stanley RFM900 Refractometers

REFRACTOMETERS

The new RFM900 series of refractometers combine the latest opto-electronic principles with durability and ease of use. RFM900 refractometers feature RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) that allows users to identify themselves by simply swiping a tag across the top of the instrument to enable measurement and, in certain cases, access to the configuration menu. A new low-profile sample dish and non-contact presser makes sample application and cleaning much easier. Readings can be taken automatically on the replacement of the presser, and up to 700 stored results can be easily viewed in tabular form on the instrument display. Peltier temperature control and intelligent temperature management ensures readings are only taken when the sample and refractometer temperatures are both stable. The instruments conform to a number of industry measurement standards and offer operational features that allow use in an environment controlled by FDA regulation 21 CFR Part 11.

RFM970

The use of a Kalrez® gasket and sapphire prism facilitates placement in the harshest measurement environments including those in the pharmaceutical, petrochemical, aroma, flavour, fragrance and other high RI sectors. Flowcell versions are also available.

Easy clean prism! Specifications

RFM960

RFM970

RFM990-Flow

Order Code

22-60

22-70

22-90

Scales: Refractive Index Sugar (°Brix) User Defined

1.30 - 1.70 0 - 100 100

1.30 - 1.70 0 - 100 100

1.30 - 1.70 0 - 100 100

Resolution: Refractive Index Sugar (°Brix)

0.0001 0.1

0.00001 0.01

0.00001 0.01

Accuracy: Refractive Index Sugar (°Brix)

±0.0001 ±0.1

±0.00002 ±0.02

±0.00002 ±0.02

Presser Type

Polyacetal

Polyacetal

Flowcell

Temperature Compensation: Sucrose (Brix°) AG Fluids User Defined

5 - 80 °C 5 - 40 °C Simple coefficient (units/°C) or polynomial function

Temperature Control

Peltier

Temperature Stability Checks

None / delay time / repeatability / Smart (independently selectable by Method)

Measuring Temperature Range

0°C or 10°C below ambient whichever is the greater to 80°C

Temperature Sensor Accuracy

±0.03°C

Sample Temperature Stability

±0.02°C

Prism Seal

Kalrez®

Interfaces

1 Parallel (printer), 2 x Serial (RS232)

Kalrez® is a registered trademark of DuPont.

71

RFM900 series prism profile

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) allows users to identify themselves by simply swiping a tag across the top of the instrument.

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Polarimeters

Bellingham + Stanley ADP410 Polarimeter The ADP410 is a dual scale, fully automatic polarimeter designed for use in many applications that require measurement of optical rotation. The instrument is housed in a rugged chemical-resistant case, making it suitable for use in factory environments as well as in the laboratory. Standard, jacketed and flow type tubes may be used, possibly requiring the use of specially suited slotted lids. Operation is very simple by way of four graphically identified push buttons including scale and compensation selection, zero calibration and the display of

Bellingham + Stanley ADP440+ Polarimeter The ADP440+ is a single wavelength, high accuracy polarimeter suitable for use in many applications, and is especially suited for use in pharmaceutical laboratories where compliance with Pharmacopoeia is required. New optics featuring a 'no maintenance' yellow LED and interference filter together with a photodiode detector allows reading of samples of up to 3.0 OD. The instrument has both angular and sugar scales (ISS) and can be programmed with user scales as well as industry standard methods for displaying concentration and specific rotation directly. When used in the sugar industry, the ADP440+ may also form the central hub of a purity system, providing the measurement of a Saccharimeter. In the 'purity mode' the instrument will calculate and display 'sugar purity' with Brix values being input automatically from an RFM refractometer or via the simple keypad. For rapid measurements, funnel and flow-through cells are available and require the use of specially suited slotted lids.

www.ereinc.com

REFREACTOMETERS

ADP410

ADP440+

optical density and temperature. Results are shown on a bright LED display and may be printed via an RS232 interface. Temperature compensation can be achieved from a single sensor, which can measure either the temperature within the sample chamber or, when placed in the centre-filling arm of the measurement tube, the temperature of the actual sample. The sample reading value and optical density are alternately displayed by repeatedly pressing the READ key. The instrument can be checked and calibrated using quartz control plates by accessing the span facility in the setup menu. If a sample is too dark, the instrument will display an error message.

Data handling is in accordance with GLP providing a record of measurement date, time, batch and operator numbers. A calibration record is also available to be displayed or printed. Data handling may also be configured in accordance with the technical requirements of FDA regulation – 21CFR Part 11 with users being identified and cleared by swiping an RFID tag across the instrument surface or by traditional keypad PIN entry.

Specifications

Angular (°A)

ISS (°Z)

Range

-90 to +90

-225 to +225

Resolution

0.01

0.01

Reproducibility

0.01

0.02

Accuracy

±0.02

Order Code

±0.05 37-10

Specifications

Angular (°A)

Range

-355 to +355 selectable

-225 to +225

Resolution

0.01/0.001

0.01/0.001

Reproducibility

0.002

0.005

Accuracy

±0.01

Interfaces

ISS (°Z)

±0.03 2 x RS232, parallel printer port

Code

Description

37-40

ADP440+ digital polarimeter supplied with one centre filling tube (200 mm), pack of three RFID tags, instruction manual and certificate of conformity.

Operation is very simple by way of four push buttons including scale and compensation selection, zero calibration and the displaying of optical density and temperature.

Common Specifications for Bellingham + Stanley Polarimeters Sample Illumination

Light Emitting Diode (100,000 hrs). Interference Filter 589 nm (except ADS480: 850 nm)

Beam Diameter

4 mm

Optical Path Length

10 to 200 mm

Optical Density Range

0.0 to 3.0 OD (except ADS480)

Temperature

Range: 5 - 40°C Compensation: sugar / quartz / none (ADP440+: additional user defined)

Reading Type

Continuous measurement and display

Reading Time (seconds)

4 (ADP410) 20 (ADS) 4-30 (ADP440+: selectable by Method)

Instrument Housing

Polyurethane foam with aluminum base

Power

Instrument: 24 V DC, ±5%, < 2A Power Supply Unit: 100-240 V, 50-60 Hz (supplied with instrument)

Humidity Range

< 90% RH (non condensing)

sales@ereinc.com

72


REFRACTOMETERS

Bellingham + Stanley Saccharimeters A Saccharimeter is a polarimeter that has been configured to display the optical rotation in the International Sugar Scale (ISS – °Z) for operation in the sugar processing industry as defined by the International Commission for Uniform Methods of Sugar Analysis (ICUMSA). Two single wavelength Saccharimeters are available from Bellingham + Stanley, differentiated only by the frequency of the low maintenance LED light source used as part of the analysis. Latest specification optoelectronics allows measurement of samples with low transmittance even at sodium wavelength; however, for applications where the use of lead acetate is prohibited, the near infrared ADS480 Saccharimeter and Celite® filtrate offers supreme performance. Commonly, operation is made easy by way of four graphically presented push button keys and the continuous reading mode that updates the bright LED display, gives the user total confidence in the instrument’s performance. A single temperature sensor provides the measurement for sugar compensation, whilst quartz compensation facilitates accurate verification and calibration using a Quartz Control Plate.

Specifications

ADS420

Range

ADS480 –225 to +225 °Z

Resolution

0.01 °Z

Reproducibility

0.02 °Z

Accuracy

±0.03 °Z

Interfaces

0.03 °Z ±0.06 °Z 1 x RS232

ADS420 ADS480

Saccharimeter Package

37-20

37-80

Standard Saccharimeter, 200 mm centre filling glass sample tube and standard lid

37-21

37-81

Flow-100 Saccharimeter, 100 mm water jacketed funnel flow tube and slotted lid

37-22

37-82

Flow-200 Saccharimeter, 200 mm water jacketed funnel flow tube and slotted lid

55-31

PC software is included with all Saccharimeter packages, providing simultaneous measurement of Brix by refractometer to calculate PURITY. A robust touch sensitive LCD screen is available as an optional extra for use with any PC1. A number of different flow packages are available making the ADS Saccharimeter ideal for use in any busy Tare House or refinery laboratory.

Touch sensitive LCD VDU for purity system

Polarimeter tubes, accessories, and parts also available.

InfoZone

Quick Sugar Facts • Brazil produces the most sugar of any country in the world, followed by India. • Sugar was a rare luxury in Europe until the 18th century, before which the main sweetener in use was honey. • Cats lack a gene responsible for tasting sweetness. They're the only mammals known to be unable to taste it.

73

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Sieves & Sieve Shakers

Mesh Certified Test Sieves (MCTS) 3", 8" Brass Frame & Stainless Steel Mesh

Also available in: 12", 18", 100 mm, 200 mm, 300 mm & 450 mm diameter frame Stainless steel frames Both Certified & Mid-Point Seives are also available in half-height frame depth Other mesh sizes are available, along with receiving pans & lids Part Number 3"

Part Number 8"

Opening

N/A

CSC-008BAW106.0

106.0 mm or 4.24"

N/A

CSC-008BAW100.0

100.0 mm or 4"

N/A

CSC-008BAW90.0

90.0 mm or 3 1/2"

N/A

CSC-008BAW75.0

75.0 mm or 3"

N/A

CSC-008BAW63.0

63.0 mm or 2 1/2"

CSC-003BAW37.5

CSC-008BAW37.5

37.5 mm or 1 1/2"

CSC-003BAW31.5

CSC-008BAW31.5

31.5 mm or 1 1/4"

CSC-003BAW26.5

CSC-008BAW26.5

26.5 mm or 1.06"

CSC-003BAW25.0

CSC-008BAW25.0

25.0 mm or 1"

CSC-003BAW22.4

CSC-008BAW22.4

22.4 mm or 7/8"

CSC-003BAW19.0

CSC-008BAW19.0

19.0 mm or 3/4"

CSC-003BAW16.0

CSC-008BAW16.0

16.0 mm or 5/8"

CSC-003BAW13.2

CSC-008BAW13.2

13.2 mm or 0.530"

CSC-003BAW12.5

CSC-008BAW12.5

12.5 mm or 1/2"

CSC-003BAW11.2

CSC-008BAW11.2

11.2 mm or 7/16"

CSC-003BAW9.50

CSC-008BAW9.50

9.5 mm or 3/8"

CSC-003BAW8.00

CSC-008BAW8.00

8.0 mm or 5/16"

CSC-003BAW6.70

CSC-008BAW6.70

6.7 mm or 0.265"

CSC-003BAW6.30

CSC-008BAW6.30

6.3 mm or 1/4"

CSC-003BAW5.60

CSC-008BAW5.60

5.6 mm or 3 1/2"

CSC-003BAW4.75

CSC-008BAW4.75

4.75 mm or No.4

CSC-003BAW4.00

CSC-008BAW4.00

4.0 mm or No.5

CSC-003BAW3.35

CSC-008BAW3.35

3.35 mm or No.6

CSC-003BAW2.80

CSC-008BAW2.80

2.8 mm or No.7

CSC-003BAW2.36

CSC-008BAW2.36

2.36 mm or No.8

CSC-003BAW2.00

CSC-008BAW2.00

2.0 mm or No.10

CSC-003BAW1.70

CSC-008BAW1.70

1.7 mm or No.12

CSC-003BAW1.40

CSC-008BAW1.40

1.4 mm or No.14

CSC-003BAW1.18

CSC-008BAW1.18

1.18 mm or No.16

CSC-003BAW1.00

CSC-008BAW1.00

1.0 mm or No.18

CSC-003BAW.850

CSC-008BAW.850

850 microns or No.20

CSC-003BAW.710

CSC-008BAW.710

710 microns or No.25

CSC-003BAW.600

CSC-008BAW.600

600 microns or No.30

CSC-003BAW.500

CSC-008BAW.500

500 microns or No.35

CSC-003BAW.425

CSC-008BAW.425

425 microns or No.40

CSC-003BAW.355

CSC-008BAW.355

355 microns or No.45

CSC-003BAW.300

CSC-008BAW.300

300 microns or No.50

CSC-003BAW.250

CSC-008BAW.250

250 microns or No.60

CSC-003BAW.212

CSC-008BAW.212

212 microns or No.70

CSC-003BAW.180

CSC-008BAW.180

180 microns or No.80

CSC-003BAW.150

CSC-008BAW.150

150 microns or No.100

CSC-003BAW.125

CSC-008BAW.125

125 microns or No.120

CSC-003BAW.106

CSC-008BAW.106

106 microns or No.140

CSC-003BAW.090

CSC-008BAW.090

90 microns or No.170

CSC-003BAW.075

CSC-008BAW.075

75 microns or No.200

CSC-003BAW.063

CSC-008BAW.063

63 microns or No.230

Working Sieves do not require special inspection but need to conform to the basic standards of ASTM E-11. The Working Sieves are available in brass frames with brass or stainless steel mesh. We also supply stainless steel frames with stainless steel mesh. Working Sieves are available with 8" and 12" diameter frames. The frames are full height and one half height depths. These sieves are constructed using ASTM standard wire cloth (mesh) and are supplied with a Certificate of Conformance. The mesh has not been individually inspected. Each sieve has a serial number which is related to a lot number. Working Sieves are used in a diverse range of industries that include construction, mining, food, soil testing and pharmaceuticals. They can be checked against master stacks, master samples or calibration spheres (beads) to test for wear or mesh damage.

CSC-003BAW.053

CSC-008BAW.053

53 microns or No.270

Calibration samples also available.

www.ereinc.com

Many different options to choose from! Also available:

SIEVES & SIEVE SHAKERS

The Mesh Certified Test Sieves include a serial number that ties down the traceability to each sieve. One of the special benefits of the sieve construction is a fillet. The fillet covers the solder connection between the mesh to the frame. This keeps particles from being caught in the crevices and makes cleaning easier. Supplied with Certificate of Compliance. Inspection Certificate states the average aperture values. Full traceability is achieved with an individual serial number on each sieve. They meet ASTM - E11, BS, and ISO Standards.

Mid-Point Sieves A Mid-Point Sieve has had the mesh inspected. The sieve is then selected as a mid-point if the results give tolerances that are in the middle of the ASTM Standard. One of the special benefits of the sieve construction is a fillet. The fillet covers the solder connection between the the mesh to the frame. This keeps particles from being caught in the crevices and makes cleaning easier. Used for everyday testing of supercritical processes. When a process requires a high level of repeatability, Mid-Point Sieves can be used on all sieve tests. However, the predominant application for the Mid-Point Sieves is master stacks. A master stack is used to check and recalibrate sieves used in everyday testing.

Working Sieves

sales@ereinc.com

74


Meinzer II Sieve Shaker

SIEVES & SIEVE SHAKERS

The Meinzer II Sieve Shaker separates different size components in ground, granular or particulate mixtures by rapid machine sieving. The newly developed clamping system is very easy to use. The Meinzer II accepts up to 10 full-height 8" sieves or 21 half-height sieves, plus a lid and receiver. Applications The Meinzer II is ideal for use on aggregates, cements, chemicals, pharmaceuticals, cosmetics, grains, seeds, coal, soils, tobacco blends, or any dry material requiring size analysis. Features • Quiet Operation Acceptable noise level for the plant or lab • Compact Size Only 10" diameter footprint • Two Way Sieving Action Simultaneous vertical and horizontal motion

• Built-In Timer Adjustable 60 minute timer with automatic shutoff • Portable Light-weight, 36 lbs • Maintenance-Free No internal moving parts

CS-18480100 Meinzer II Sieve Shaker (110 V)

Is this Sieve Shaker the right one for you? ERE is just a phone call away

1-888-287-3732

EFL 2000/2 Sieve Shaker The EFL 2000/2 is a rugged no nonsense shaker ideal for on-site and heavy-duty applications. It is equipped with a dynamic power source to ensure the sieves and sample are provided the right vibration for fast, accurate, and reproducible tests, time after time. Vertical movement is fixed to ensure samples spend a maximum amount of time seeking apertures, instead of being suspended mid-air. Applications The EFL 2000/2 is perfect for use in the field or in the production area. Features • Rugged Designed specifically for large, cumbersome samples like concrete, rock, sand and asphalt

• Easy to Use 60 minute timer and unique clamping system allows user to set up sieve tests in seconds • Maintenance-Free Non-corrodible, non-metallic springs, and a durable motor offers maintenance free testing • Flexibility Low noise level makes shaker ideal for onsite, production, and laboratory testing • Capacity 8" Sieves - 12 full height or 24 half height 12" Sieves - 6 full height or 12 half height

CS-18490012 EFL 2000/2 Sieve Shaker

Powermatic Sieve Shaker The Powermatic Sieve Shaker is rugged nononsense shaker, ideal for heavy-duty applications. It is equipped with two maintenance free sealed motors to transmit the exact vibrations and movement to the sample for optimum performance. The low voltage removable control unit allows the unit to be controlled from a bench wall, or other convenient locations. Applications The Powermatic is perfect for use in the field or production area. Features • Quiet Virtually silent in operation, ideal for on-site, production, or lab testing

75

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

• Maintenance-Free Two sealed motors offset at strategic angles transmitting the exact vibration frequency and movement for optimum performance • Easy to Use 60-minute timer and uniquely designed clamping system allows user to change sieve stacks in seconds • Flexibility Detachable control unit for convenient use Now available: Screening sieves for continuous small scale screening operations • Capacity 18" Sieves - 5 full height sieves

CS-18490018 Powermatic Sieve Shaker

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Octagon 2000 Sieve Shaker

Applications The Octagon 2000 Sieve Shaker provides precise particle size analysis for laboratory or on-site use. Features • Whisper-Quiet Ideal noise level for use in the plant, lab, or even at your desk

• Maintenance-Free Powered by electromagnets, offering no moving parts to replace • Easy to Use Digital controller allows user to control time, amplitude and continuous or intermittent vibrations • Flexibility Uniquely designed clamping system allows user to change sieve stacks in seconds • Capacity 3" Sieves - 12 full height or 24 half height 8" Sieves - 8 full height or 18 half height • Accurate Exacting horizontal and vertical sieving motion created offers paicles maximum time seeking apertures

SIEVES & SIEVE SHAKERS

The Octagon 2000 Sieve Shaker provides precise particle size analysis, all within safe and acceptable sound limits. Digital controls – time, vibration, and amplitude – allow you to duplicate test results from your current shaker with ease, from 3" to 20 um. The unit is powered by an electromagnetic drive that has no rotating parts, eliminating maintenance and virtually all noise. The rapid vertical and side to side motion created prevents apertures from blinding and offers accurate, repeatable results test after test.

CS-18490000 Octagon 2000 Sieve Shaker

An Item Worth Having! Sieve Cleaning Brushes Sieve cleaning brushes are ideal to keep your sieves working optimally. They are simple to use and are shaped to make cleaning fast and spotless.

CS-1810000NB Nylon Sieve Brush CS-1810000BB Brass Sieve Brush CS-1810000B Nylon Sieve Brush Double Ended

Can't find what you`re looking for? Our friendly Customer Service can help. Toll free:

1-888-287-3732

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

76


Distinctive, Compact Magnetic Mini-Stirrers HA-180

Shakers & Stirrers SHAKERS & STIRRERS

The HA-180 series is compact, lightweight, low-cost and designed in a special round shape without any sharp corners. Lack of laboratory bench space is no longer a concern. These stirrers incorporate electronic controls that allow the user to regulate the speed with greater precision. In addition to speed control, a Speedsafe mechanism will assure that the maximum speed will never be exceeded. Often, in the lab, a sample is removed from the stirrer before reducing the speed. This would cause the motor to accelerate until it is destroyed. Available in nine colors, light yellow, light sea-green, light blue, yellow, green, dark blue, red, grey and ivory, several HA-180 stirrers can be placed on a laboratory bench with their colors helping to identify the different samples.

HA-180A-1 Light Yellow Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC HA-180B-1 Light Sea-Green Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC HA-180C-1 Light Blue Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC HA-180D-1 Yellow Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC HA-180E-1 Green Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC HA-180F-1 Blue Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC Specifications

HA-180

Maximum Stirring Capacity Speed Range Min. Speed Range Max. Power Supply Cover Material Environment Dimensions Weight

1 Liter 100 rpm 1000 rpm 110/115 V AC or 230/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz ABS plastic 0 to 50째C (32 to 122째F) RH max 95% 137 mm (Dia.) x 51 mm (H) 640 g (1.4 lbs)

HA-180G-1 Red Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC HA-180H-1 Grey Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC HA-180I-1 Ivory Mini-Stirrer, 110/115 V AC HA-731319 Micro Stir Bar (10 Pieces) Add -2 instead of -1 to the part number for a 230/240 V AC. All models are supplied complete with micro stir bar and instructions.

Magnetic Mini-Stirrers HA-190M-1 and HA-190M-0 come supplied with an ABS cover that will resist the harmful effects of chemicals that are accidentally spilled. HA-200M is supplied with an AISI 316 stainless steel cover. This model is ideal for applications that create exothermic reactions.

Specifications

HA-190M-1

Max. Stirring Capacity Speed Range Min. Speed Range Max. Power Supply Installation Category Cover Material Environment Dimensions Weight

1 Liter (0.26 Gal) 100 rpm 1000 rpm 110/115 V AC 12 V DC 110/115 V AC II ABS plastic ABS plastic AISI 316 Stainless Steel 0 to 50째C (32 to 122째F); RH max 95% 120 x 120 x 45 mm (4.8" x 4.8" x 1.8") 640 g (1.4 lbs) 610 g (1.3 lbs) 710 g (1.6 lbs)

HA-190M-0

HA-200

HA-190M-1, HA-190M-0 & HA-200M Are Supplied Complete W/ Micro Stir Bar & Instructions HA-190M-1 Mini-Stirrer W/ ABS Cover, 110/115 V AC (Add -2 Instead Of -1 For The 230/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Version) HA-190M-0 Mini-Stirrer W/ ABS Cover, 12 V DC HA-200M-1 Stainless Steel Cover, 100/115 V AC (Add -2 Instead Of -1 For The 230/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Version)

77

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Auto-Reverse Magnetic Stirrers with Tachometer

Specifications

HA-304N

Max. Stirring Capacity Speed Range Tachometer Reverse Interval Installation Category Cover Material Environment Dimensions / Weight

2.5 Liters Low 100 rpm / High 800 to 1000 rpm 4-digit LCD from 30 seconds to 3 minutes II AISI 316 Stainless Steel 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); RH max 95% 180 x 180 x 70 mm (7.1″ x 7.1″ x 2.8″), 1.4 kg (3.1 lbs)

SHAKERS & STIRRERS

When stirring a solution, to work with a constant speed (Revolutions Per Minute) is an important factor in ensuring that the best repeatability in tests and processes is achieved. Without a tachometer, there is no way of knowing the RPM’s. HA-304N is a heavy-duty stirrer with a built-in tachometer. It is often desirable to stir in two directions in order to achieve maximum homogeneity. An advanced circuit allows HA-304N to reverse the direction of the stir at a user selected interval. The interval can be adjusted from 30 seconds up to 3 minutes. In addition to precision speed control, a limiter will also assure that the maximum speed will never be exceeded (Speedsafe).

HA-304N-1 (100/115 V AC) HA-304N-2 (220/240 V AC) Magnetic Stirrer, Stainless Steel Cover, Micro Stir Bar & Instructions

Air-Operated Turbine Magnetic Stirrer Low pressure air supply drives the magnetic stirrer. Eliminates sparking hazard from electrical sources. Ideal for use where potentially explosive solvent vapors are present. This compact, small-footprint stirrer only uses 3 to 8 psi (21-55kPa) air pressure and is ideal for stirring vessels up to 1 liter. Tubing is supplied to connect to an air supply. All parts are made from high impact polystyrene to ensure long life and easy clean up in case of spills. Dimensions: 102 mm (4") diameter x 19 mm (3/4") high.

BEL-F37002-0000 Air-Operated Turbine Magnetic Stirrer

InfoZone Why use a Magnetic Stirrer versus a Motorized Stirrer? 1. They are quieter 2. More efficient 3. No moving external parts that can break 4. A stirring bar is easy to clean 5. No lubricants are required

Pick up your Magnetic Stirrer & Bars TODAY!

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

78


Octagon Spinbar® Magnetic Stirring Bars

BEL-F37110-1218E* Magnetic Stirring Bar, 12.7 x 3.2 mm (1/2" x 1/8")

BEL-F37110-1128E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 38.1 x 9.5 mm (1 1/2" x 3/8")

BEL-F37110-1238E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 12.7 x 9.5 mm (1/2" x 3/8")

BEL-F37110-1122E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 38.1 x 12.7 mm (1 1/2" x 1/2")

BEL-F37110-5838E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 15.9 x 9.5 mm (5/8" x 3/8")

BEL-F37110-0158E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 41.3 x 8 mm (1 5/8" x 5/16")

BEL-F37110-0078E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 22.2 x 8 mm (7/8" x 5/16")

BEL-F37110-0178E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 47.6 x 9.5 mm (1 7/8" x 3/8")

BEL-F37110-7838E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 22.2 x 9.5 mm (7/8" x 3/8")

BEL-F37110-0002E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 50.8 x 8 mm (2" x 5/16")

BEL-F37110-0001E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 25.4 x 8 mm (1" x 5/16")

BEL-F37110-0238E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 50.8 x 9.5 mm (2" x 3/8")

BEL-F37110-0138E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 25.4 x 9.5 mm (1" x 3/8")

BEL-F37110-0212E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 63.5 x 8 mm (2 1/2" x 5/16")

BEL-F37110-0118E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 28.6 x 8 mm (1 1/8" x 5/16")

BEL-F37110-2128E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 63.5 x 9.5 mm (2 1/2" x 3/8")

BEL-F37110-0112E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 38.1 x 8 mm (1 1/2" x 5/16")

BEL-F37110-0003E Magnetic Stirring Bar, 76.2 x 12.7 mm (3" x 1/2") *No pivot ring on this size.

Polygon Spinbar® Magnetic Stirring Bars Teflon® PTFE Sold Individually.

BEL-F37120-0012E Polygon Spinbar® Magnetic Stirring Bars, 12.7 x 8 mm (1/2" x 5/16") BEL-F37120-0112E Polygon Spinbar® Magnetic Stirring Bars, 38.1 x 9.5 mm (1 1/2" x 3/8") BEL-F37120-0030E Polygon Spinbar® Magnetic Stirring Bars, 30 x 8 mm (1 3/16" x 5/16") BEL-F37120-0050E Polygon Spinbar® Magnetic Stirring Bars, 50 x 8 mm (2" x 5/16")

Octagon Shaped Spinbar® Magnetic Stirring Bars Color-Coded Teflon® PTFE

BEL-F37109-0034E* Magnetic Stirring Bar, Red, 12.7 x 3.2 mm (1/2" x 1/8") BEL-F37109-0035E* Magnetic Stirring Bar, Yellow, 12.7 x 3.2 mm (1/2" x 1/8") BEL-F37109-0036E* Magnetic Stirring Bar, Blue, 12.7 x 3.2 mm (1/2" x 1/8") BEL-F37109-0001E Magnetic Stirring Bar, Red, 12.7 x 8 mm (1/2" x 5/16") BEL-F37109-0002E Magnetic Stirring Bar, Yellow, 12.7 x 8 mm (1/2" x 5/16") BEL-F37109-0003E Magnetic Stirring Bar, Blue, 12.7 x 8 mm (1/2" x 5/16") BEL-F37109-0004E Magnetic Stirring Bar, Red, 15.9 x 8 mm (5/8" x 5/16") BEL-F37109-0005E Magnetic Stirring Bar, Yellow, 15.9 x 8 mm (5/8" x 5/16")

All PTFE coded Spinbar® Magnetic Stirring Bars are available in red, yellow or blue. Sold Individually.

79

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

BEL-F37109-0006E Magnetic Stirring Bar, Blue, 15.9 x 8 mm (5/8" x 5/16") *No pivot ring on this size.

Fax : (514) 326 8961

SHAKERS & STIRRERS

SHAKERS & STIRRERS

Teflon® PTFE with Molded-On Pivot Ring. Sold Individually.


Orbit™ LS Low Speed Shaker

Specifications

Orbit™ LS Low Speed Shaker

Speed Range

3 - 60 rpm

Timer

20 - 120 min (10 min inc.) or continuous

Motion

Circular, 19 mm

Maximum Load

11 lbs (5 kg)

Ambient Operating Range

+4° to 70°C

Dimensions (W x D x H)

10" x 12.6" x 6.3" (25.5 x 32 x 16 cm)

Weight

14.5 lbs (6.6 kg)

Electrical

120 V~, 60 Hz or 230 V~, 50 Hz

SHAKERS & STIRRERS

The Orbit™ LS Low Speed Shaker is a high quality, general purpose shaker with economical analog control. Styled after the other models in the line, the Orbit™ LS features a streamlined, compact design with easy-access control panel. Electronic controls are utilized for setting speed and time. The knobs used for selecting parameters turn easily and are clearly marked with corresponding values. A large orbit and low speed make the Orbit™ LS useful for staining and destaining gels, washing blots and general mixing. The shaker is supplied with a 30 x 30 cm stainles steel flat platform and non-slip rubber mat to keep plates, dishes and other sample containers in place.

LAB-S2030-LS Orbit™ LS Low Speed Orbital Shaker W/ Flat Platform LAB-S2031-12D Stacked Double Flat Platform W/ Rubber Mat

Orbit™ 300 Multipurpose Vortexer Three interchangeable platforms (available separately) accommodate a variety of sample containers to make the Orbit™ 300 a truly multipurpose shaker. The flat platform, covered with a nonslip rubber mat, holds plates, dishes, boxes, etc. The microplate platform will accommodate up to four microplates. The remaining platform has spring loaded retaining bars that adjust to hold flasks, bottles, racks and other containers in place. Time and speed are set and displayed digitally. Values are shown on the large, three digit LED. The broad speed range allows the Orbit™ 300 to be used for gentle mixing as well as vigorous agitation. The shaker housing is constructed of heavy gauge, coated steel to reduce motor noise and lend stability to the unit. This compact shaker can be used in temperature controlled environments making it ideal for cold room or incubator use. Features • Three versatile platform options • Shaking, mixing, agitating or vortexing • Heavy-duty construction • Safe for cold room or incubator use

LAB-S2030-300 Orbit™ 300 Digital Multipurpose Shaker, Base Only LAB-S2030-10 Platform For Four Microplates LAB-S2030-12 Flat Platform (30 x 30 cm) W/ Nonslip Rubber Mat LAB-S2030-13 Spring Loaded Platform For Flasks, Bottles, Etc.

Specifications

Orbit™ 300 Multipurpose Vortexer

Speed Range

100 - 1200 rpm

Timer

0 to 99 minutes or continuous

Motion/Orbit Size

Horizontally circular, 3 mm

Maximum Load

12.3 lbs (5.6 kg)

Ambient Operating Range

+ 4° to 65°C

Dimensions (W x D x H)

10.1" x 12.5" x 5" (25.6 x 31.7 x 12.7 cm)

Weight

16 lbs (7.3 kg)

Electrical*

120 V~, 60 Hz

*Other voltages available upon request.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

80


Surface Tension SURFACE TENSION

Bostwick Consistometer

The Bostwick Consistometer is the preferred choice for measuring consistency, flow rate and viscosity in a variety of products. You can use the Bostwick on any viscous material like sauces, salad dressings, paints, chemicals or cosmetics where you want to measure the distance a material flows in a given time interval. The Bostwick complies to Mill Spec R81294D and ASTM F1080-93 and is made of stainless steel construction. Features • Durable Stainless Steel Construction, resists corrosion, suitable for laboratory and plant use • Convenient Size Uses little bench space, requires only 75 mL of sample 14"L x 3 1/2"W x 5 1/2"H • Spring Loading Gate Instantaneous gate release, prevents premature flowing of sample

• Reproductivity 2 leveling screws and spirit levels, precise positioning of flow angle • Precision Engraved graduations of 0.5 cm divisions, assures accurate results, wear & smear resistant Uses • Food Processing Tomato sauces + others, preserves, fillings, soups, baby foods, salad dressings & suggested by USDA • Manufacturing Epoxy removers, polyurethane paint, adhesives, coatings & mil spec R-81294B • Cosmetics Formulations Lotions, shampoos & flow base creams • Chemical Production Selected solvents, viscous liquids, slurries & emulsions

CS-24925000 Bostwick Consistometer

Features • Rapid Measurement Ring method allows readings to be made in 15 - 30 seconds (Ideal for colloidal suspensions which exhibit rapid changes in surface tension) • Direct Reading Circular scale is graduated in dynes/cm eliminating the need for mathematical calculations • Reproducible Results Improved technique allows accurate readings to be reproduced within ±0.05 dyne/cm • Portability Compact unit comes with carrying case for easy transport • Stability Unit is mounted on a cast tripod support with convenient leveling screws

Precision & Interfacial DuNouy Tensiometer

Measure surface tension and interfacial tension quickly and accurately in oils, detergents, serums, colloidal suspensions, chromium solutions, etc. to better control your process and your product quality. The DuNouy Tensiometer is easy-to-use, accurate, portable and gives surface tension results reproducible to within ±0.05 dyne/cm.

CS-70535000 Precision DuNouy Tensiometer CS-70545000 Interfacial DuNouy Tensiometer

The DuNouy Tensiometer is available in two models • Precision DuNouy Tensiometer (upward direction) This model tensiometer provides precise readings of upward interfacial and surface tensions by the ring method to values reproducible within ±0.05 dyne/cm. This instrument is specified for determining interfacial tension of oil against water by the ring method in ASTM Method D971 and solutions of surface-active agents in ASTM Method D1331. It is also specified for testing synthetic rubber lattices in ASTM D1417 and determining the surface tension of industrial water and industrial wastewater in ASTM Method D1590.

zero and a double vernier is provided. The two scales and corresponding verniers have graduations and figures of different colors to indicate whether the measured force is upward or downward. • Both instruments can be quickly adjusted and calibrated. They are supplied completely assembled and are furnished with three extra torsion wires, a 6 cm platinum-iridium ring and carrying case.

Quality surface tension testing and the DuNouy Tensiometer has become an indispensable asset to a variety of industries including paints, coatings and inks; chrome, nickel, and brass plating; soap; surfactants; emulsions; • Interfacial DuNouy Tensiometer (dual direction) Where the Precision Tesiometer measures only the upward pull on the crude and transformer oils and many more. The CSC DuNouy ring, the Interfacial Tensiometer is designed to measure both upward and Tensiometer is also being used in many universities and technical centers downward forces on the ring. Graduated dial reads in both directions from as an important instrument for scientific studies.

81

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Ultrasonics The Sonifier product line, originally established as the benchmark in cell disruption, has become a liquid processing workhorse in the laboratory.

ULTRASONIC SONIFIERS & BATHS

Each Sonifier system consists of a power supply, converter, and mechanically tuned processing horn. Standard units are available from 100 to 1000 Watts for matching the equipment to your application.

Applications include: • Emulsification of immiscible liquids • Disaggregation and dispersion • Homogenization • Chip assay • Acceleration of reactions • Cell lysing • Processing DNA and proteins • Leaching and extraction

Branson SONIFIER® SLP Series The Branson Sonifier SLP Series – available in both time and energy (joules) models – are capable of processing today’s laboratory requirements. Software prevents inappropriate data entry and sounds an alarm if the process moves outside set limits. The SLP Series units include the generator / power supply, converter, 1/8" microtip, all interconnects, and an I/O port for external control. They operate at 40 kHz, 50/60 Hz. • Autotune plus Memory (AT/M) – provides fully-automatic tuning and stores frequency at the end of each cycle • Digital parameter entry for precise, easy setup • Digital amplitude control allows for critical applications (range from 10% to 100% in 1% increments) • Continuous or pulsed operation • LED readout displays parameter settings during setup and operation for easy reference and monitoring

• Provides storage of last-used cycle parameters even if the system is shut off or a power interruption occurs • Local or remote (p/c) control capability • Total processing time: 1 second to 99 hours (SLPt unit) • Adjustable total energy: 1 to 10,000 joules (SLPe unit)

Model

Output Dimensions

Weight

Part Number Input Power

Included Horn

SLPt Time

150 Watts 7 3/4" x 13 1/4" x 9" 196.85 x 338.58 x 228.6 mm

17 lbs 7.71 kg

101-063-723

117 Volt, 1ø, 50/60 Hz, 2 amps

1/8" Microtip

SLPt Time

150 Watts 7 3/4" x 13 1/4" x 9" 196.85 x 338.58 x 228.6 mm

17 lbs 7.71 kg

101-063-724

240 Volt, 1ø, 50/60 Hz, 1 amps

1/8" Microtip

SLPe Energy 150 Watts 7 3/4" x 13 1/4" x 9" 196.85 x 338.58 x 228.6 mm

17 lbs 7.71 kg

101-063-726

117 Volt, 1ø, 50/60 Hz, 2 amps

1/8" Microtip

SLPe Energy 150 Watts 7 3/4" x 13 1/4" x 9" 196.85 x 338.58 x 228.6 mm

17 lbs 7.71 kg

101-063-727

240 Volt, 1ø, 50/60 Hz, 1 amps

1/8" Microtip

SLP Microtips

Rosette Cell

Acoustic Sound Enclosure

Microtips for the SLP Sonifier are available in four sizes to handle volumes up to 100 mL. The microtips are also designed to process samples to the smallest diameter vessels.

Branson’s Rosette Cell provides a unique flow pattern of substances for exposure to ultrasonic energy during circulation through the cell. When it is immersed in a cooling bath, the enlarged glass surface area and circulation through the side arms provide an efficient means of heat exchange. Three sizes are available.

The Branson Acoustic Sound Enclosure creates a sound barrier that reduces the ambient noise level a minimum of 24 dBs from the working environment. Its small footprint allows for placement in virtually all laboratory or medical locations.

1/8" microtip is already provided with the SLP Sonifiers.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

82


ULTRASONIC SONIFIERS & BATHS

Branson SONIFIER® Analog Cell Disruptor Branson Sonifier digital products take advantage of benefits enabled by newer digital technology. This is particularly useful where precise process control and parameter measurement is required. These 20 kHz units include automatic amplitude control, broadband tuning, and include enhanced features like: • Autotune plus Memory (AT/M) – provides fully-automatic tuning and stores frequency at the end of each cycle • Multiple mode operation – continuous, pulsed, timed, and temperature end-point • Setup menu in five languages • Digital parameter setting with valid parameter range checking • Digital timer (9 hours, 59 minutes, 59 seconds) • Amplitude is adjustable from 10 - 100% • User I/O offers remote start / stop control and the ability to view temperature, amplitude, and power values during experiments

• Automatic end-of-cycle shutoff using limit parameters • Self diagnostics on start-up • Twenty user-programmed presets for convenience All units have digital controls including a membrane switch for easy data entry, 10-hour timer, digital wattmeter, 80 character LCD display to monitor parameters, and much more. The parallel printer interface and RS-232C serial computer interface add even more utility. All units are supplied as an operational package including power supply, converter, and standard horn.

Model

Output

Dimensions

Weight

Part Number

Input Power

Included Horn

S-250D

200 Watts

7 3/8" x 17 5/8" x 9 5/8" 187.32 x 447.68 x 244.48 mm

20 lbs 9.07 kg

101-063-588 101-063-589

115 Volt, 60 Hz, 1ø 230 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 1ø

1/2" Tapped

S-450D

400 Watts

7 3/8" x 17 5/8" x 9 5/8" 187.32 x 447.68 x 244.48 mm

22 lbs 9.98 kg

101-063-593 101-063-591

115 Volt, 60 Hz, 1ø 230 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 1ø

1/2" Tapped

S-450D

400 Watts

7 3/8" x 17 5/8" x 9 5/8" 187.32 x 447.68 x 244.48 mm

22 lbs 9.98 kg

101-063-590 101-063-592

115 Volt, 60 Hz, 1ø 230 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 1ø

3/4" Solid

Branson SONIFIER® Digital Cell Disruptor Branson Sonifier analog products use traditional analog technology to produce the same reliable results you have received from Branson for over 60 years. Automatic amplitude compensation provides constant horn amplitude at different energy levels encountered during sample processing. The broadband tuning feature precisely adjusts the 20 kHz output frequency to optimum levels even when process tooling is changed. The analog control package includes:

All of these features are housed in a rugged, compact package with slanted front control panel for clear visibility and easy access. All units are supplied as an operational package including power supply, converter, and standard disruptor horn.

• Autotune plus Memory (AT/M) - provides fullyautomatic tuning and stores frequency at the end of each cycle • Adjustable output power to meet the needs of each application • Energy pulsing to minimize heating of sensitive samples • Mechanical timer to limit process time while freeing the operator • An output meter to monitor process power and provide for repeatability Model

Output

Dimensions

Weight

Part Number Input Power

Included Horn

S-250A

200 Watts

7 3/8" x 17 5/8" x 9 5/8" 187.32 x 447.68 x 244.48 mm

19 lbs 9.07 kg

101-063-196 101-063-197

115 Volt, 60 Hz, 1ø 230 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 1ø

1/2" Tapped

S-450A

400 Watts

7 3/8" x 17 5/8" x 9 5/8" 187.32 x 447.68 x 244.48 mm

25 lbs 11.34 kg

101-063-198 101-063-199

115 Volt, 60 Hz, 1ø 230 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 1ø

1/2" Tapped

S-450A

400 Watts

7 3/8" x 17 5/8" x 9 5/8" 187.32 x 447.68 x 244.48 mm

25 lbs 11.34 kg

101-063-200 101-063-201

115 Volt, 60 Hz, 1ø 230 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 1ø

3/4" Solid

Accessories for use with 250 and 450 units

High Intensity Cup Horn

83

Cup Horn

Sealed Atmosphere Chanmber

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Continuous Flow Chamber

Flow-Through Horn

Microtip with Coupler (Double-Step), 1/8" Microtip

Fax : (514) 326 8961

Tapered Microtip

Standard Disruptor Horn


Ultrasonic Cleaners

Branson Ultrasonic Cleaners

Model 1510

Model 2510

Model 3510

Model 5510

Model 8510

Tank Size

6"L x 5.5"W x 4"D

9.5"L x 5.5"W x 4"D

11.5"L x 6"W x 6"D

11.5"L x 9.5"W x 6"D

19.5"L x 11.5"W x 6”D

Overall Size

10"L x 12"W x 11.5"D

10"L x 12"W x 11.5"D

16"L x 12"W x 14.5"D

16"L x 15.5"W x 14.5"D

24"L x 18"W x 14.5"D

Tank Capacity

0.5 gal. (1.9 L)

0.75 gal. (2.8 L)

1.5 gal. (5.7 L)

2.5 gal. (9.5 L)

5.5 gal. (20.8 L)

Weight

7 lbs

9 lbs

12 lbs

14 lbs

26 lbs

Frequency

40 kHz

40 kHz

40 kHz

40 kHz

40 kHz

Drain

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

120V Models

B1510-DTH CPN-952-118

B2510-DTH CPN-952-218

B3510-DTH CPN-952-318

B5510-DTH CPN-952-518

B8510-DTH CPN-952-818

230/240V Models B1510E-DTH CPN-952-138

B2510E-DTH CPN-952-238

B3510E-DTH CPN-952-338

B5510E-DTH CPN-952-538

B8510E-DTH CPN-952-538

B1510-MTH CPN-952-117

B2510-MTH CPN-952-217

B3510-MTH CPN-952-317

B5510-MTH CPN-952-517

B8510-MTH CPN-952-817

230/240V Models B1510E-MTH CPN-952-137

B2510E-MTH CPN-952-237

B3510E-MTH CPN-952-337

B5510E-MTH CPN-952-537

B8510E-MTH CPN-952-837

B1510-MT CPN-952-116

B2510-MT CPN-952-216

B3510-MT CPN-952-316

B5510-MT CPN-952-516

B8510-MT CPN-952-816

230/240V Models B1510E-MT CPN-952-136

B2510E-MT CPN-952-236

B3510E-MT CPN-952-336

B5510E-MT CPN-952-536

B8510E-MT CPN-952-836

120V Models

120V Models

Typical applications for ultrasonic cleaners • Scientific labs • Frames • Medical and dental labs • Industry • Electronics • Jewelry Features • Digital Control Plus Heat and Timer (DTH) • Mechanical Timer Plus Heat (MTH) • Mechanical Timer (MT)

ULTRASONIC SONIFIERS & BATHS

Ultrasonic cleaning is faster, more consistent, and safer than any other method. Hand scrubbing, soaking, or steams don’t even come close. It's powerful enough to remove heavy oils, buffing compounds, or proteins, consistent enough to manage difficult laboratory cleaning every time, and safe enough for those delicate electronic components or fine jewelry. Ultrasonic sound waves moving through a cleaning solution create an effect called cavitation, the rapid formation and collapse of microscopic bubbles. This powerful collapse, along with the cleaning chemistry, scrubs every wetted surface. The deep cleaning action of ultrasonics removes the most stubborn contaminants, even from blind holes and internal surfaces; the addition of heat enhances this process.

Digital models feature microprocessor controlled timer and thermostat with fingertip input and clear LED readout of parameters.

Industrial type ultrasonic transducers assure maximum power in the cleaning tank.

Rugged 60 minute mechanical timer features a hold position for continuous operation.

Models 1510, 2510, 3510, 5510, and 8510 are supplied with a cover.* Standard 2-year Warranty. ISO 9001:2000 Certified

Cover (supplied with unit)

Perforated Tray

Mesh Basket

Solid Insert Tray

Beaker Positioning Cover

Support Racks

Beakers (for all models)

Model 1510

A12-1 100-032-320

A12-3 100-410-160

100-916-333

A12-2 100-410-170

A12-4 (1 x 600 mL) CPN-246-010

CPN-916-039

A250 250 mL Glass 000-140-001

Model 2510

A22-1 100-032-321

A22-3 100-410-162

100-916-334

A22-2 100-410-172

A22-5 (2 x 600 mL) CPN-246-011 A22-6 (2 x 250 mL) CPN-246-015

CPN-916-040

A400 400 mL Polypropylene 000-265-061

Model 3510

A32-1 100-032-322

A32-3 100-410-164

100-916-335

A32-2 100-410-174

A32-4 (3 x 250 mL) CPN-246-016 A32-5 (2 x 600 mL) CPN-246-012

CPN-916-041

Model 5510

A52-1 100-032-323

A52-3 100-410-166

A52-2 100-410-176

A52-4 (4 x 600 mL) CPN-246-013

CPN-916-042

Model 8510

A82-1 000-917-050 (Stainless Steel)

A82-3 100-410-168

A82-2 100-410-178

A82-4 (6 x 600 mL) CPN-246-014 (Stainless Steel)

CPN-916-043

www.ereinc.com

A600-1 600 mL Glass 000-140-004 A600-2 600 mL Stainless Steel 000-410-055

sales@ereinc.com

84


ULTRASONIC SONIFIERS & BATHS

Branson B-300 Branson’s Model B-300 cleaner will provide a quick, consistent, high quality cleaning over a wide variety of applications; specifically designed to clean parts or instruments in just minutes. Unit comes with a 15-minute timer, cover, and parts basket. One year warranty. Specifications Tank Size: 11.8"L x 3.9"W x 2.9"D Overall Size : 13.2"L x 5.3"W x 5.9"D Tank Capacity: 0.5 gal. (1.9 liter) Weight: 4.6 lbs Frequency: 40 kHz

Branson B-3 Pint Size

Branson B-200 Jewelry and Optical Cleaner

Branson’s Model B-3 pint size ultrasonic cleaner is especially useful for cleaning small items, quickly and efficiently. Useful in lab, medical, hobby, jewelry and small industrial applications. One year warranty. Unit comes with a cover and parts basket. Specifications Tank Size: 3.5"D x 3" dia. Overall Size: 5.25"L x 5.25"W x 6.25"D Tank Capacity: 1 pint (0.47 liter) Weight: 3 lbs Frequency: 55 kHz

Branson’s Model 200 cleaner is compact and stylish, with the convenience of plug-inanywhere operation. This model has the ultrasonic cleaning ability to handle a wide variety of applications; it is specifically designed to clean jewelry and optical pieces quickly and effectively. A 5-minute timer, cover and parts basket are included. One year warranty. Specifications Tank Size: 6.5"L x 3.5"W x 2.25"D Overall Size: 8.75"L x 4.5"W x 5"D Tank Capacity: 15 oz. (0.4 liter) Weight: 3 lbs Frequency: 40 kHz

Branson Integrated Systems Models 1216 and 1620

Branson Higher Capacity DHA-1000 This low-cost 40 kHz ultrasonic cleaner is designed especially for medium and heavy duty industrial applications. It is fully integrated, with ultrasonic generator and cleaning tank in a single enclosure. Solution capacity is 10 gallons – enough to handle large, bulky parts or for batch cleaning of small components. It’s the only industrial size ultrasonic cleaner of its type available today. One year warranty. Specifications Tank Size: 14"L x 16"W x 10.5"D Overall Size: 17"L x 19"W x 19"D Tank Capacity: 10 gal. (37.8 liters) Weight: 70 lbs Frequency: 40 kHz

85

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Branson’s IC Series ultrasonic cleaning systems offer a full range of features to meet most precision cleaning requirements. These compact units incorporate 3/16, 14 gauge, all stainless steel construction, digital controls with cycle time up to 99 minutes and batch temperatures up to 69º celsius, a modern solidstate ultrasonic generator, and 25 or 40 kHz industrial transducers to deliver precise cleaning quickly, consistently, and cost effectively. The IC Series units, with their greater power per unit volume, can reduce cleaning cycle time or handle more difficult industrial applications including more denselypacked, smaller parts; heavier or more tenacious soils; investment removal from cast parts, and larger machined components. Includes cover and basket. Two year warranty.

Branson PC-620 Ultrasonic Cleaner

Specifications

IC 1216

IC 1620

Tank Size (L x W x D)

12" x 16" x 13"

16" x 20" x 16"

Overall Size (L x W x D)

20.75" x 19" x 16.75"

24.75" x 23" x 20.75"

Tank Capacity

10 gal. (37.8 liters)

21 gal. (79.5 liters)

Weight

80 lbs

120 lbs

The PC-620 at 40 kHz is ideal for cleaning pipettes, lab glassware, and other items requiring general cleaning. One year warranty. Specifications Tank Size: 19.5"L x 5.75"W x 6"D Overall Size: 20.25"L x 6.25"W x 10.5"D Tank Capacity: 2.75 gal. (10.4 liters) Weight: 23 lbs Frequency: 40 kHz

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Water Analysis

Dissolved Oxygen & BOD Meter with Graphic, Color LCD Display

BOD gives an indication of the biodegradable organic material present in a sample of water. The dissolved oxygen concentration is measured before and after an incubation period of 5 days and the BOD is calculated in mg per liter from the difference.

Specifications

HA-4421

Range

Features • Extended range up to 90 ppm and 600% saturation • True barometric atmospheric pressure compensation • Automatic or user calibration • Auto-hold to freeze LCD readings • AutoEnd mode for DO • Flexible logging with 3 modes • BOD (biochemical oxygen demand), OUR (oxygen uptake rate) and SOUR (specific oxygen uptake rate) • GLP • Two selectable alarm limits • Up to 100 logging lots, 200 OUR and SOUR reports and up to 200 BOD method entries

Dissolved Oxygen Barometric Pressure Salinity Compensation Temperature

0.00 to 90.00 ppm; 0.0 to 600.0% saturation 450 to 850 mmHg; 560 to 1133 mBar 0 to 45 ppt (g/L) -20.0 to 120.0°C; -4.0 to 248°F; 253.1 to 393.1K

Resolution

Dissolved Oxygen Barometric Pressure Temperature

0.01 ppm; 0.1% saturation 1 mm Hg 0.1°C/°F/K

Accuracy

Dissolved Oxygen Barometric Pressure Temperature Measurement Modes

WATER ANALYSIS

OUR and SOUR are used to determine the oxygen consumption or respiration rate. OUR is measured in mg of oxygen consumed per liter per hour, and SOUR is measured in mg of oxygen consumed per gram of volatile suspended solids per hour.

±1.5% of reading ±1 digit ±3 mm Hg + 1 least significant digit ±0.2°C/K/°F Direct DO; BOD (biochemical oxygen demand); OUR (oxygen uptake rate); SOUR (specific oxygen uptake rate)

Calibration

Dissolved Oxygen Barometric Pressure Temperature Compensation Probe (Included)

Automatic/user standard, 1 or 2 points Single point 0.0 to 50.0°C; 32.0 to 122.0°F; 237.1 to 323.1 K Polarographic with built-in temperature sensor

Logging HA-4421-01 Supplied W/ HA-76408 DO Probe, HA-7041S Electrolyte Solution (30 mL), HA-76407A/P Membrane Caps (2), HA-76404N Electrode Holder, Power Adapter & Instruction Manual (115 V)

HA-76407A/P Replacement Membrane (5 Pieces)

HA-76408 DO Probe For Laboratory Use, W/ 1 m (3.3') Cable

HA-920010 Serial Cable For PC Connection

HA-7040L Zero Oxygen Solution, 500 mL

HA-73114 USB Cable For PC Connection

Record Samples Logging Interval GLP Alarm PC Connection Display

HA-92000CD4 Windows® Compatible Software

Power Supply Dimensions / Weight

HA-7041S Electrolyte Solution, 30 mL

Up to 100 lots; 10000 samples/lot for automatic logging; 5000 samples/lot for manual logging from 1 second and up Last calibration data, calibration info (DO, BOD, OUR, SOUR) Inside and outside limits Opto-isolated USB and RS232 240 x 320 dot-matrix color LCD with on-screen help, graphing, language selection and custom configuration 12 V DC adapter (included) 159 x 230 x 93 mm (6.3" x 9.1" x 3.7"), 800 g (1.8 lbs)

Precision Turbidity & Free/Total Chlorine Meters HA-83414 • HA-88703 Specifications

HA-83414

HA-88703

Turbidity

0.00 to 9.99; 10.0 to 40.0 NTU / 0.0 to 99.9; 100 to 268 Nephelos / 0.00 to 9.80 EBC 0.01; 0.1 NTU / 0.1; 1 Nephelos / 0.01 EBC 0.00 to 9.99; 10.0 to 99.9; 100 to 4000 NTU / 0.0 to 99.9; 100 to 26800 Nephelos / 0.00 to 9.99; 10.0 to 99.9; 100 to 980 EBC 0.01; 0.1; 1 NTU / 0.1; 1 Nephelos / 0.01; 0.1, 1 EBC Automatic ±2% of reading plus 0.02 NTU (0.15 Nephelos; 0.01 EBC) ±5% of reading above 1000 NTU (6700 Nephelos; 245 EBC) ±1% of reading or 0.02 NTU (0.15 Nephelos; 0.01 EBC) whichever is greater < 0.02 NTU (0.15 Nephelos; 0.01 EBC) Silicon Photocell Nephelometric method (90°) or Ratio Nephelometric Method 108.1 and Standard Method 2130 B. Method (90° & 180°), Adaptation of the USEPA Normal, Average, Continuous <0.1, 15, 100, 750 and 2000 NTU Two, three, four or five-point calibration

Range - Non Ratio Mode Resolution - Non Ratio Mode Range - Ratio Mode Resolution - Ratio Mode Range Selection Accuracy

Features • HA-83414 features 4 measuring ranges: Ratio Turbidity; Non-Ratio Turbidity; Free Chlorine; Total Chlorine • HA-88703 features 2 measuring ranges: Ratio Turbidity; Non-Ratio Turbidity • Meets USEPA requirements • Exclusive chlorine CAL CHECK™ calibration validation for HA-83414 • Good laboratory practice capabilities • 2, 3, 4 or 5 point turbidity calibration • USB PC connectivity • Backlit LCD • On-screen tutorial modes • Log and recall up to 200 measurements • Contextual help menus • Auto shut-off

www.ereinc.com

Repeatability Stray Light Light Detector Method Measuring Mode Turbidity Standards Calibration Free & Total Chlorine

Range Resolution Accuracy Detector Method Standards Calibration

Free: Cl2: 0.00 to 5.00 mg/L / Total: Cl2: 0.00 to 5.00 mg/L 0.01 mg/L from 0.00 to 3.50 mg/L; 0.10 above 3.50 mg/L ±0.02 mg/L @ 1.00 mg/L Silicon photocell with 525 nm narrow band interference filters Adaptation of the USEPA Method 330.5 and Standard Method 4500-Cl G. 1 mg/L free chlorine, 1 mg/L total chlorine One-point calibration

HA-88703-01 supplied with (5) sample cuvets and caps, calibration cuvets, silicone oil (HA-93703-58), tissue for wiping cuvets, power cord and instruction manual.

HA-83414-01 supplied with (5) sample cuvets and caps, calibration cuvets for turbidimeter and colorimeter (HA-83414-11), silicone oil (HA-93703-58), tissue for wiping cuvets, scissors, power cord and instruction manual

sales@ereinc.com

86


HA-83200, 2008 Series 2008 Series is a multiparameter bench colorimeter dedicated for laboratory analysis. It can measure up to 45 methods using specific liquid or powder reagents. The amount of reagent is precisely dosed to ensure maximum repeatability.

WATER ANALYSIS

Features • Log and recall data at a push of a button • Light blocking cuvet holder • Backlit LCD • Battery Error Prevention System (BEPS) • PC compatible via USB • On-screen tutorial and context sensitive help screens • Powered by rechargeable batteries or 12 V DC

Easy Lab Analysis HA-83200-01 2008 Series Supplied W/ A Rugged Carrying Case, Cuvettes (4), Bottle For DO Tests, Scissors, Cuvette Cleaning Cloths (4), 12 V DC Adapter, & An Instruction Manual (115 V) (Test, Range & Method)

HA-93746-01** Iron LR, 0 To 400 μg/L, TPTZ

HA-93712-01 Aluminum, 0.00 To 1.00 mg/L, Aluminon

HA-93709-01 Manganese, HR 0.0 To 20.0 mg/L, Periodate Oxidation

HA-93755-01 Alkalinity, 0 To 500 mg/L, Colorimetric

HA-93748-01** Manganese LR, 0 To 300 μg/L, PAN

HA-93715-01 Ammonia, MR 0.00 To 10.00 mg/L, Nessler

HA-93730-01 Molybdenum, 0.0 To 40.0 mg/L, Mercaptoacetic Acid

HA-93700-01 Ammonia, LR 0.00 To 3.00 mg/L, Nessler

HA-93726-01 Nickel HR, 0.00 To 7.00 g/L, Photometric

HA-93716-01 Bromine, 0.00 To 8.00 mg/L, DPD

HA-93740-01** Nickel LR, 0.000 mg/L To 1.000 mg/L, PAN

HA-937521-01** Calcium, 0 To 400 mg/L, Oxalate

HA-93728-01 Nitrate, 0.0 To 30.0 mg/L, Cadmium Reduction

HA-93738-01 Chlorine Dioxide, 0.00 To 2.00 mg/L, Chlorophenol Red

HA-93708-01 Nitrite HR, 0 To 150 mg/L, Ferrous Sulfate

HA-93701-01 Chlorine*, Free 0.00 To 2.50 mg/L DPD

HA-93707-01 Nitrite LR, 0.00 To 0.35 mg/L, Diazotization

HA-93711-01 Chlorine*, Total 0.00 To 3.50 mg/L, DPD

HA-93732-01 Oxygen, Dissolved (DO), 0.0 To 10.0 mg/L, Winkler

HA-93723-01 Chromium, VI HR 0 To 1000 μg/L, Diphenylcarbohydrazide

HA-93757-01 Ozone, 0.00 To 2.00 mg/L, DPD

HA-93749-01 Chromium, VI LR 0 To 300 μg/L, Diphenylcarbohydrazide

HA-93710-01 pH, 6.5 To 8.5 pH, Phenol Red

N/A Color, 0 To 500 PCU, Colorimetric Platinum Cobalt

HA-93717-01 Phosphate HR, 0.0 To 30.0 mg/L, Amino Acid

HA-93702-01 Copper, HR 0.00 To 5.00 mg/L, Bicinchoninate

HA-93713-01 Phosphate LR, 0.00 To 2.50 mg/L, Ascorbic Acid

HA-95747-01 Copper, LR 0 To 1000 μg/L, Bicinchoninate

HA-93706-01 Phosphorus, 0.0 To 15.0 mg/L, Amino Acid

HA-93714-01 Cyanide, 0.000 To 0.200 mg/L, Pyridine-Pyrazalone

HA-93750-01 Potassium HR, 20 To 200 mg/L, Turbidimetric Tetraphenylborate

HA-93722-01 Cyanuric Acid, 0 To 80 mg/L, Turbidimetric

HA-93750-01 Potassium MR, 10 To 100 mg/L, Turbidimetric Tetraphenylborate

HA-93729-01 Fluoride, 0.00 To 2.00 mg/L, SPADNS

HA-93750-01 Potassium LR, 0.0 To 20.0 mg/L, Turbidimetric Tetraphenylborate

HA-93720-01 Hardness (Calcium), 0.00 To 2.70 mg/L, Colorimetric

HA-93705-01 Silica, 0.00 To 2.00 mg/L, Heteropoly Blue

HA-93719-01 Hardness (Magnesium), 0.00 To 2.00 mg/L, Colorimetric

HA-93737-01** Silver, 0.000 To 1.000 mg/L, PAN

HA-93704-01 Hydrazine, 0 To 400 μg/L, p-Dimethylaminobenzaldehyde

HA-93751-01 Sulfate, 0 To 150 mg/L, Turbidimetric

HA-93718-01 Iodine, 0.0 To 12.5 mg/L, DPD

HA-93731-01 Zinc, 0.00 To 3.00 mg/L, Zincon

HA-93721-01 Iron HR, 0.00 To 5.00 mg/L, Phenantroline

All reagents with -01 final code are for 100 tests unless noted otherwise.

HA-937520-01** Magnesium, 0 To 150 mg/L, Calmagite

* For chlorine, liquid reagents are available ** Reagents for 50 tests

87

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


HA-83224-01 Supplied W/ Sample Vials (10), Vial Cleaning Cloths (4), Scissors & Instruction Manual. (115 V) HA-94764A-25 Ammonia LR Range: 0.00 To 3.00 mg/L Method: Nessler, 25 Tests

HA-83224 Multiparameter Photometer With bar code recognition of sample vials Features • Measures Ammonia, Chlorine, COD, Nitrate, Nitrogen and Phosphorus • Bar code reader detects the method and range automatically • Three operation modes: Automatic, Semi-Automatic and Manual • Bar coded pre-dosed reagent vials • On-screen step-by-step tutorial • Logs up to 200 samples • Context sensitive help screen at a touch of a button • Selection of languages • USB connection • Graphic LCD Specifications

HA-83224

Light Source

Tungsten lamps with narrow-band interference filters

Light Detector

Silicon photocells

Data Logging

Up to 200 samples

Power Supply

230 V AC or 115 V AC power adapter

Dimensions / Weight

235 x 212 x 143 mm (9.2" x 8.34" x 5.62"), 2.3 kg (5.1 lbs)

COD Test Tube Heater

HA-94764B-25 Ammonia HR Range: 0 To 100 mg/L Method: Nessler, 25 Tests HA-93701-01 Chlorine, Free Range: 0.00 To 5.00 mg/L Method: DPD, 100 Tests

WATER ANALYSIS

A Complete Lab for Wastewater Analysis

HA-93711-01 Chlorine, Total Range: 0.00 To 5.00 mg/L Method: DPD, 100 Tests HA-94754A-25 Chemical Oxygen Demand LR Range: 0 To 150 mg/L (As COD) Method: Dichromate, Mercuric Sulfate, 25 Tests HA-94754B-25 Chemical Oxygen Demand MR Range: 0 To 1500 mg/L (As COD) Method: Dichromate, Mercuric Sulfate, 25 Tests HA-94754C-25 Chemical Oxygen Demand HR Range: 0 To 15000 mg/L (As COD) Method: Dichromate, Mercuric Sulfate, 25 Tests HA-94766-50 Nitrate Range: 0.0 To 30.0 mg/L (As NO3-N) Method: Chromotropic Acid, 50 Tests HA-94767A-50 Nitrogen, Total LR Range: 0.0 To 25.0 mg/L (As N) Method: Chromotropic Acid, 50 Tests HA-94767B-50 Nitrogen, Total HR Range: 10 To 150 mg/L (As N) Method: Chromotropic Acid, 50 Tests HA-94758B-50 Phosphorus, Acid Hydrolyzable Range: 0.00 To 1.60 mg/L (As P) Method: Ascorbic Acid, 50 Tests HA-94758A-50 Phosphorus, Reactive Range: 0.00 To 1.60 mg/L (As P) Method: Ascorbic Acid, 50 Tests HA-94763A-50 Phosphorus, Reactive HR Range: 0.0 To 32.6 mg/L (As P) Method: Vanadomolybdophosphoric Acid , 50 Tests HA-94758C-50 Phosphorus, Total Range: 0.00 To 1.15 mg/L (As P) Method: Ascorbic Acid, 50 Tests HA-94763B-50 Phosphorus, Total HR Range: 0.0 To 32.6 mg/L (As P) Method: Vanadomolybdophosphoric Acid, 50 Tests

Accuracy & Safety!

Features • The HA-839800 thermo-reactor is constructed of durable materials with a vial capacity to perform up to 25 digestions simultaneously. • The reactor is equipped with a user-selectable temperature setting to allow COD and total phosphorus reactions at 150°C and also 105°C for total nitrogen analysis. • To ensure the highest accuracy of digestion, a timer up to 120 minutes is incorporated. • An audible alarm indicates when the incubating period is completed.

HA-839800 COD Test Tube Heater HA-740216 Test Tube Cooling Rack (25 Tube Capacity) HA-740217 Laboratory Bench Safety Shield HA-151-00 Electronic Thermometer For Reactor (°C) HA-151-01 Electronic Thermometer For Reactor (°F)

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

88


Klett™ Colorimeters

WATER ANALYSIS

Use for colorimetric and turbidimetric determinations including: color, concentration, haze and density measurements and microbiology growth curves. These photometric colorimeters use specific light filters to give readings on a unique KlettTM scale. The readings are directly proportional to the concentration or optical density of a solution, in accordance with Beers Law. Two matched photocells and a suspension galvanometer give the instrument a broad range of measurement making it light and ambient temperature independent. A fully compensated and carefully balanced electrical circuit provides accuracy and consistency in readings while using simple and rugged equipment. The precision galvanometer has an illuminated logarithmic scale, graduated from 1 to 1000 KlettTM and the scale is graduated in units proportional to the optical density. Repeatability is ±0.33% of the full scale. Two units are available. The Industrial Model accepts rectangular solution cells, which can be used in either of two directions. Measurements can then be taken at depths of 10 mm, 20 mm, or 40 mm. A reduction plate is available to minimize solution depth to 2.5 mm. An adapter is available which permits the use of test tubes. The Clinical Model uses standard 14.25 x 125 mm test tubes. Calibrated or uncalibrated tubes are available. In addition, micro test tubes can be used for samples as small as 2.5 mL. Both models are supplied with the two most commonly used filters, blue for 400-450 nm and green for 520-580 nm. Additional filters are available to permit measurements over the complete visual range. Each unit has detailed instructions, standards and guides for a wide range of tests.

Durable Construction for Long Service Life Filters For Both Clinical & Industrial Models BEL-T37012-0000 KlettTM Colorimeter, Model 800-3, 115 V AC Clinical Model

BEL-T37014-0040 KS-40 Color Filter, Range: 380-430

BEL-T37012-0001 KlettTM Colorimeter, Model 800-3, 220 V AC Clinical Model

BEL-T37014-0042 KS-42 Color Filter, Blue Range: 400-450

BEL-T37013-0000 KlettTM Colorimeter, Model 900-3, 110 V AC Industrial Model

BEL-T37014-0044 KS-44 Color Filter, Range: 410-480

BEL-T37013-0001 KlettTM Colorimeter, Model 900-3, 220 V AC Industrial Model

BEL-T37014-0047 KS-47 Color Filter, Range: 445-505 *

For Klett™ Colorimeter, Clinical Model BEL-T37012-0000 BEL-T37012-0010 KlettTM 801 Test Tubes, Uncalibrated 12/Pack BEL-T37012-0020 KlettTM 802 Test Tubes, Calibrated 12/Pack BEL-T37012-1020 KlettTM Test Kit, Calibrated, Each Includes Three Test Tubes # 0,1, & 2, Test Filter & Instructions

BEL-T37014-0050 KS-50 Color Filter, Range: 470-530 * BEL-T37014-0052 KS-52 Color Filter, Range: 485-550 * BEL-T37014-0054 KS-54 Color Filter, Green Range: 520-580 BEL-T37014-0055 KS-55 Color Filter, Range: 520-600 * BEL-T37014-0056 KS-56 Color Filter, Range: 540-590

For Klett™ Colorimeter, Industrial Model BEL-T37013-0000

BEL-T37014-0059 KS-59 Color Filter, Range: 565-630

BEL-T37013-0010 KlettTM 901 Solution Cell, 20/40 mm

BEL-T37014-0060 KS-60 Color Filter, Range: 580-640 *

BEL-T37013-0020 KlettTM 902 Solution Cell, 10 mm

BEL-T37014-0062 KS-62 Color Filter, Range: 590-660 *

BEL-T37013-0030 KlettTM 903 Reduction Plate

BEL-T37014-0064 KS-64 Color Filter, Range: 620-680 *

BEL-T37013-0041 KlettTM 904M Special Test Tube Adaptor

BEL-T37014-0066 KS-66 Color Filter, Red Range: 640-700

BEL-T37013-1015 KlettTM Test Kit, Industrial, Each Includes Three Test Tubes # 0,1, & 2, Test Filter, Test Tube Adapter & Instructions

BEL-T37014-0069 KS-69 Color Filter, Range: 660-740 BEL-T37014-0070 KS-6225T Color Filter, Range: 590-660 * *Special Order

89

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Water Purification Aries Laboratory Water Purification System

ARIES-1102

Max. Flow Rate

2.0 LPM (0.5 gpm)

Max. Inlet Pressure

60 psi

Min. Inlet Pressure

20 psi

Max. Inlet Temperature

100°F

Inlet Connection

3/8" Tube

Outlet Connection

1/4" FNPT

Bacteria Filter

0.2 micron capsule

Weight

32 lbs (dry) / 38 lbs (operating)

Dimensions

25" H x 23" W x 8.5" D

WATER PURIFICATION

Features • Exceeds Type I water standards • Uses large media cartridges for low operating costs • Need for storage eliminated • Ideal for universities, hospitals, and research

Specifications

The unit takes feed water supply through three disposable cartridges and a 0.2 micron final filter to supply high purity water meeting or exceeding Type I water requirements. A quiet recirculation pump ensures consistent water purity. A built-in timer cycles the unit on and off to prevent extra wear on components and eliminates heat build up. Resistivity is temperature compensated and monitored on a digital display. Adjustable set point for notification of cartridge change out is provided. Disposable VP Series cartridges are spring loaded into position without the use of tools. Unit can be free standing or wall mounted. Direct Feed option will have a secondary port to feed auxiliary lab equipment for on-demand Type I water. Includes: a built in pressure regulator & 0.2 micron final filter. For pyrogen free water, use a 0.05 micron ultrafilter. Media cartridges not included. When feeding from a central DI, RO, or distilled water source, (3) mixed bed cartridges are recommended. Recommended feed water influent: DI, RO or Distilled.

Gemini Water System Ultrapure Water Purification Features • Exceeds Type I water standards • Highest flow rate of 3.7 LPM • Multi-pass UV with sterile dispensing port • Programmable up to four separate volumes • Ideal for reagent preparation, carboy filling, life science, and analytical systems

The Gemini Ultra High Purity System provides up to 3.7 LPM of 18.2 megohm, 0.2 micron filtered water. The multi-pass ultraviolet system irradiates the water at three separate passes in the recirculation loop. The dispensing port is continuously exposed to UV for complete sterility at the outlet. System meets and exceeds ASTM & NCCLS Type I water and ASTM Biomedical grade specifications. Volumetric dispensing is controlled by a soft touch key pad and the unit can be programmed to dispense four different set points. An integral drain basin accommodates filling large containers and controls drips and spills. Standard unit includes (2) Low TOC high purity and (1) 0.2 micron cartridges. Options available are UV TOC destruct, ultrafiltration, RO pretreatment, recirculating dispensing gun, and basinless Gemini-MB version. Recommended feed water influent: DI, RO or Distilled.

www.ereinc.com

Specifications

GEMINI-1102

Max. Flow Rate

3.7 LPM (1.0 gpm)

Max. Inlet Pressure

90 psi

Min. Inlet Pressure

20 psi

Max. Inlet Temperature

100°F

Inlet Connection

3/8" Tube

Outlet Connection

0.2" FNPT

Bacteria Filter

0.2 micron capsule

Weight

50 lbs (dry) / 55 lbs (operating)

Dimensions

24" H x 28" W x 19" D

sales@ereinc.com

90


WATER PURIFICATION

LabStrong Fi-Streem 2S Glass Stills • Patented vapor trap eliminates carry-over of contaminants in the vaporborne water droplets • Easy push-button controls for automatic operation • Fi-Streem 2S was designed with dual feed capabilities for tap or pretreated inlet feedwater • Heating elements are protected with an over-temperature switch • 24-hour automatic operation when used with the 8 L Storage Reservoir (A1052LS) • Feed Water Pressure: Minimum 15 PSI & Maximum 80 PSI

LabStrong Fi-Streem III Glass Stills (4 Liter & 8 Liter) • Patented vapor trap eliminates carry-over of contaminants in the vaporborne water droplets • Totally enclosed still assures safety from breakage or hot surfaces • Fully automatic microprocessor controls simplify operation and cleaning, while assuring high reliability • Thermistor and heat sensor offer double protection against low water conditions • For convenience, unit is designed with capabilities for tap or pretreated inlet water • Automatic start / stop feature when connected to 40 L Storage Tank (B00121) or 50 L Storage Reservoir (A1058LS) • Feed Water Pressure: Minimum 15 PSI & Maximum 80 PSI Model

Product Water Capacity

Cooling Water

Size

Operating Weight

Shipping Weight

Volts (AC)

Amps

Feed Water Type

# of Heaters

Fi-Streem 2S Glass Stills A74415-60LS

1.4 LPH

30 LPH

13.8"L x 10.5"W x 31"H

48.5 lbs

60 lbs

120 V

15

Tap / pretreated

2

A74415LS

2 LPH

30 LPH

13.8"L x 10.5"W x 31"H

48.5 lbs

60 lbs

120 V

20

Tap / pretreated

2

A74410LS

2 LPH

30 LPH

13.8"L x 10.5"W x 31"H

48.5 lbs

60 lbs

220 V

13

Tap / pretreated

2

Fi-Streem III Glass Stills A56210-857LS

4 LPH

60 LPH

15"L x 12"W x 30"H

65 lbs

74 lbs

240 V

13

Tap / pretreated

2

A56218-857LS

4 LPH

60 LPH

15"L x 12"W x 30"H

65 lbs

74 lbs

208 V

13

Tap / pretreated

2

A56220-857LS

8 LPH

120 LPH

15"L x 22"W x 30"H

80 lbs

93 lbs

240 V

30

Tap / pretreated

4

A56228-857LS

8 LPH

120 LPH

15"L x 22"W x 30"H

80 lbs

93 lbs

208 V

30

Tap / pretreated

4

Fi-Streem Hose Nipple Cartridge & Wall Mount Bracket • Lower cost alternative • Ideal for small volume, pressure applications and pretreatment of Fi-Streem stills • Optional wall mount system includes hose fittings and flow control valve • Contains activated carbon to remove organics and chlorine from feedwater • Cartridge life capacity indicated by resin color change at two windows in cartridge

91

Model

Description

Size

Weight

D00121

Hose nipple cartridge

3"L x 3"W x 17"H

3 lbs

AY0012-2

Hose nipple cartridge wall mount bracket

7"L x 3.5"W x 20"H

4 lbs

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


LabStrong Fi-Streem III Bi-Distiller Glass Stills

Specifications

A56230-857LS

A56238-857LS

Bi-Distiller

Description Product Water Capacity

4 LPH 120 LPH

Cooling Water

15"L x 22"W x 30"H

Size

80 lbs

Operating Weight Shipping Weight

93 lbs

Feed Water Type

Tap / pretreated

Maximum Pressure

80 psi

Minimum Pressure

15 psi

Volts (AC)

240 V

Amps Hz # of Heaters

2408 V 30 50 / 60 4

Fi-Streem Storage Tank 40 L Capacity

Fi-Streem Storage Reservoir 8 L Capacity

Fi-Streem Storage Reservoir 50 L Capacity

• Fully automatic operation when connected to Fi-Streem 4 L, 8 L or Bi-Distiller stills • Vent filter prevents airborne contamination • Contains sight window for observation of water level • Bench or wall mounting options • 22"L x 18"W x 25"H • Operating Weight: 124 lbs • Model: B00121

• High density polyethylene rectangular carboy • Easy installation • Portable design is ideal for transporting distilled water to different lab sites • Includes draw valve • 6"L x 11"W x 18"H • Use with 2S glass stills • Operating Weight: 19 lbs • Model: A1052LS

• Fully automatic operation when used with FiStreem 4 L, 8 L or Bi-Distiller stills • Low density polyethylene portable carboy • Includes draw valve for easy dispensing of water • 15"L x 17"W x 26"H • Operating Weight: 116 lbs • Model: A1058LS

Answers:

Page 52 • Q5: Canaries are sensitive to toxic gases. Since canaries are songbirds, they offer an early warning; they stop singing when exposed before eventually dying. • Q6: Headaches, dizziness, and confusion occur within 6 – 8 hours at even the very mild concentration of 35 ppm. Larger concentrations can result in death within minutes.

TriviaZone

Page 25 • Q1: Xenon. The compound was xenon hexafluoroplatinate. • Q2: J Page 34 • Q3: The occhiolino or "little eye" • Q4: The refrigerator. He and Leo Szilard patented an absorption refrigerator with no moving parts.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

WATER PURIFICATION

• Patented vapor trap eliminates carry-over of vapor-borne contaminants • Totally enclosed still assures safety from breakage or hot surfaces • Double distillation process increases water purity to above 1 Megohm-cm • Glass components eliminate the leaching impurities • Fully automatic microprocessor controls simplify operation and cleaning, while assuring high reliability • 24-hour automatic control activates still as required to maintain a full reservoir • Thermistor and heat sensor offer double protection against low water conditions • For convenience, unit is designed with capabilities for tap or pretreated inlet water • Space-saving design • Bench or wall mounting options • Automatic start / stop feature when connected to 40 L Storage Tank (B00121) or 50 L Storage Reservoir (A1058LS)

92


General Laboratory Supplies

Everything a lab needs to run smoothly, everyday 93


Scienceware® "SPACE SAVER" Vacuum Desiccators

LARGE INTERIOR VOLUME The space saving design of the desiccator dome provides maximum interior clearances. They offer an average of 13% greater interior volume than standard hemispherical domes.

• •

Features • A polypropylene stopcock with a Teflon® TFE plug which turns, allowing a slow, gentle entrance of air, preventing unnecessary Flange O.D.

Part Number

I.D.

Plate

Overall Height

Overall Height

149 mm (5 7/8") 197 mm (7 3/4") 240 mm (9 7/16")

140 mm No. 3 190 mm No. 4 230 mm No. 5

206 mm (8 1/8") 260 mm (10 1/4") 311 mm (12 1/8")

121 mm (4 3/4") 157 mm (6 3/16") 197 mm (7 3/4")

149 mm (5 7/8") 197 mm (7 3/4") 240 mm (9 7/16")

140 mm No. 3 190 mm No. 4 230 mm No.5

206 mm (8 1/8") 260 mm (10 1/4") 311 mm (12 1/8")

121 mm (4 3/4") 157 mm (6 3/16") 197 mm (7 3/4")

With Polypropylene Bottom BEL-F42010-0000 BEL-F42020-0000 BEL-F42025-0000

171 mm (6 3/4") 230 mm (9 1/16") 273 mm (10 3/4")

With Clear Polycarbonate Bottom BEL-F42012-0000 BEL-F42022-0000 BEL-F42027-0000

171 mm (6 3/4") 230 mm (9 1/16") 273 mm (10 3/4")

Secador® Auto-Desiccator Cabinets Protecting valuable humidity sensitive items such as reagents or electronics is easy and totally automatic with Secador® Auto-Desiccator Cabinets. A patented electronic dehumidification system is designed to reduce the relative humidity inside the cabinet from 75 to 25% and circulate dry air automatically, freeing users from monitoring or changing chemical desiccant. All contents are easily viewed through a large clear door that seals with positive latches and can be secured closed with tamper evident seals or padlock. A dial hygrometer in the door allows for easy monitoring of relative humidity.

Secador® 3.0 AutoDesiccator Cabinets The built-in Auto-Desiccator module regenerates desiccant and circulates dry air to assure safe storage of moisture sensitive products. The Secador® 3.0 Auto-Desiccator Cabinet has 1.58 cu. ft internal volume with overall dimensions of 41.7 H x 34. 1 W x 41.4 cm D (16.4" H x 13.4" W x 16.3" D). Three perforated shelves can be removed for different contents. The door opening is 31.2 H x 22.5 cm W (12.3" H x 8.9" W) and includes 2 latches and loops for lock or tamper evident seal. Includes three shelves. Shipping weight 10 kg (22 lbs).

Dry-Keeper™ Desiccator vertical cabinet Non-vacuum with dial hygrometer in door Made of methyl-methacrylate, this desiccator cabinet provides a clear view of contents. Shelf cleats permit 15 height adjustments. Includes three shelves with vent holes and three sets of shelf rails. The gasketed door has two metal hinges, two door latches and a metal handle. A desiccant tray is also included. The door opening is 25 x 45 cm (10" x 17 7/8").

BEL-F42073-1115 Secador® 3.0 Auto-Desiccator Cabinet Clear, 120 V AC BEL-F42073-1220 Secador® 3.0 Auto-Desiccator Cabinet Clear, 230 V AC

www.ereinc.com

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

EXTRA HEAVY WALLS Clear polycarbonate top and choice of white polypropylene or polycarbonate bottom. This strong, shatterproof desiccator will hold a full vacuum (29.9" Hg 759 mm) at room temperature for 24 hours and will remain airtight even if not under vacuum. Use at room temperature only.

turbulence and crucible damage. The stopcock handle is a highly visible red and has a port which accepts 6.4 mm (1/4") I.D. tubing. A large ribbed knob at the top center for easy lifting. A neoprene O-ring seal which does not require grease, but is not harmed if grease is used. A polypropylene plate 3.2 mm (1/8") thick with 3.2 mm (1/8") diameter perforations for air transfer. The plate rests on the retaining ledge of the bottom section and has a center hole for easy removal. Choice of bottom section: Polypropylene provides excellent chemical resistance and permits the use of incandescent crucibles with standard size porcelain plates. All-clear polycarbonate bottoms are available in the same sizes.

BEL-H42056-0001 Dry-Keeper™ 32 L x 39 D x 51 cm H (12 1/2" L x 15 1/2" D x 20" H)

sales@ereinc.com

94


Secador® 4.0

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Includes three shelves The built-in Auto-Desiccator module regenerates desiccant and circulates dry air to assure safe storage of moisture sensitive products. The Secador® 4.0 Auto-Desiccator Cabinet has 1.9 cu. ft internal volume with overall dimensions of 51.8 H x 34.1 W x 41.4 cm D (20.4" H x 13.4" W x 16.3" D). Three perforated shelves can be removed for different contents. The door opening is 41.7 H x 22.5 cm W (16.4" H x 8.9" W) and includes 2 latches and loops for lock or tamper evident seal. Shipping weight 10.9 kg (23.9 lbs).

BEL-F42074-1115 Secador® 4.0 Clear, 120 V AC BEL-F42074-1116 Secador® 4.0 Clear / Blue End Caps, 120 V AC (Not Shown) BEL-F42074-1117 Secador® 4.0 Blue / Clear Door, 120 V AC (Not Shown) BEL-F42074-1220 Secador® 4.0 Clear, 230 V AC BEL-F42074-1226 Secador® 4.0 Clear / Blue End Caps, 230 V AC (Not Shown) BEL-F42074-1227 Secador® 4.0 Blue / Clear Door, 230 V AC (Not Shown)

Protect your humiditysensitive items! USE A 

desiccator

Need help choosing the perfect desiccator? Toll free:

1-888-287-3732

95

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Diamond Pipettors Diamond Pipettors are a cost-effective alternative to high priced name-brand pipettors. Manufactured for high accuracy and precision, the Diamond pipettors come with a certificate of calibration, a recalibration tool kit and a full one year warranty. They are calibrated in an ISO 17025 facility.

GS-3301-10 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 0.5 - 10 µl, Color: Pink, Pipette Tip No.: 3305 GS-3301-20 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 2 - 20 µl, Color: Pink, Pipette Tip No.: 3305 GS-3301-50 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 5 - 50 µl, Color: Yellow, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3301-100 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 10 - 100 µl, Color: Blue, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3301-200 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 20 - 200 µl, Color: Lavender, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

Features • High accuracy and precision guaranteed • Autoclavable tip cone and lower section assembly • Streamlined tip ejector designed for access to narrow-necked tubes and containers • Ergonomic, lightweight and soft plunger movement provides added comfort and minimizes fatigue • Two step plunger operation allows you to use both forward and reverse pipetting techniques depending on the nature of the liquid • Color coded for easy identification

GS-3301-1000 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 100 - 1000 µl, Color: Orange, Pipette Tip No.: 3307 GS-3301-5000 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 1000 - 5000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3308B Fixed Volume with Tip Ejector GS-3302-5 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 5 µl, Color: Pink, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-10 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 10 µl, Color: Pink, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-15 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 15 µl, Color: Pink, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-20 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 20 µl, Color: Yellow, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

Diamond Pro

GS-3302-25 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 25 µl, Color: Yellow, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-30 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 30 µl, Color: Yellow, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-40 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 40 µl, Color: Blue, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-50 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 50 µl, Color: Blue, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-100 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 100 µl, Color: Lavender, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-200 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 200 µl, Color: Lavender, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3302-250 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 250 µl, Color: Orange, Pipette Tip No.: 3307 GS-3302-500 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 500 µl, Color: Orange, Pipette Tip No.: 3307 GS-3302-1000 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 1000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3307

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Adjustable Volume with Tip Ejector

GS-3302-2000 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 2000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3308B GS-3302-3000 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 3000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3308B GS-3302-5000 Diamond Pipettor, Volume: 5000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3308B

The Diamond Pro research pipettor includes all of the features of the Diamond pipettor with the addition of a super-soft elastomer grip that minimizes fatigue of hands and fingers. The unique padding not only reduces thumb stress, but also minimizes the transfer of body heat to the pipette, resulting in consistent accuracy. All Diamond pipettors come with a certificate of calibration, a recalibration tool kit and full one year warranty. They are calibrated in an ISO 17025 facility. Adjustable Volume with Tip Ejector

Fixed Volume with Tip Ejector

GS-3311-10 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 0.5 - 10 µl, Color: Red, Pipette Tip No.: 3305

GS-3312-5 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 5 µl, Color: Red, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3311-20 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 2 - 20 µl, Color: Red, Pipette Tip No.: 3305

GS-3312-10 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 10 µl, Color: Red, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3311-50 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 5 - 50 µl, Color: Yellow, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3312-15 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 15 µl, Color: Red, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3311-100 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 10 - 100 µl, Color: Blue, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3312-20 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 20 µl, Color: Yellow, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3311-200 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 20 - 200 µl, Color: Lavender, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3312-25 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 25 µl, Color: Yellow, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3311-1000 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 100 - 1000 µl, Color: Orange, Pipette Tip No.: 3307

GS-3312-50 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 50 µl, Color: Blue, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3312-500 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 500 µl, Color: Orange, Pipette Tip No.: 3307

GS-3311-5000 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 1000 - 5000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3308B

GS-3312-100 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 100 µl, Color: Lavender, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3312-1000 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 1000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3307

GS-3312-200 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 200 µl, Color: Lavender, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3312-2000 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 2000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3308B

GS-3312-250 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 250 µl, Color: Orange, Pipette Tip No.: 3307

GS-3312-5000 Diamond Pro Pipettor, Volume: 5000 µl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3308B

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

96


GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Multi-Channel with Tip Ejector

Diamond Jr. Pipettors These fixed volume pipettors are accurate, economical and half the size of a standard pipettor. They are fully autoclavable and are perfect for kits, schools and single use applications where precision pipetting is required.

Globe’s 8-channel Diamond PRO pipettors feature a 360° rotating manifold which provides universal right or left hand use. Utilizing our super-soft elastomer grips, fatigue of the hands and fingers is minimized. The unique padding not only reduces thumb stress, but also minimizes the transfer of body heat to the pipette, resulting in consistant accuracy. All Diamond pipettors come with a certificate of calibration, a recalibration tool kit and a full one year warranty.

GS-3322-5 Diamond Jr. Pipettor, Volume: 5 μl, Color: Orange, Pipette Tip No.: 3305 GS-3322-10 Diamond Jr. Pipettor, Volume: 10 μl, Color: Pink, Pipette Tip No.: 3305 GS-3322-20 Diamond Jr. Pipettor, Volume: 20 μl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3322-25 Diamond Jr. Pipettor, Volume: 25 μl, Color: Green, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3322-35 Diamond Jr. Pipettor, Volume: 35 μl, Color: Blue, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3322-50 Diamond Jr. Pipettor, Volume: 50 μl, Color: Purple, Pipette Tip No.: 3306 GS-3322-100 Diamond Jr. Pipettor, Volume: 100 μl, Color: Orange, Pipette Tip No.: 3306

GS-3303-10 8 Place Multi-Channel Pipettor, Volume: 0.5 - 10 μl, Color: Red GS-3303-50 8 Place Multi-Channel Pipettor, Volume: 5 - 50 μl, Color: Yellow GS-3303-300 8 Place Multi-Channel Pipettor, Volume: 30 - 300 μl, Color: Orange

Pipette Tips Diamond Pipette Tips are molded using premium grade plastic and offer consistent accuracy when used with Diamond pipettors.

GS-3305 0.1 - 20 μl, Natural, 1000/Pack GS-3305R 0.1 - 20 μl, Natural, 96/Rack, 10 Racks/Case GS-3306 1 - 200 μl, Yellow, 1000/Pack GS-3306R 1 - 200 μl, Yellow, 1000/Rack

RV-Pette™ Repeat Volume Pipettor The RV-Pette™ Pipette provides accurate and reproducible repetitive pipetting from the single filling of a disposable tip. Use of the RV-Pette™ saves time and reduces the fatigue associated with repetitive pipetting using a standard pipettor. Twenty-nine different volumes between 1 μl and 5000 μl may be dispensed with this pipette. As many as forty-eight pipetting steps may be carried out without refilling the reservoir tip. Samples can be dispensed at intervals as fast as 1 second without compromising accuracy or reproducibility. The slender body of the RVPette™ fits comfortably in the natural contour of your hand. The plunger is located on the top of the unit, like that of a standard pipette, for easy access and reduction of hand strain. The RV-Pette™ performs best when used with Globe’s dispenser syringe tips.

Racks The Diamond Acrylic Pipettor Stand offers safe and convenient storage for pipettors.

Features • Convenient tip selection chart located on the body of the pipette • Maintenance free • Use with Globe dispenser syringe tips • Comes with a certificate of calibration and one year warranty

GS-3307 100 - 1000 μl, Blue, 1000/Pack GS-3307R 100 - 1000 μl, Blue, 1000/Rack

GS-3310-4 Holds 4 Pipettors

GS-3308B 1000 - 5000 μl, Natural, 250/Pack

97

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

GS-3250 RV-Pette™ Repeat Volume Pipettor

GS-3310-6 Holds 6 Pipettors

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Fast Release Pipette Pump™ II Pipettors

Features Rapid Release Valve for One-Handed Operation

A

Designed for fast and efficient single-handed operation with glass or plastic pipettes. Pipettes are easily inserted into a unique collar with stabilizing fingers to hold pipette securely. Rotating the knurled thumb wheel draws liquid to the desired volume. To empty rapidly, apply light pressure to the fast release lever. For gradual dispensing, rotate the thumb wheel. Easily disassembled for cleaning. Sizes are color coded. Sold individually.

A. Transpette™ 8 Channel Transfer Pipettor Economical and Disposable Now you can perform plate washing, feeding and supernatant collection with one of the most unique pipetting devices available. The Transpette™ pipettor is an inexpensive, disposable, 8-channel transfer pipettor which can deliver and remove liquids from your microwell plates without the use of pipettors and pipette tips. To avoid radiation contamination of your expensive liquid handling devices, discard the Transpette™ transfer pipettor after "hot" radioactive uses. Molded of translucent plastic, the Transpette™ pipetting device holds 600 μl per channel. Available sterile or non-sterilized. Cannot be autoclaved.

BEL-F37911-1002 Fast Release Pipette Pump™ II Pipettor, 2 mL, Blue BEL-F37911-1010 Fast Release Pipette Pump™ II Pipettor, 10 mL, Green BEL-F37911-1025 Fast Release Pipette Pump™ II Pipettor, 25 mL, Red

Vaccu-Pette/96™ Pipetting Device The Vaccu-Pette/96™ pipetting device is a 96-channel pipetting device that can aspirate or dispense 96 wells in less than 10 seconds. It speeds up repetitive washing, dispensing or aspirating all wells simultaneously. Simply connect a disposable plastic syringe to the Vaccu Pette/96™ pipetting device and withdraw the plunger to transfer liquid. Use the Vaccu Pette/96™ pipetting device to remove spent medium from cultures in preparation for feeding. Molded of transparent plastics materials, it is 127 x 86 x 37 mm high (5" x 3 3/8" x 1 7/16") and has a vacuum outlet at one end. A short length of 3.2 mm I.D. (1/8") tubing is supplied for syringe connection. Requires a 30 mL or larger disposable sterile syringe (not included). Individually packed, sterile and disposable.

Disposable Gloves RONCO SILKTEX Latex Examination Gloves 5 mil thickness

www.ereinc.com

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

B

B. Disposable Pipetting Reservoir The pipetting reservoir has a 100 mL capacity for extended multi-channel pipetting into microwell plates, Mini-Tubes, Scienceware® Cube 2ube® Tubes and deep well blocks. This design allows ample clearance for all types of pipettors. BEL-F37873-0000 Transpette™ Pipettor, Non-Sterile, 25/Bag BEL-F37876-0000E Sterile, Disposable Vaccu-Pette/96™ Pipetting Device, Each

BEL-F37877-0000 Disposable Pipetting Reservoir Bulk Packed, Non-Sterile, 50/Box

BEL-37876-0001E Autoclavable, Reusable Vaccu-Pette/96™ Pipetting Device, Each

BEL-F37877-0001 Individually Packed, Radiation Sterilized, 50/Box

Powder Free

Lightly Powdered

RO-819 SILKTEX, Size X-Small, 100/Box

RO-519 SILKTEX, Size X-Small, 100/Box

RO-829 SILKTEX, Size Small, 100/Box

RO-529 SILKTEX, Size Small, 100/Box

RO-839 SILKTEX, Size Medium, 100/Box

RO-539 SILKTEX, Size Medium, 100/Box

RO-849 SILKTEX, Size Large, 100/Box

RO-549 SILKTEX, Size Large, 100/Box

RO-859 SILKTEX, Size X-Large, 100/Box

RO-559 SILKTEX, Size X-Large, 100/Box

"Evaluated & accepted by CFIA"

"Evaluated & accepted by CFIA"

sales@ereinc.com

98


Bel-Bulb™ Pipettor

Transfer Pipettes General Purpose

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

The Bel-Bulb™ Pipettor is a simple suction device with a soft tapered chuck to fit pipettes from 6 to 8 mm in diameter. The flexible vinyl bulb is 5 cm diameter x 7 cm long (2" x 2 3/4"). After filling your pipette, remove the bulb and quickly cover the top of the pipette with a finger to hold fluid or release it as needed.

These Transfer Pipettes are offered in a variety of sizes and styles. Choose from our standard graduated and non-graduated transfer pipettes, fine tip transfer pipettes, mini transfer pipettes and extra large 12" transfer pipettes. We have the right pipette for your requirements. Produced from flexible polyethylene (PE), these pipettes are perfect for all liquid transfer applications.

GS-137035-500

GS-137030-500

GS-135030-500

Standard Pipettes-Graduated GS-137035-500 3 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Graduated To 1 mL, Length: 140 mm, 21 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box GS-137030-500 5 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Graduated To 1 mL, Length: 145 mm, 24 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

BEL-F37887-0000B Bel-Bulb™ Pipettor, 2/Bag

GS-135030-500 7 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Graduated To 3 mLl, Length: 155 mm, 23 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

Fine Tip Transfer Pipettes

Also available in larger quantities. Also available sterile.

Ideal for dispensing small volumes, loading hemocytometers and transferring liquid to and from multi-well plates.

GS-134010-500

GS-134020-400

GS-134070-250

GS-138060-500

GS-136030-500

GS-139020-500

GS-134050-500

GS-134050-S20

GS-134090-400

GS-138080-500

GS-138030-400

GS-139040-250

Fine Tip Pipettes, Non-Graduated

99

GS-134010-500 1.3 mL Fine Tip Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 51 mm, 45 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

Standard Pipettes, Non-Graduated

GS-134020-400 1.5 mL Fine Tip Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 104 mm, 50 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 400/Dispenser Box

GS-138060-500 4 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Blood Bank Style, Length: 130 mm, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

GS-134070-250 3.3 mL Fine Tip Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 153 mm, 50 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 250/Dispenser Box

GS-136030-500 4.5 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Narrow Stem, Length: 155 mm, 25 Drops/ml, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

GS-134050-500 5.8 mL Fine Tip Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 147 mm, 55 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

GS-139020-500 6.5 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Narrow Stem, Length: 155 mm, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

GS-134050-S20 5.8 mL Fine Tip Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 147 mm, 60 Drops/mL, Sterile, 20/Bag, 20 Bags/Case, 400/Case

GS-138080-500 7 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 155 mm, 23 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

GS-134060-500 5.8 mL Fine Tip Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 157 mm, 50 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

GS-138030-400 8 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Large Bulb, Length: 157 mm, 20 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 400/Dispenser Box

GS-134090-400 8.7 mL Fine Tip Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 147 mm, 45 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 400/Dispenser Box

GS-139040-250 15 mL Standard Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Large Bulb, Length: 155 mm, Non-Sterile, 250/Dispenser Box

Also available in larger quantities.

Also available in larger quantities.

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Mini Pipettes, Graduated & Non-Graduated

Mini Transfer Pipettes

GS-138040-500 1.2 mL Mini Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 65 mm, 26 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

Ideal for use in diagnostic test kits and where small volume samples are required.

GS-134010-500 1.3 mL Mini Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Fine Tip, Length: 51 mm, 45 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box GS-134020-400 1.5 mL Mini Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Fine Tip, Length: 104 mm, 50 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 400/Dispenser Box

GS-138020-500 1.7 mL Mini Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 87 mm, 27 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box GS-136020-500 4 mL Mini Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Narrow Stem, Length :85 mm, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

GS-138040-500

GS-134010-500

GS-134020-400

GS-136036-500

Also available in larger quantities.

Extra Long Transfer Pipettes Available in 9" and 12" lengths, these pipettes are ideal for reaching into large bottles, 24 hour urine containers, cylinders and jars.

GS-139030-500*

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

GS-136036-500 1.5 mL Mini Transfer Pipettes, Graduated To 0.3 ml, Length: 115 mm, 21 Drops/mL, Non-Sterile, 500/Dispenser Box

GS-139050

GS-138020-500

GS-136020-500

Extra Long Pipettes, Non-Graduated GS-139030-500* 6 mL Extra Long Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 225 mm, 28 Drops/mL, 500/Dispenser Box GS-139050 23 mL Extra Long Transfer Pipettes, Non-Graduated, Length: 300 mm, 100/Dispenser Box

Paddle Transfer Pipettes

Also available in larger quantities.

These dual-purpose pipettes are used for small volume transfers and feature an integrated rigid paddle used for mixing, spreading and smearing.

Bellows Transfer Pipettes The accordian-shaped, high capacity bulb of the Bellows Pipette acts as a reservoir for filling and expelling liquids. The bulb provides strong suction for use with viscous liquids.

GS-136080-500

GS-136070-500

Bellows Pipettes

Transfer Pipettes with Paddle, Non-Graduated

GS-138002 7 mL Bellows Pipettes, Graduated To 1.5 mL, Excellent For Food And Cosmetic Applications, 100/Bag, 20 Bags/Case, 2000/Case, SPECIAL ORDER ITEM

GS-136080-500 0.8 mL Transfer Pipettes W/ Paddle, Non-Graduated, Length: 124 mm, 50 μL Drop Size, 500/Dispenser Box, Features A Paddle At One End To Facilitate The Spreading Of Substances

GS-138005 15 mL Bellows Pipettes, Graduated To 5 mL, Excellent For Food And Cosmetic Applications, 100/Bag, 12 Bags/Case, 1200/Case, SPECIAL ORDER ITEM

GS-136070-500 1 mL Transfer Pipettes W/ Paddle, Non-Graduated, Narrow Tip, Length: 130 mm, 30 μL Drop Size, 500/Dispenser Box, Features A Paddle At One End To Facilitate The Spreading Of Substances Also available in larger quantities.

Also available in larger quantities.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

100


GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Monoject 60 cc Syringes

Features • Bold dual graduations 60 cc in 5 cc increments and 2 oz in 1/4" oz increments • Autoclavable in rigid pack • Oriented, compact package • Sterile

Specimen Containers Leak Resistant

Monoject 140 cc Piston Syringes

Features • Bold dual graduations 140 cc in 5 cc increments and 5 oz in 1/4 oz increments • Autoclavable

Syringe Tip

Qty.

Part Number

Regular Luer

100

Non-Sterile

TY-8881560182

Eccentric Luer

100

TY-8881114014

Regular Luer

20

TY-8881560141

Catheter (Irrigation)

100

TY-8881114030

Luer Lock

20

TY-8881560125

Luer Lock

100

TY-8881114055

Catheter (Irrigation)

20

TY-8881560265

Toomey Type (Irrigation)

100

Sterile Luer Lock

20

TY-8881114063

Syringe Tip

Qty.

Part Number TY-8881560224

These Tite-Rite™ containers are the ultimate in leak-tight storage and transport of liquids. An expanded inner liner in the screwcap is designed to compress against the uppermost walls and top rim of the container thereby providing an air-tight seal. Technical information • Container = Polypropylene (PP) Cap = Polyethylene (PE) • Molded graduation marks • Ideal for hospital pneumatic tube systems

GS-6518 Tite-Rite™ Containers W/ Separate White Screwcap, Clarified Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 20 mL (0.66 oz), Container Dimensions: Diameter: 1 1/2" (35 mm), Height: 1 3/4", 1000/Case GS-6520 Tite-Rite™ Container W/ Separate White Screwcap, Clarified Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 40 mL (1.33 oz), Container Dimensions: Diameter: 2" (48 mm), Height: 1 5/8", 600/Case

Automatic Burettes Self Zeroing Glass Burettes These burettes have easy to read blue graduations against a white background. The delivery end is fitted into a plastic push button stopcock which permits drop by drop delivery. A small screw clamp adjusts drop speed as needed for titration. A polyethylene filling tube extends from the top of the burette into the bottle reservoir. Bottle, screw cap, and round base are polyethylene. Graduation accuracy is Class B. Sold Individually

BEL-H37918-0109E Automatic Burette, 10 mL, 0.05 mL Graduations, 500 mL Reservoir BEL-H37918-0110E Automatic Burette, 15 mL, 0.10 mL Graduations, 500 mL Reservoir BEL-H37918-0111E Automatic Burette, 25 mL, 0.10 mL Graduations, 1000 mL reservoir BEL-H37918-0112E Automatic Burette, 50 mL, 0.10 mL Graduations, 1000 mL Reservoir

101

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

GS-6522 Tite-Rite™ Container W/ Separate White Screwcap, Clarified Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 60 mL (2 oz), Container Dimensions: Diameter: 2" (48 mm), Height: 2 3/8", 500/Case GS-6524 Tite-Rite™ Container W/ Separate White Screwcap, Clarified Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 90 mL (3 oz), Container Dimensions: Diameter: 2" (48 mm), Height: 3", 400/Case GS-6525 Tite-Rite™ Wide Mouth Container W/ Separate White Screwcap, Clarified Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 90 mL (3 oz), Container Dimensions: Diameter: 2 1/4" (53 mm), Height: 2 1/2", 300/Case GS-6527 Tite-Rite™ Container W/ Separate White Screwcap, Clarified Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 120 mL (4 oz), Container Dimensions: Diameter: 2 1/4" (53 mm), Height: 3 1/8", 300/Case GS-6540 Tite-Rite™ Container W/ Separate Yellow Screwcap, Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 250 mL (8 oz), Container Dimensions: Diameter: 3 1/2", Height: 2 1/4", 100/Case GS-6542 Tite-Rite™ Container W/ Separate Yellow Screwcap, Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 500 mL (16 oz), Container Dimensions: Diameter: 3 1/2", Height: 4 3/8", 100/Case GS-6545 Tite-Rite™ Container W/ Separate Yellow Screwcap, Polypropylene, Graduated, Capacity: 1000 mL (33 oz), Container Dimensions: 4 3/8", Height: 5 3/8", 100/Case

Fax : (514) 326 8961


4 oz (120 mL) Specimen Containers with Screw Cap

Sterile Containers: Graduated to 100 mL, individually wrapped & trilingual patient ID label (English, Spanish & French) Container = Polypropylene (PP) Cap = Polyethylene (PE)

GS-5912 4 oz Specimen Container W/ Label, Individually Wrapped, Sterile, 100/Box GS-5910 4 oz Specimen Container W/ Label, Individually Wrapped, Sterile, 200/Box GS-5915 4 oz Specimen Container, Non-Sterile, 500/Box GS-5914 4 oz Specimen Container, Non-Sterile, 100/Box GS-5916 4 oz Specimen Container W/ Affixed Thermometer & Screw Cap, Non-Sterile, 500/Box

Sample Tubes These Sample Tubes have been designed for the storage and transport of biological material. They are manufactured of non-toxic polypropylene (PP) and offer a high degree of strength and clarity. The tubes come with external threads resulting in a smooth, uniform inner surface thereby reducing the risk of contamination.

Features • Tubes withstand a temperature range of -196°C to +121°C • Round bottom tubes can be centrifuged up to 17,000 x g • Autoclavable (121°C) in an upright position with caps loosened

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Our unique 4 oz Specimen Container features the EZ-Turn 1/4 turning screw cap which is designed to assist in the prevention of carpal tunnel syndrome. The lid opens and closes with one smooth movement, which minimizes the usage of the operator’s hand and lower arm area, and reduces the stress placed on the wrist.

Non-Sterile Containers: Graduated to 100 mL & frosted writing area

Sample tubes are available in the following two types:

The screw caps for the sample tubes are made of polypropylene (PP) and are available either with or without an O-Ring.

Non-Graduated

Graduated with White Writing Area

GS-6030 1.2 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6050 1.2 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6031 2.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Round Bottom, 1000/Box

GS-6051 2.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Round Bottom, 1000/Box

GS-6032 2.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6052 2.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6033 3.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6053 3.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6034 4.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Round Bottom, 1000/Box

GS-6054 4.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Round Bottom, 1000/Box

GS-6035 4.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6055 4.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6038 5.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Round Bottom, 1000/Box

GS-6058 5.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Round Bottom, 1000/Box

GS-6039 5.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

GS-6059 5.0 mL, Polypropylene (PP), Self-Standing, 1000/Box

Screw Cap with O-Ring

Screw Cap without O-Ring

GS-6137C Screw Cap, Natural, W/ O-Ring, 1000/Box

GS-6136 Screw Cap, Natural, 1000/Box

GS-6137B Screw Cap, Blue, W/ O-Ring, 1000/Box

GS-6136B Scre Cap, Blue, 1000/Box

GS-6137G Screw Cap, Green, W/ O-Ring, 1000/Box

GS-6136G Screw Cap, Green, 1000/Box

GS-6137P Screw Cap, Pink, W/ O-Ring, 1000/Box

GS-6136R Screw Cap, Red, 1000/Box

GS-6137R Screw Cap, Red, W/ O-Ring, 1000/Box

GS-6136W Screw Cap, White, 1000/Box

GS-6137W Screw Cap, White, W/ O-Ring, 1000/Box

GS-6136Y Screw Cap, Yellow, 1000/Box

GS-6137Y Screw Cap, Yellow, W/ O-Ring, 1000/Box

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

102


GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Glass Facts Features • Maximum visibility • Impervious to permeation of gases • Shapes and volumes do not change under vacuum pressure or when handled • Recyclable • Amber glass provides UV light protection • Chemically inert • Autoclavable Cap styles also available upon request: Black Phenolic Pulp/Vinyl, Black Phenolic Polyseal™, Black Phenolic Rubber & Bottle Only Bulk packages also available

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./Case

Amber Boston Rounds Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style QOR-GLC-01904

60 (2)

20 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01926

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01947

240 (8)

24 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01977

480 (16)

28 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-02004

960 (32)

33 - 400

12

Ready to Clean Bottles are designed for users who prefer to use their own cleaning process. Ready to Clean bottles are fully assembled with polypropylene caps and a friction fit .015" Teflon® disc. Both cap and liner can be washed, heated or autoclaved depending upon your application. The Teflon® disc is chemically inert, and will not interfere with your test results.

Amber Wide Mouths Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style QOR-GLC-09083

15 (.50)

28 - 400

48

QOR-GLC-02081

30 (1)

28 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02096

60 (2)

33 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02190

120 (4)

38 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02118

250 (8.5)

45 - 400

24

Amber Boston Rounds Ready to Clean Black PP Cap & Teflon® Disc Cap Style

QOR-GLC-02135

500 (16)

53 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01920

QOR-GLC-02161

950 (32)

53 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01969

QOR-GLC-05924

1,250 (42)

70 - 400

6

QOR-01997

QOR-GLC-05941

2,500 (84)

70 - 400

12

Amber Wide Mouths Ready to Clean Black PP Cap & Teflon® Disc Cap Style

Clear Boston Rounds Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./Case

120 (4) 480 (16)

22 - 400 28 - 400

24 12

960 (32)

33 - 400

30

48

QOR-GLC-06773

15 (.50)

28 - 400

QOR-GLC-01082

30 (1)

20 - 400

48

QOR-GLC-05984

30 (1)

28 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01099

60 (2)

20 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02183

120 (4)

38 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01123

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02108

250 (8.5)

45 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01151

240 (8)

24 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02127

500 (16)

53 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01185

80 (16)

28 - 400

12

Clear Boston Rounds Ready to Clean Black PP Cap & Teflon® Disc Cap Style

QOR-GLC-01217

960 (32)

33 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-07282

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01141

240 (8)

24 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01176

480 (16)

28 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01209

960 (32)

33 - 400

12

24

Clear Standard Wide Mouths Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style QOR-GLC-01743

120 (4)

48 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01770

240 (8)

58 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01800

480 (16)

63 - 400

24

Clear Standard Wide Mouths Ready to Clean Black PP Cap & Teflon® Disc Cap Style

QOR-GLC-01833

960 (32)

70 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01738

120 (4)

48 - 400

QOR-GLC-01858

1,920 (64)

83 - 400

6

QOR-GLC-01761

240 (8)

58 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01882

3,785 (128)

89 - 400

4

QOR-GLC-01791

480 (16)

63 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01824

960 (32)

70 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01853

1920 (64)

83 - 400

6

Clear Straight Sided Rounds Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style QOR-GLC-01586

103

Ready To Clean Glass Containers

30 (1)

43 - 400

48

QOR-GLC-01611

60 (2)

53 - 400

24

Clear Straight Sided Rounds Ready to Clean Black PP Cap & Teflon® Disc Cap Style

QOR-GLC-01634

120 (4)

58 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01605

60 (2)

53 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-05919

180 (6)

63 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01627

120 (4)

58 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01672

240 (8)

70 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01655

240 (8)

58 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01692

480 (16)

89 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01665

240 (8)

70 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01721

960 (32)

89 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01708

480 (16)

63 - 400

12

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Precleaned by Vacuum & Ionization

Borosilicate Sample Vials

Contaminants such as loose dirt, carton lint, aerosols, and fine glass particles are removed by the Vacuum and Ionization process.

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Clear Sample Vials are packed in Blue Plastic Corrugate to reduce carton dust.

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Qty./ Case

Vacuum & Ionized Amber Boston Rounds Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style QOR-GLC-01906

60 (2)

20 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01928

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01950

240 (8)

24 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01979

480 (16)

28 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-02006

960 (32)

33 - 400

12

Black Phenolic Pulp/Vinyl Cap Style QOR-GLC-01919

60 (2)

20 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01940

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01968

240 (8)

24 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01994

480 (16)

28 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-02020

960 (32)

33 - 400

12

24

Vacuum & Ionized Amber Wide Mouths Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style QOR-GLC-02083

30 (1)

28 - 400

QOR-GLC-02098

60 (2)

33 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02192

120 (40)

38 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02120

250 (8.5)

45 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-02137

500 (16)

53 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-02164

950 (32)

53 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-07007

1250 (42)

70 - 400

6

QOR-GLC-07354

2500 (84)

70 - 400

12

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Dimensions

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./ Case

Amber Borosilicate Sample Vials Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style

Black Phenolic Pulp/Vinyl Cap Style QOR-GLC-02090

30 (1)

28 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-06786

1.85 (.50)

12 x 35

8 - 425

QOR-GLC-02107

60 (2)

33 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-06787

4 (1)

15 x 45

13 - 425

144

QOR-GLC-02204

120 (40)

38 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-06788

7.5 (2)

17 x 60

15 - 425

144

QOR-GLC-02126

250 (8.5)

45 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-06789

15 (4)

21 x 70

18 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-02149

500 (16)

53 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01056

20 (5)

27.75 x 57

24 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-02176

950 (32)

53 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01065

40 (10)

27.50 x 95

24 - 400

144

Vacuum & Ionized Clear Boston Rounds Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style QOR-GLC-01085 QOR-GLC-01102

30 (1) 60 (2)

144

Green PP Hole Caps & Teflon® PTFE/Silicone Septa Cap style

20 - 400 20 - 400

48 24

QOR-GLC-01058

20 (5)

27.75 x 57

24 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-01075

40 (10)

27.50 x 95

24 - 400

144

144

QOR-GLC-01126

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

Clear Borosilicate Sample Vials Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style

QOR-GLC-01154

240 (8)

24 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-00978

1.85 (.50 )

12 x 35

8 - 425

QOR-GLC-01188

480 (16)

28 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-00980

4 (1)

15 x 45

13 - 425

144

QOR-GLC-01220

960 (32)

33 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-00984

7.5 (2)

17 x 60

15 - 425

144 144

Black Phenolic Pulp/Vinyl Cap Style

QOR-GLC-00988

11 (3)

19 x 65

15 - 425

QOR-GLC-01096

30 (1)

20 - 400

48

QOR-GLC-00993

15 (4)

21 x 70

18 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-01118

60 (2)

20 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-00999

20 (5)

27.25 x 57.5

24 - 400

72

QOR-GLC-01140

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-06064*

20 (5)

27.25 x 57.5

24 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-01175

240 (8)

24 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01002

22 (6)

23 x 85

20 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-01207

480 (16)

28 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01006

22 (6)

27.25 x 70

24 - 400

72

QOR-GLC-01240

960 (32)

33 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01008

30 (8)

25 x 95

22 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-01039*

40 (10)

29.25 x 81

24 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-01022*

40 (10)

27.75 x 95

24 - 414

144

QOR-GLC-07876*

60 (15)

27.5 x 140

24 - 400

72

Vacuum & Ionized Clear Standard Wide Mouths Green Thermoset F217 & Teflon® Cap Style QOR-GLC-01746 QOR-GLC-01773

120 (4) 240 (8)

48 - 400 58 - 400

24 24

QOR-GLC-01806

480 (16)

63 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-01836

960 (32)

70 - 400

12

QOR-GLC-01861 QOR-GLC-01885

1920 (64) 3785 (128)

83 - 400 89 - 400

6 4

Green PP Hole Caps & Teflon® PTFE/Silicone Septa Cap Style QOR-GLC-01016*

20 (5)

27.25 x 57.5

24 - 400

144

QOR-GLC-01031*

40 (10)

27.75 x 95

24 - 414

144

QOR-GLC-07863*

60 (15)

27.5 x 140

24 - 400

72

*Indicates item is not available in blue plastic corrugate.

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

104


Amber & Clear Round Dropper Bottles

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

With black polypropylene hole cap with glass dropper assembly.

Polystop™ Dropper Bottle The dropper pulls out leaving the polypropylene stopper to protect the neck of the glass bottle. All parts disassemble to clean. Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./Case

Amber Round Dropper Bottles QOR-GLC-05725

60 (2)

20 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-05727

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

Clear Round Dropper Bottles QOR-GLC-05723

30 (1)

20 - 400

48

QOR-GLC-05724

60 (2)

20 - 400

24

QOR-GLC-05726

120 (4)

22 - 400

24

Natural Polypropylene Jars with White PP Unlined Cap Style

105

Features • Soft vinyl bulb • Ground standard taper neck in bottle • "Bumper" opening protects the tip of the glass dropper BEL-F11604-0030 Polystop™ Dropper Bottle 30 mL, Each BEL-F11604-0060 Polystop™ Dropper Bottle 50 mL, Each BEL-F11604-0125 Polystop™ Dropper Bottle 125 mL, Each

White Polypropylene Jars with White PP Unlined Cap Style

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./Case

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./Case

72

QOR-PLC-03693

30 (1)

43 - 400

72

QOR-PLC-07184

30 (1)

43 - 400

QOR-PLC-03697

60 (2)

53 - 400

48

QOR-PLC-07185

60 (2)

53 - 400

48

QOR-PLC-03701

120 (4)

58 - 400

36

QOR-PLC-07186

120 (4)

58 - 400

36

QOR-PLC-03704

240 (8)

89 - 400

36

QOR-PLC-07187

240 (8)

70 - 400

36

QOR-PLC-03717

480 (16)

89 - 400

24

QOR-PLC-07188

480 (16)

89 - 400

24

QOR-PLC-03720

960 (32)

120 - 400

24

QOR-PLC-07189

960 (32)

120 - 400

24

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Clear Polystyrene Jars with White PP SturdeeSeal® PE Foam Cap Style

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./Case

QOR-PLC-03724

60 (2)

53 - 400

48

QOR-PLC-03726

120 (4)

58 - 400

36

QOR-PLC-03727

240 (8)

89 - 400

36

QOR-PLC-03729

480 (16)

89 - 400

24

QOR-PLC-03730

960 (32)

120 - 400

24

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Dimensions

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./ Case

QOR-PLC-03731

18.5 (5)

25 x 50

24 mm

144

QOR-PLC-03732

26 (7)

29 x 50

28 mm

144

QOR-PLC-03733

45 (13)

33.5 x 71.5

38 mm

144

QOR-PLC-03734

60 (15)

36 x 62

43 mm

144

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Part Number

Clear Polystyrene Snap Cap Vials

HDPE Hedpaks® Natural PP Gasket Lined Cap Style

Natural HDPE Wide Mouth Rounds White PP SturdeeSeal® PE Foam Cap Style

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Dimensions

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./ Case

QOR-PLA-05975

2.5 Gallon

51 - 400

3H1/Y1.2/100

104

QOR-PLA-03326

5 Gallon

70 - 400

N/A

1

Wide Mouth Natural HDPE Lab Style Bottles Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./Case

QOR-PLC-03559

30 (1)

28 - 400

48

QOR-PLC-03566

60 (2)

33 - 400

48

QOR-PLC-03642

120 (4)

38 - 400

48

QOR-PLC-03582

250 (8.5)

53 - 400

Natural PP Linerless Cap Style

Part Number

Capacity mL (oz)

Neck Size (mm)

Qty./Case

48

QOR-PLA-03168

30 (1)

28 - 415

72

60 (2)

28 - 415

72 72

QOR-PLC-03596

500 (16)

53 - 400

24

QOR-PLA-03170

QOR-PLC-03610

950 (32)

53 - 400

12

QOR-PLA-03172

120 (4)

38 - 415

QOR-PLC-03621

2,000 (68)

89 - 400

6

QOR-PLA-03174

240 (8)

43 - 415

72

QOR-PLC-03628

3,000 (100)

89 - 400

4

QOR-PLA-03176

480 (16)

53 - 415

48

QOR-PLC-03549

3,840 (128)

89 - 400 †

4

QOR-PLA-03178

960 (32)

63 - 415

24

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

106


Eliminates Dangerous Drips

Safety-Vented™ Labeled Wash Bottles

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

A unique, patented, 2-piece valve prevents pressure build-up of solvents within the wash bottle. The volatiles are vented eliminating solvent drips. Patented value allows dispensing with bottle upright or inverted. Wash bottles are labeled with six of the most commonly used solvent names. Bottles are low-density polyethylene, closures and venting assembly are polypropylene. Note: Use only with solvents compatible with LDPE.

BEL-F11642-0622B Acetone, 500 mL (16 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11642-0612B Ethyl Acetate, 500 mL (16 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11642-0624B Isopropanol, 500 mL (16 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11642-0638B LYOB (Label Your Own Bottle), 500 mL (16 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11642-0623B Methanol, 500 mL (16 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11642-0611B Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK), 500 mL (16 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11643-0222B Acetone, 250 mL (8 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11643-0224B Isopropanol, 250 mL (8 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11643-0238B LYOB (Label Your Own Bottle), 250 mL (8 oz), 3/Bag BEL-F11643-0223B Methanol, 250 mL (8 oz), 3/Bag

Write-On™ Bottles

Fluoropolymer Bottles with Rounded Bottoms

Simplify Labeling! Large dedicated labeling areas help to standardize the way bottle contents are identified. A separate area is provided for name and a larger area allows for detail of contents or safety information and includes a defined space for date information. Bottles are molded of rugged HDPE in 500 and 1000 mL (16 & 32 oz) sizes and are available as narrow or wide mouth with leak proof polypropylene cap. Ideal for storing and transporting liquids or dry material.

Sold Individually.

FEP Wash Bottles Fluoropolymer Wash Bottles, FEP Bottles; Tefzel ETFE closure/stem and draw tube. The most chemical-resistant wash bottle. Onepiece stem and closure for leak proof service. Provides contamination-free dispensing useful for trace element work. Packaged Individually.

JIP-BTP5009-0030N Narrow Mouth PFA Bottle W/ PFA Closure, 30 mL JIP-BTP5009-0060N Narrow Mouth PFA Bottle W/ PFA Closure, 60 mL JIP-BTP5009-0125N Narrow Mouth PFA Bottle W/ PFA Closure, 125 mL JIP-BTP5009-0250N Narrow Mouth PFA Bottle W/ PFA Closure, 250 mL JIP-BTP5009-0500N Narrow Mouth PFA Bottle W/ PFA Closure, 500 mL JIP-BTP5009-1000N Narrow Mouth PFA Bottle W/ PFA Closure, 1000 mL JIP-BTF5009-0030N Narrow Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 30 mLl JIP-BTF5009-0060N Narrow Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 60 mL JIP-BTF5009-0125N Narrow Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 125 mL JIP-BTF5009-0125W Wide Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 125 mL JIP-BTF5009-0250N Narrow Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 250 mL JIP-BTF5009-0250W Wide Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 250 mL

BEL-F10660-0500B Write-On™ Bottles, 500 mL (16 oz), Narrow Mouth, 12/Bag BEL-F10660-1000B Write-On™ Bottles, 1000 mL (32 oz), Narrow Mouth, 6/Bag BEL-F10662-0500B Write-On™ Bottles, 500 mL (16 oz) Wide Mouth, 12/bag BEL-F10662-1000B Write-On™ Bottles, 1000 mL (32 oz) Wide Mouth, 6/Bag

107

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

JIP-BTF5009-0500N Narrow Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 500 mL JIP-WBT5008-125F FEP Wash Bottle, 125 mL, Each JIP-WBT5008-250F FEP Wash Bottles, 250 mL, Each JIP-WBT5008-500F FEP Wash Bottles, 500 mL, Each JIP-WBT5008-1000F FEP Wash Bottles,1000 mL, Each

JIP-BTF5009-0500W Wide Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 500 mL JIP-BTF5009-1000N Narrow Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 1000 mL JIP-GBF5009-1000W Wide Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 1000 mL JIP-BTF5009-2000N Narrow Mouth FEP Bottle W/ Tefzel Closure, 2000 mL

Fax : (514) 326 8961


PTFE Vials

PFA Vials with threaded closures designed primarily for storage of samples. Available with flat, conical and rounded inner style configurations. Some vials are molded with solid outside bottoms for use on hot plates. All vials also available in packs of 10 with tray. For vials with tray, add the letter "T" to the end of each catalog number for this configuration.

Features • Storage/shipping of valuable or aggressive materials • For small reactions at low pressure • Thick wall construction • Tapered inner walls for easy contents removal

All Plain Closure (Non-Septum) PFA vials available with PTFE liner inside closure. Add the letter "L" to the end of each catalog number for this configuration.

JIP-VIA0014-0025T PTFE Vial, 25 mL, 33 mm O.D., 78 mm Height, Each JIP-VIA0014-0050T PTFE Vial, 50 mL, 43 mm O.D., 78 mm Height, Each

Clavies® Autoclavable Bags

Safe, Convenient Biohazard Disposal For maximum protection and convenience when disposing of biohazardous wastes, Clavies® transparent, autoclave bags are made of .05 mm (.002") thick polypropylene. Fill the bag with used Petri dishes, membrane filters, culture plates, pipettes, etc., then autoclave and discard. The three largest sizes hold 65, 200 and 240 standard Petri dishes respectively. Steam autoclavable at 121°C (250°F). 100/Box, 10 Boxes/Case

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Fluoropolymer Vials

JIP-VIA5007-3VR 3 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Flat, Inner Style: Rounded, 23 mm, Plain Threaded Closure, Each JIP-VIA5007-6VRHD 6 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Flat, Inner Style: Rounded, 23 mm, Plain Threaded, Heavy Duty Closure, Each JIP-VIA5007-7VR 7 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Flat, Inner Style: Rounded, 24 mm, Plain Threaded Closure, Each JIP-VIA5007-15VR 15 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Flat, Inner Style: Rounded, 33 mm, Plain Threaded Closure, Each JIP-VIA5007-15VC 15 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Flat, Inner Style: Conical, 33 mm, Plain Threaded Closure, Each JIP-VIA5007-22VF 22 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Standard, Inner Style: Flat, 33 mm, Plain Threaded Closure, Each JIP-VIA5007-30VR 30 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Flat, Inner Style: Rounded, 33 mm, Plain Threaded Closure, Each JIP-VIA5007-30VC 30 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Flat, Inner Style: Conical, 33 mm, Plain Threaded Closure, Each JIP-VIA5007-60VF 60 mL, PFA Vials, Bottom Style: Flat, Inner Style: Flat, 33 mm, Plain Threaded Closure, Each

BEL-H13182-0810C Clavies® Autoclavable Bags, 20 x 25 cm (8" x 10"), 1000/Case BEL-H13182-0812C Clavies® Autoclavable Bags 20 x 30 cm (8" x 12"), 1000/Case BEL-H13182-0815C Clavies® Autoclavable Bags 20 x 38 cm (8" x 15"), 1000/Case BEL-H13182-1010C Clavies® Autoclavable Bags 25 x 25 cm (10" x 10"), 1000/Case BEL-H13182-1012C Clavies® Autoclavable Bags 25 x 30 cm (10" x 12"), 1000/Case BEL-H13182-1015C Clavies® Autoclavable Bags 25 x 38 cm (10" x 15"), 1000/Case

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

108


Whirl-Pak® Sterile Sampling Bags Sampling Bags with White Labeling Area Qty.: 500

Use these Sterile LDPE Bags to safely hold your solids and liquids. Easy-to-use, simply flip bag around wire/tape and bend wire to seal.

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

NA-B01067WA Capacity: 29 mL (1 oz), Size: 2.5" W x 5" L, Thickness: 2.25 mil

Features • Puncture-proof tabs ensure wire will not poke through even after extensive use • Sampling bags are available without or with a white labeling area • Guaranteed sterile • Reduced storage space • Easy identification • Leakproof closure

Sampling Bags without White Labeling Area Qty.: 500

NA-B01064WA Capacity: 58 mL (2 oz), Size: 3" W x 5" L, Thickness: 2.25 mil

NA-B01009WA Capacity: 58 mL (2 oz), Size: 3" W x 5" L,Thickness: 2.25 mil

NA-B01062WA Capacity: 118 mL (4 oz), Size: 3" W x 7.25" L, Thickness: 2.25 mil

NA-B00679WA Capacity: 118 mL (4 oz), Size: 3" W x 7.25" L, Thickness: 2.25 mil

NA-B01065WA Capacity: 532 mL (18 oz), Size: 4.5" W x 9" L, Thickness: 2.5 mil

NA-B00992WA Capacity: 207 mL (7 oz), Size: 3 .75" W x 7" L, Thickness: 3.0 mil

NA-B01297WA Capacity: 710 mL (24 oz), Size: 6" W x 9" L, Thickness: 3.0 mil

NA-B01018WA Capacity: 384 mL (13 oz), Size: 5.25" W x 7.5 " L, Thickness: 3.0 mil

NA-B01196WA Capacity: 710 mL (24 oz), Size: 6" W x 9" L, Thickness: 4.0 mil

NA-B00736WA Capacity: 532 mL (18 oz), Size: 4.5" W x 9" L, Thickness: 2.5 mil

NA-B01195WA Capacity: 1,627 mL (55 oz), Size: 7.5" W x 12" L, Thickness: 4.0 mil

NA-B01063WA Capacity: 710 mL (24 oz), Size: 6" W x 9" L, Thickness: 4.0 mil NA-B00990WA Capacity: 798 mL (27 oz), Size: 5" W x 12" L, Thickness: 3.0 mil

Stand-Up Sampling Bags Qty.: 500

NA-B00994WA Capacity: 1,065 mL (36 oz), Size: 5" W x 15" L, Thickness: 3.0 mil

NA-B01364WA Capacity: 118 mL (4 oz), Size: 3" W x 7.25" L, Thickness: 2.5 mil

NA-B01027WA Capacity: 1,242 mL (42 oz), Size: 6" W x 15" L, Thickness: 3.0 mil

NA-B01365WA Capacity: 532 mL (18 oz), Size: 4.5" W x 9" L, Thickness: 3.0 mil

"Speci-Sponge" Bags are designed to sample work surfaces and equipment for Listeria, Salmonella, and other food-borne pathogens. Contains a 38 x 76 mm (1.5" x 3") sponge that is free of bactericides and non-inhibitory, with write labeling area. The Whirl Pak® Stand-Up Bag gives you the freedom to perform important laboratory functions with both hands, because it will stand up completely by itself. The Whirl Pak® Retention Bag is used for long-term storage up to two years. Filter Bags contain a third layer of finely perforated polyethylene, which filters out the solids in the sample when used in a homogenizer blender.

Filter Bags (Contains Filter Layer) Qty.: 250 "Speci-Sponge" Bags for Environmental Surface Sampling Qty.: 100

NA-B01385WA Capacity: 207 mL (7 oz), Size: 3.75" W x 7" L, Thickness: 3.0 mil

NA-B01245WA Capacity: 532 mL (18 oz), Size: 4.5" W x 9" L, Thickness: 2.5 mil

NA-B01348WA Capacity: 710 mL (24 oz), Size: 6" W x 9" L, Thicknes s: 4.0 mil

NA-B01299WA Capacity: 1,627 mL (55 oz), Size: 7.5" W x 12" L, Thickness: 4.0 mil

NA-B01318WA Capacity: 1,627 mL (55 oz), Size: 7.5" W x 12" L, Thickness: 4.0 mil NA-B01416WA Capacity: 2.041 mL (69 oz), Size: 7.5" W x 15" L, Thickness: 4.0 mil

Sampling Bag Accessories Carrying Racks NA-B00677WA Double Grid 21 Compartment

Sampling Bag Accessories Playmate® Cooler

NA-B00678WA Double Grid 15 Compartment

NA-B00772WA Double Grid 18 Compartment Fits Regular Size Playmate® Cooler

NA-B00750WA Double Grid 30 Compartment

NA-B01109WA Double Grid 15 Compartment Fits Little Playmate® Cooler

NA-B00751WA Double Grid 12 Compartment

109

Sampling Bag Accessories Rack Tray for Shaking Incubation

NA-B01048WA Double Grid 6 Compartment (Also For Incubator Use)

Sampling Bag Accessories Rack Handle

NA-B01433WA Holds Rack NA-B00751WA, Medium Bags

NA-B01023WA Single Grid 18 Compartment

NA-B01309WA Rack Handle

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Single Scale Graduated Cylinders

BEL-F28452-0000E Single Scale Graduated Cylinders, Vol.: 10 mL, Subdivision: 0.2 mL, Each BEL-F28453-0000E Single Scale Graduated Cylinders, Vol.: 25 mL, Subdivision: 0.5 mL, Each BEL-F28454-0000E Single Scale Graduated Cylinders, Vol.: 50 mL, Subdivision: 1.0 mL, Each BEL-F28455-0000E Single Scale Graduated Cylinders, Vol.: 100 mL, Subdivision: 1.0 mL, Each

"No-Drip" Spout for Easy Pouring Graduated Beakers Griffin Low Form Polypropylene Beakers are translucent, chemical resistant and will stack without sticking together. Raised numeric graduations show approximate volume (±5%). All sizes are steam autoclavable at 121ºC (250ºF).

BEL-F26210-0000B Graduated Beakers, 50 mL, 12/Bag

BEL-F26215-0000B Graduated Beakers, 600 mL, 4/Bag

BEL-F26211-0000B Graduated Beakers, 100 mL, 12/Bag

BEL-F26216-0000B Graduated Beakers, 1000 mL, 3/Bag

BEL-F26212-0000B Graduated Beakers, 150 mL, 12/Bag

BEL-F26217-0000B Graduated Beakers, 2000 mL, 1/Bag

BEL-F26213-0000B Graduated Beakers, 250 mL, 6/Bag

BEL-F26219-0000B Graduated Beakers, 4000 mL, 1/Bag

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Roll-proof and easy to read! These Single Scale Graduated Cylinders have a single scale with raised numerals for easy reading. Flared top rims and large spouts facilitate pouring, and octagon-shaped bases provide stability. The "non-wetting" polypropylene surface eliminates concave meniscus and makes reading easier and more accurate. Chemically resistant and autoclavable at 121°C (250°F). Sold Individually.

BEL-F26214-0000B Graduated Beakers, 400 mL, 6/Bag

BEL-F28456-0000E Single Scale Graduated Cylinders, Vol.: 250 mL, Subdivision: 2.0 mL, Each BEL-F28457-0000E Single Scale Graduated Cylinders, Vol.: 500 mL, Subdivision: 5.0 mL, Each BEL-F28458-0000E Single Scale Graduated Cylinders, Vol.: 1000 mL, Subdivision: 10.0 mL, Each BEL-F28459-0000E Single Scale Graduated Cylinders, Vol.: 2000 mL, Subdivision: 20.0 mL, Each

Holdfast™ Graduated Cylinders

Large Volume Beakers 5 & 10 Liter Capacity Ideal for Pilot Plant Work These non-graduated beakers feature flared rims as well as spouts for quick, easy pouring when large volumes are handled. Made of polypropylene, they offer good chemical resistance and are steam autoclavable at 121ºC (250ºF).

Grip Handle for Steady Pouring The handle on a Holdfast™ Graduated Cylinder provides a secure, solid grip for superior control. The result is safer, more convenient pouring. The one-piece polypropylene cylinder will not create a meniscus. The "Total Contained, Total Delivered" double scale is accurate and easy to read, and the hexagonal base prevents tipping and rolling. The hand opening is 89 x 29 mm (3" x 1 1/8"). Steam autoclavable at 121°C (250°F).

BEL-F28461-1000E Holdfast™ Graduated Cylinders, 1000 mL, Each BEL-F28461-2000E Holdfast™ Graduated Cylinders, 2000 mL, Each

www.ereinc.com

BEL-F26219-0005E Large Volume Beaker, 5 Liter, Bottom O.D.: 16.5 cm (6 1/2"), Top O.D.: 21 cm (8 1/4"), Height: 26 cm (10 1⁄4"), Each BEL-F26219-0010E Large Volume Beaker, 10 Liter, Bottom O.D.: 22.2 cm (8 3/4"), Top O.D.: 26.6 cm (10 1/4"), Height: 31.1 cm (12 1/4"), Each

sales@ereinc.com

110


GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Sterilizing Trays

PTFE Thick Wall Beakers

Lightweight and Corrosion Proof Molded polypropylene trays have rounded corners and smooth, tapered sides for nesting. Ideal for sterilizing instruments and cleaning glassware. Steam autoclavable at 121°C (250°F). Sold Individually.

Features • Isostatically molded in pure, FDA approved, PTFE • Machined base for good heat transfer • Molded-in pouring spout • Totally chemically resistant and inert

JIP-BEA5001-5 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 5 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-10 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 10 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-25 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 25 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-50 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 50 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-100 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 100 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-150 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 150 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-250 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 250 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-400 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 400 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-500 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 500 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-600 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 600 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-1000 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 1000 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-2000 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 2000 mL, Each JIP-BEA5001-5000 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 5000 mL, Each

BEL-H16260-0000E Sterilizing Tray, 30 x 20 x 13 mm (12" x 7 3/4" x 5 1/8"), Each BEL-H16262-0000E Sterilizing Tray, 48 x 27 x 13 mm (19" x 10 1/2" x 5 1/8"), Each BEL-H16264-0000E Sterilizing Tray, 51 x 39 x 13 mm (20 1/4" x 15 1/2" x 5 1/8"), Each

Small Pails

Stainless Steel Storage Containers / Beakers Features • Highly non-corrosive stainless steel can be safely heated • Smooth finish provides for easy cleaning

These 7.6 Liter (8 qt) pails have an airtight lid, removable plated steel support ring and bail handle. The height is 25 cm (10") and the top I.D. is 20 cm (8"). The Scienceware® BEL-F16775-0000 pail and cover are steam autoclavable at 121°C (250°F). Packed individually.

BEL-F16771-0000E (Non-Autoclavable) White Polyethylene, Each BEL-F16775-0000E (Autoclavable) Natural Polypropylene, Each

111

JIP-BEA5001-1 PTFE Thick Wall Beakers, 1 mL, Each

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

No Pour Spout!

Part Number

Description

Dimensions (Dia. x H)

Fits Opening (IN)

Unit / Case

PW-1Y

1 1/4 Quart Bain Marie Pot

4 9/16" x 5 3/4"

4 1/4"

6

PW-2Y

2 1/6 Quart Bain Marie Pot

5 3/8" x 6 5/8"

5"

6

PW-3Y

3 Quart Bain Marie Pot

6 1/2" x 7"

6 1/16"

6

PW-4Y

4 3/4 Quart Bain Marie Pot

7 3/8" x 7 7/8"

6 13/16"

6

PW-6Y

6 1/8 Quart Bain Marie Pot

8" x 8 3/4"

7 3/8"

6

PW-8Y

8 1/4 Quart Bain Marie Pot

8 3/4" x 9 5/8"

8 1/8"

6

PW-12Y

12 1/8 Quart Bain Marie Pot

9 5/8" x 11"

9 1/8"

4

PW-1Y-2

Solid Bain Marie Covers

Cover Fits 1Y Pot

6

PW-2Y-2

Solid Bain Marie Covers

Cover Fits 2Y Pot

6

PW-3Y-2

Solid Bain Marie Covers

Cover Fits 3Y Pot

6

PW-4Y-2

Solid Bain Marie Covers

Cover Fits 4Y Pot

6

PW-6Y-2

Solid Bain Marie Covers

Cover Fits 6Y Pot

6

PW-8Y-2

Solid Bain Marie Covers

Cover Fits 8Y Pot

6

PW-12Y-2

Solid Bain Marie Covers

Cover Fits 12Y Pot

4

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Stainless Steel Graduated Measures

Stainless Steel Griffin Style Beakers Features • Seamless construction allows for safe transfer to liquids • Capacity full mark near top of beaker assures accurate measuring

Part Number

Description

Dimensions (Dia. x H)

Unit / Case

PW-T1062

16 oz Graduated Measure

3 3/4" x 4 5/8"

12

PW-T1063

32 oz Graduated Measure

4 3/4" x 5 1/4"

12

PW-T1064

64 oz Graduated Measure

5 1/2" x 6 1/2"

12

PW-125B

125 mL Griffin Style Beaker Without Handle

2 1/8" x 2 5/8"

12

PW-T1065

169 oz Graduated Measure

7" x 8 1/4"

1

PW-250B

250 mL Griffin Style Beaker Without Handle

2 5/8" x 3 1/4"

12

PW-600B

600 mL Griffin Style Beaker Without Handle

3 3/8" x 4 5/8"

6

PW-1200B

1200 mL Griffin Style Beaker Without Handle

4 1/8" x 6 1/16"

6

PW-2000B

2000 mL Griffin Style Beaker Without Handle

4 7/8" x 7 1/8"

6

PW-3000B

3000 mL Griffin Style Beaker Without Handle

5 1/2" x 8 1/4"

6

PW-4000B

4000 mL Griffin Style Beaker Without Handle

6 1/8" x 8 7/8"

4

PW-2W*

2000 mL Beaker With Closed Handle

5 1/16" x 6 5/8"

4

PW-3W*

3000 mL Beaker With Closed Handle

6 1/16" x 7"

4

PW-4W*

4000 mL Beaker With Closed Handle

6 7/8" x 8 7/8"

4

Part Number Description

Stainless Steel Funnels Features • With hanging hook & vented stem • Attached hang rings allow for convenient storage • Liquid flows smoothly through vented stem

Dimensions (Dia. x H)

Unit / Case

*No capacity mark

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Features • Graduated in ounces and cc's, measures have easy grip handles and large, smooth pouring spouts

Stainless Steel Lab / Utility Scoops Part Number Description

Dimensions (Dia. x H)

Stem Dimensions

Features • Heavy duty scoop has seamless body and strong, tubular handle for easy handling and cleaning

Unit / Case

PW-T1803F

2 3/8 oz Utility Funnel 3" x 3 3/4"

1/2" Dia. x 1 1/2" Long

6

PW-T1804F

6 3/8 oz Utility Funnel 4 1/8" x 4 7/8"

1/2" Dia. x 1 1/2" Long

6

PW-T1805F

13 oz Utility Funnel

5 1/8" x 5 5/8"

1/2" Dia. x 1 1/2" Long

6

PW-T1806F

22 1/4 oz Utility Funnel 6 1/4" x 6 5/8"

1/2" Dia. x 1 1/2" Long

6

PW-T1807F

32 oz Utility Funnel

7" x 8 3/8"

7/8" Dia. x 2 5/8" Long

6

PW-T1808F

64 oz Utility Funnel

8 3/8" x 9 1/2"

7/8" Dia. x 2 5/8" Long

3

Stainless Steel Solution Pails PW-T7009 Stainless Steel Lab / Utility Scoops, Capacity: 5 oz, Dimensions (Dia. x H): 5’’ x 2 1/2’’, Length: 9 1/2’’, Each PW-T7010 Stainless Steel Lab / Utility Scoops, Capacity: 40 oz, Dimensions (Dia. x H): 5’’ x 7 1/2’’, Length: 12’’, Each

Features • Pails are tapered for easy pouring. "Ears" for handles are an integral part of pail, resisting breakoff and allowing for easy cleaning

Stainless Steel Iodine / Oil Cups Features • Easily held during procedures

Part Number

Description

Dimensions (Dia. x H)

Unit / Case

PW-12N

13 Quart Bucket

11 5/8" x 9 1/4"

3

PW-16N

16 Quart Bucket

11 3/4" x 10 1/8"

3

PW-T20N

20 Quart Bucket

13 3/4" x 11 13/16"

3

www.ereinc.com

PW-6G Stainless Steel Iodine / Oil Cups, Capacity: 6 oz, Dimensions (Dia. x H): 3 7/16’’ x 2’’, Each PW-14G Stainless Steel Iodine / Oil Cups, Capacity: 14 oz, Dimensions (Dia. x H): 4 3/8’’ x 2 5/8’’, Each

sales@ereinc.com

112


Vibrasorb® Vibration Damping Mounts

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

No-Wire™ Autoclavable Test Tube Racks A great alternative to wire racks, with price and space saving advantages over other plastic racks currently available. These submersible racks are molded of a special blend of autoclavable polypropylene. They will sink in a water bath and maintain their stability even in agitated water. No-Wire™ racks are also perfect for use outside the water bath, and meet the exacting needs of daily usage in the lab. Supplied in numerous hole sizes, the racks are available in three colors for safety and identification in the lab. Each rack features end plates for labeling as well as numbered and lettered rows for tube identification. Interlocking feet allow stacking of racks for storage. The grid form base has holes 2.16 mm (.085") square. Assembly takes only seconds with fold up sides and end bars that lock into rack tops. Outside dimensions are all the same at 246 x 104 x 64 mm high (9.7" x 4.1" x 2.5"). Steam autoclavable at 121°C (250°F). Sold Individually. White

Red

Blue

Hold Tubes

Places

Rows

BEL-F18745-0000E

BEL-F18746-0000E

BEL-F18747-0000E

13 mm

90

6 x 15

BEL-F18745-0001E

BEL-F18746-0001E

BEL-F18747-0001E

16 mm

60

5 x 12

BEL-F18745-0002E

BEL-F18746-0002E

BEL-F18747-0002E

20 mm

40

4 x 10

BEL-F18745-0003E

BEL-F18746-0003E

BEL-F18747-0003E

25 mm

24

3x8

BEL-F18745-0004E

BEL-F18746-0004E

BEL-F18747-0004E

30 mm

21

3x7

Poxygrid® Labware Drain Stand Three rows of hairpin-loop supports (14 in all) hold labware with 18 mm I.D. necks or larger. The top row has 12 straight pins 102 mm (4") long to accommodate smaller items. A polystyrene tray at the bottom catches water as labware drains. The legs of the stand have rubber tipped feet for non-skid use on a tabletop, or the stand may be wall mounted using wire loops on the back. 43 x 17 x 48 cm H (16 3/4" x 6 1/2" x 19" H). Shipping weight 2 kg (4 1/2 lbs).

Stopcocks 2-Way and 3-Way Connections With a removable leak-proof plug made of chemical-resistant, non-stick Teflon® PTFE, these Polypropylene Stopcocks have serrated tubulations that accept 6.4 mm to 9.5 mm (1/4" to 3/8") I.D. tubing. 3-way models allow connection of any two or all three arms. Pressure rating is 240 KPa (35 psi). Sold Individually.

BEL-F30891-0000E Stopcock, 2-Way, Bore Size: 4 mm, Each BEL-F30894-0000E Stopcock, 3-Way, Bore Size: 2 mm, Each

113

BEL-F30895-0000E Stopcock, 3-Way, Bore Size: 4 mm, Each

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

BEL-H18386-0000 Vibrasorb® Vibration, 45 x 56 cm (18" x 22"), 39 kg (87 lbs) BEL-H18386-0001 Vibrasorb® Vibration, 35 x 35 cm (13 3/4" x 13 3/4"), 19 kg (42 lbs)

Cleanware™ Aqua-Clear™

BEL-F30890-0000E Stopcock, 2-Way, Bore Size: 2 mm, Each

BEL-H18805-0000 Poxygrid® Labware Drain Stand

Vibrasorb® Damping Mounts isolate sensitive analytical balances and other instruments from vibrations caused by nearby equipment such as pumps, stirrers, and blenders. Molded of dense black & white terrazzo, these 64 mm (2 1/2") thick platforms are supported on four VibroAbsorber™ cushions and neoprene feet and support up to 16 kg (35 lbs). The larger size Damping Mount will absorb vibrations down to 13 Hz. The smaller size Damping Mount will absorb vibrations down to 16 Hz with a 16 kg (35 lbs) load. With lighter loads, the minimum frequency of damping will increase to a value between 16 Hz and 25 Hz. A polished surface resists scratches and chemical attack. Overall height is 76 mm (3"). Available in two sizes.

Water Conditioner Aqua-Clear™ Water Conditioner stabilizes water in water baths and other water systems. Just 2 mL per liter of water provides long lasting protection against the growth of algae, bacteria and molds which often contaminate standing water. It also protects pumps and thermostats and helps prevent tubing from clogging. In addition, it may be added to water used in developer for color or X-ray films. It will not harm the film and permits longer use of the same solution. Aqua-Clear™ Water Conditioner adds a blue tint to the water which will fade after about 3 months reminding you to change the water and add new conditioner. 100 mL polyethylene bottle with cap. BEL-F17093-0000E Cleanware™ Aqua-Clear™, Each

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Biohazard Disposal Bags For an economical solution to biohazard waste disposal, use Scienceware® Biohazard Disposal Bags. Made of High Molecular Weight, High-Density (HMHD) polyethylene, these translucent bags can be used for the safe disposal of used pipettes, Petri dishes, culture plates, membrane filters and more. Biohazard Disposal Bags can be autoclaved at a maximum of 121°C (250°F) and discarded. The bags are .03 mm (.0012") thick and are made from material which meets or exceeds the dartimpact test requirement of 165 grams per ASTM D1709-98.

Printed with Sterilization Indicator Patch BEL-F13160-0009 Biohazard Disposal Bags W/ Label, Size: 30 x 61 cm (12" x 24"), 1/2 to 1 Gallon, 100/Box BEL-F13161-0009 Biohazard Disposal Bags W/ Label, Size: 61 x 76 cm (24" x 30"), 10 to 12 Gallons, 100/Box BEL-F13162-0009 Biohazard Disposal Bags W/ Label, Size: 61 x 91 cm (24" x 36"), 15 to 20 Gallons, 100/Box

Cleanware™ Laboratory Waste Bags Disposable waste bags with an adhesive strip across the top free bench or hood space when hung from walls, cabinets or virtually anywhere. Simply peel off the backing and hang close to your work area. The back panel is longer than the front for easy opening. White bags are made of High Molecular Weight High Density (HMHD) polyethylene which is steam autoclavable at 121°C (250°F). Maximum weight of contents should not exceed 1.36 kg (3 lbs).

Biohazard Disposal Bags - Orange-Red Orange-Red Biohazard Bags feature a printed sterilization patch that darkens when subjected to steam sterilization. A large black biohazard symbol and precautionary procedures printed in four languages are clearly visible for added safety. Made of High Molecular Weight, High-Density (HMHD) polyethylene and steam autoclavable to 121°C (250°F).

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

With Biohazard Warning Label; Look for the Sterilization Indicator Patch. Biohazard Disposal Bags are available with a printed sterilization patch that darkens when subjected to steam sterilization. The bags are printed with the standard biohazard warning symbol and precautionary procedures in four languages: English, French, German, and Spanish.

BEL-F13164-1419 Biohazard Disposal Bags, Thickness: .0317 mm, Size: 36 x 48 cm (14" x 19"), 2 to 4 Gallons, 200/Box BEL-F13164-1923 Biohazard Disposal Bags, Thickness: .0317 mm, Size: 48 x 58 cm (19" x 23"), 6 to 9 Gallons, 200/Box BEL-F13164-2535 Biohazard Disposal Bags, Thickness: .0317 mm, Size: 64 x 89 cm (25" x 35"), 10 to 12 Gallons, 200/Box BEL-F13164-3138 Biohazard Disposal Bags, Thickness: .0381 mm, Size: 79 x 97 cm (31" x 38"), 20 to 30 Gallons, 200/Box

Super Strength Biohazard Disposal Bags Extra Strength, High Impact, High Temperature Bags Reduce Autoclave Time Protect against dangerous tears and leaks with extra strong, high impact biohazard disposal bags. The orange-red bags are printed with the standard biohazard warning symbol and precautionary procedures in four languages: English, French, German and Spanish. Extra heavyduty bags are .05 mm (.002") thick blended polymer, autoclavable to 138°C (280°F) and feature a sterilization indicator patch that darkens when exposed to steam sterilization. Extra large sizes available, ask for a quotation.

BEL-F13165-1419 Super Strength Biohazard Disposal Bags, Size: 36 x 48 cm, (14" x 19"), 2 to 4 Gallons, 200/Box BEL-F13174-1008 Cleanware™ Laboratory Waste Bags, Size: 203 x 254 mm (8" x 10"), 50 bags/box BEL-F13174-1012 Cleanware™ Laboratory Waste Bags, Size: 305 x 406 mm (12" x 16"), 50 bags/box

www.ereinc.com

BEL-F13165-1923 Super Strength Biohazard Disposal Bags, Size: 48 x 58 cm, (19" x 23"), 6 to 9 Gallons, 200/Box BEL-F13165-2535 Super Strength Biohazard Disposal Bags, Size: 64 x 89 cm, (25" x 35"), 10 to 12 Gallons, 200/Box BEL-F13165-3138 Super Strength Biohazard Disposal Bags, Size: 79 x 96 cm, (31" x 38"), 20 to 30 Gallons, 200/Box

sales@ereinc.com

114


Broken Glass Disposal Boxes

Biohazard Incinerator Cartons

Maintain a safe lab with this sturdy corrugated cardboard receptacle. The box is supplied with a 2 mil thick polyethylene bag to contain broken glass fragments and spilled liquids. When the box is full, the safety cap is pulled into place and the entire unit is ready for disposal. The Broken Glass Disposal Box is printed with eye-catching graphics in four languages (English, German, French, Spanish). It is packaged flat to save space and shipping costs and is quickly assembled. Available in two sizes. The floor model holds 18 kg (40 lbs) of waste. The benchtop model holds 5.5 kg (12 lbs). Does not qualify as a DOT container.

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

No Need to Transfer Contents! Safe disposal and incineration of biohazard waste is simple and convenient with the Scienceware Biohazard Incinerator Carton. The entire carton is designed to be burned along with its contents. The corrugated cardboard receptable is supplied with a 0.038 mm (0.0015") thick High Molecular Weight, HighDensity (HMHD) polyethylene biohazard bag. A pair of tabs along the top edge keeps the bag from slipping out of place. The snug-fitting lid has a flap for easily inserting waste material. When the box is filled, the safety cap is pulled into place and the entire unit is ready for incineration. The Incinerator Carton features large, colourful biohazard graphics and instructions in four languages; English, French, German and Spanish. Packed flat to save space and shipping costs, the carton can be assembled in seconds. Available in two sizes. Features • Bag and contents protected within cardboard carton • Entire carton with its contents is intended to be burned • Fixed lid has a flap to cover and contain contents and odors

BEL-F24653-0001 Model: Floor, 30 L x 30 W x 69 cm H (12" L x 12" W x 27" H), 6.8 kg (15 lbs), 6/Pack BEL-F24653-0002 Model: Benchtop, 20 L x 20 W x 25 cm H (8" L x 8" W x 10" H), 3.2 kg (7 lbs), 6/Pack

Virgin TFE Lab Tape Clear Protective Lab Labeling Tapes

This Tape Stays Put! Go ahead, freeze it, autoclave it, even spill acids, alkalies and organic solvents on it. This tape stays put! It is resistant to chemicals and moisture. Provides great versatility for heavy-duty lab use. Test results prove that it remains securely affixed with no discoloration after being autoclaved for 40 minutes at 125°C (258°F), as well as after one week in liquid nitrogen at 196°C (-384°F). Clear polyester tapes are 1 mil (.001"), (.025 mm) thick with 1 mil of acrylic adhesive. Rolls are 32.9 meters (36 yards) long.

Features • Made from 100% Virgin Teflon PTFE • Use where non-contamination standards are high, including environmental, water, oil, chemical, medical and food processing applications • No pigments or additives • Excellent thread seal tape • Density = .4 • 3 mil thick • Temperature range of - 450°F to + 550°F • Meets or exceeds Mil Spec. T-27730A • Conveniently packaged 3 rolls/bag

JIP-TAP5075-25-5203 Virgin PTFE Lab Tape, 1/4" W x 520" L, 3 Rolls/Pack JIP-TAP5075-05-5203 Virgin PTFE Lab Tape, 1/2" W x 520" L, 3 Rolls/Pack

BEL-F13205-0001 Model: Floor, 30.5 L x 30.5 W x 68.5 H cm (12" L x 12" W x 27" H), 6/Pack BEL-F13205-0002 Model: Benchtop, 19.6 L x 19.6 W x 25.4 H cm (8" L x 8" W x 10" H), 6/Pack

115

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

JIP-TAP5075-75-5203 Virgin PTFE Lab Tape, 3/4" W x 520" L, 3 Rolls/Pack BEL-F13453-0020C Clear Protective Lab Labeling Tapes, 51 mm (2") Wide, (3 Rolls Required For 1000, 76 mm (3") Long Labels), 24/Case

JIPTAP5075-1-5203 Virgin PTFE Lab Tape, 1" W x 520" L, 3 Rolls/Pack

Fax : (514) 326 8961


A. Screw Clamp This tubing clamp offers on/off and fine control so accurate that it replaces stopcocks in many applications. It may be put in place without disconnecting tubing or interrupting your operation. Molded of DelrinÂŽ plastic, the clamp is autoclavable and resistant to acids, alkalies and organic solvents. Accepts flexible tubing up to 14 mm (1/2") O.D.

Clamp Your Tube In Place! GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

B. Spring Tubing Clamps Perfect for all flexible tubing, this positiveaction, self-closing clamp opens by squeezing the handles together. Made of chemical and stain-resistant DelrinÂŽ plastic and stainless steel.

C. Tubing Clamp Strong acetal plastic clamp with serrated jaws provides secure closure on tubing with a wall of .82 mm (1/32") or thinner. The open clamp slides over tubing for easy installation at any point and may be left clipped in an open position for convenient storage without constricting flow. It locks when closed and springs open when the locking tab is released. Jaws are 27 mm (1 1/16") long; total length is 59 mm (2 5/16") long.

BEL-F18212-0000B A. Screw Clamp, 3/Bag BEL-H18213-0000B B. Spring Tubing Clamps Fits Tubing O.D. Up To 8 mm (5/16"), 3/Bag BEL-H18214-0000B B. Spring Tubing Clamps Fits Tubing O.D. Up To 12 mm (15/32"), 3/Bag BEL-F18218-0000B C. Tubing Clamp, 12/Bag

Disposable Gloves RONCO SILKTEX

Portable Glove Box System Economical containment barrier unit ideal for isolating material to be processed. The operator and the ambient environment are protected with this lightweight, self-contained portable isolation cabinet. A large acrylic window with glove ports permits safe viewing of operations, and the 8" diameter side port allows easy insertion of material and equipment. Included large size neoprene gloves provide good protection against gas, liquid or solid penetration and are secured to the glove box with clamping rings. Body molded from LDPE with round corners throughout for easy cleaning. Overall dimensions 68.5 W x 33 D x 55 cm H (27" W x 13" D x 22" H). Shipping weight 38 lbs. BEL-H50028-2000 Glove Box System Fully Assembled W/ 1 Pair Of Gloves & 2 Clamping Rings, Ready To Use BEL-H50028-0000 Glove Box Only BEL-H50029-0000 Neoprene Gloves Replacement (Size Large), For BEL-H50028 Only BEL-H50029-0200 Clamping Rings Replacement For BEL-H50028 Only

www.ereinc.com

Latex Examination Gloves 5 mil thickness

Powder Free

Lightly Powdered

RO-819 SILKTEX, Size X-Small, 100/Box

RO-519 SILKTEX, Size X-Small, 100/Box

RO-829 SILKTEX, Size Small, 100/Box

RO-529 SILKTEX, Size Small, 100/Box

RO-839 SILKTEX, Size Medium, 100/Box

RO-539 SILKTEX, Size Medium, 100/Box

RO-849 SILKTEX, Size Large, 100/Box

RO-549 SILKTEX, Size Large, 100/Box

RO-859 SILKTEX, Size X-Large, 100/Box

RO-559 SILKTEX, Size X-Large, 100/Box

"Evaluated & accepted by CFIA"

"Evaluated & accepted by CFIA"

sales@ereinc.com

116


FEP Bench/Surface Protector

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Features • Corrosion resistant • Self-adhesive • Easy to apply • Easy to clean • Impact absorbing • Attractive

JIP-PROT18-2515 General Purpose Type PROT18 Surface Protector, Vinyl Backed FEP Material, 25’’ Wide x 15 ft JIP-PROT12-2515 High Temp Foil Surface Protector - Standard Roll, Backed FEP, 25’’ Wide x 15 ft

Labmat™ Liner & Sheets White or Biohazard Safety Orange Disposable Labmat™ Bench Liner speeds clean-up and safeguards work surfaces from stains, spills and wear. The highly absorbent upper surface traps water, dyes, corrosive chemicals and radioactive solutions. The flexible polyethylene film backing is non-skid and prevents soak-through of most solutions. The entire sheet can be rolled up and discarded after contamination.

Labmat™ Liner is 50.8 cm (20") wide and is packed in 15.2 m (50 ft) rolls, each in a handy dispenser carton. Required footage is easily cut off with scissors while the roll is retained in the dispenser. 6 Rolls (In Dispenser Cartons)/Case Cut sheets package 100/Box BEL-F24675-0000C White, 50 ft Roll, 6 Rolls/Case BEL-F24675-1000C Safety Orange For Biohazard Designated Use, 50 ft Roll, 6 Rolls/Case BEL-F24675-0020C Cut Sheets, White Only, 50.8 x 61 cm (20" x 24"), 100/Box

Polyurethane Sleeves

Shoe Covers

Features 100% Polyurethane, length: 19.5", colour: white, blue or yellow, thickness: 5.5 mil, heavy duty strength, easy to clean, resistant to wide of variety of chemicals, acids, oils, fuels, solvents, detergents, and alcohols

Features • 100% polypropylene • Colour: blue • Anti-slip strips • Durable

RO-39-368W White Polyurethane Sleeves, 100/Case

RO-1991S Shoe Covers, Small, 1000/Case

RO-39-368B Blue Polyurethane Sleeves, 100/Case

RO-1991 Shoe Covers, Regular, 1000/Case

RO-39-368Y Yellow Polyurethane Sleeves, 100/Case

RO-1991XL Shoe Covers, X-Large, 1000/Case

"Evaluated & accepted by CFIA"

21" Cova-Cap Pleated Bouffant

RO-771 White Cova-Cap, 1000/Case

Features 100% non-woven polypropylene, pleated, latex free, diameter: 21" or 24", colour: blue, green, pink, white or yellow, soft elastic headband for maximum protection and hair retention, fluid resistant, lightweight and breathable, ideal for department colour coding

RO-773 Yellow Cova-Cap, 1000/Case RO-775 Blue Cova-Cap, 1000/Case RO-777 Pink Cova-Cap, 1000/Case RO-779 Green Cova-Cap, 1000/Case

24" RO-781 White Cova-Cap, 1000/Case RO-785 Blue Cova-Cap, 1000/Case

117

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


Biodegradable, Concentrated & Residue Free! Powdered Precision Cleaner Concentrated, anionic detergent for manual and ultrasonic cleaning. Free rinsing to give you reliable results without interfering residues. Ideal for cleaning contaminants from glassware, metals, plastic, ceramic, porcelain, rubber and fiberglass. Excellent replacement for corrosive acids and hazardous solvents. USDA authorized. Dilute 1:100. pH 9.5. AL-1104-1 4 Pound Box AL-1112-1 Dispenser Box, (50 x 1/2 oz)

TERGAZYME Enzyme Active Powdered Detergent Concentrated, anionic detergent with protease enzyme for manual and ultrasonic cleaning. Excellent for removal of proteinaceous soils, tissue, blood, and body fluids from glassware, metals, plastic, ceramic, porcelain, rubber and fiberglass with no interfering residues. Ideal as a cleaning agent in Reverse Osmosis and UltraFiltration Systems. USDA authorized. Dilute 1:100. pH 9.5.

Low Foaming Critical Detergent Low foaming, heavy-duty alkaline detergent for use in labware washers, parts washers, powerspray systems, and ultrasonic cleaning systems. Concentrated, highly emulsifying and penetrating formula is free rinsing, and leaves no interfering residues. Protects interior working parts of washers. USDA authorized. Dilute 1:100. pH 13. AL-1632-1 1 Quart (Plastic Bottle) AL-1601-1 1 Gallon (Plastic Bottle)

TERGAJET Low Foaming Phosphate Free Powdered Detergent Nonionic, low foaming phosphate free powdered cleaner for use in labware washers, manual and ultrasonic cleaning. Corrosion inhibited formula recommended for glassware, metals, plastic, ceramic, porcelain, rubber and fiberglass. Free rinsing for reliable results and no interfering residues. Passes inhibitory residue test Dilute 1:200. pH 11.5. AL-2204-1 4 Pound Box

LIQUINOX

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

ALCONOX

DETOJET

Critical Cleaning Liquid Detergent Concentrated, anionic liquid detergent for manual and ultrasonic cleaning. Free rinsing to yield reliable results with no interfering residues. Extremely mild and completely soluble in hard and soft water. USDA authorized. Dilute 1:100. pH 8.5. AL-1232-1 1 Quart (Plastic Bottle)

AL-1304-1 4 Pound Box

AL-1201-1 1 Gallon (Plastic Bottle)

CITRAJET Low Foaming Liquid Acid Cleaner Low foaming, phosphate-free, concentrated, liquid cleaner and metal brightener for high performance removal of metal oxides, scale, salts and inorganic residues in labware washers, parts washers, power-spray systems and manual and ultrasonic cleaning. Corrosion inhibit-ed and free rinsing leaving no interfering residues. Ideal for acid washing and rinsing. Dilute 2:100. pH 2.5. AL-2001-1 1 Gallon

CITRANOX Liquid Acid Cleaner and Detergent Phosphate free, concentrated cleaner and metal brightener for high performance removal of metal oxides, scale, salts and inorganic residues in manual and ultrasonic cleaning. Corrosion inhibited and free rinsing for reliable results and no interfering residues. Ideal for trace metal analysis. USDA authorized. Dilute 2:100. pH 2.5. AL-1801-1 1 Gallon (Plastic Bottle)

ALCOJET

SOLUJET

Low Foaming Powdered Detergent Nonionic, low foaming cleaner for use in labware washers, parts washers, power-spray systems, manual and ultrasonic cleaning. Corrosion inhibited formula recommended for glassware, metals, plastic, ceramic, porcelain, rubber and fiberglass. Free rinsing for reliable results and no interfering residues. USDA authorized. Dilute 1:200. pH 12.

Low Foaming Phosphate Free Detergent Nonionic, low foaming phosphate free liquid cleaner for use in labware washers, manual and ultrasonic cleaning. Corrosion inhibited formula recommended for glassware, metals, plastic, ceramic, porcelain, rubber and fiberglass. Free rinsing for reliable results and no interfering residues. Passes inhibitory residue test Dilute 1:200. pH 12.4.

AL-1404-1 4 Pound Box

AL-2101-1 1 Gallon (Plastic Bottle)

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

118


GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Detergent Selection Guide Application Key Concerns

Articles Cleaned/ Soil Removed

Cleaning Method

Recommended Powder

Cleaner Liquid

Healthcare/Veterinary Effective preparation for sterilization, longer instrument life. Reduce waste.

Surgical, anaesthetic, and examining instruments and equipment. Catheters and tubes. Blood, body fluids, tissue on instruments.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine washer, sani-sterilizer Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak

ALCONOX ALCOJET TERGAZYME

LIQUINOX (p-free) DETOJET

Pharmaceutical/Medical Device/Biotechnology Passing cleaning validation for FDA good manufacturing practices. For stainless steel, glass, plastic, elastomer cleaning.

Titanium dioxide, petrolatum, oils, emulsions, ointments, carbopols, lacquers, zinc oxides, proteins, steroids, alcohols, sugars, and Eudragit* (L/S/L30/D55/NE30D) polymers.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine washer, power wash, CIP

ALCONOX ALCOJET TERGAJET (p-free)

Inorganic residues, salts, metallics, pigments. Eudragit* (E/RL/RS/E100) polymers, amphoterics, coatings, amines, ethers, starches, alkaloids.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine washer, power wash, CIP

Protein/ferment residues. R/O, U/F membranes.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak

TERGAZYME

SOLUJET (p-free)

Glass, metal, plastic labware, ceramics, tissue culture, porcelain, clean rooms, animal cages, bioreactors, tubing, benches, safety equipment.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine, power spray, labware washer, washer-sterilizer, cage-washers

ALCONOX ALCOJET TERGAJET (p-free)

LIQUINOX (p-free) DETOJET SOLUJET (p-free)

Tubes, reusable pipets.

Siphon-type washer-rinsers

Microbiology, water lab, and environmental sampling. Phosphate-sensitive labware. EPA procedures. (Acid for water rinse cycle.)

Field, Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine washer, labware washer

TERGAJET (p-free) TERGAJET

LIQUINOX (p-free) SOLUJET-base CITRAJET-acid

Radioactive equipment/contaminants. Stopcock grease.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine washer, warewasher

ALCONOX ALCOJET

LIQUINOX SOLUJET

Trace metals, metal oxides, scale, salts, starches, amines.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine washer, warewasher

Proteinaceous soils, bio-wastes, tissue, blood and other body fluids, fermentation residues.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Glassware washer

TERGAZYME ALCOJET

Glass, ceramic, porcelain, stainless steel, plastic, rubber. Oils, chemicals, particulates.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine washer, power wash

Aluminum, brass, copper, and other soft metal parts. Oils, chemicals, particulates (acid for oxides, salts, buffing compound).

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak

ALCONOX ALCOJET TERGAJET (p-free) ALCONOX TERGAJET (p-free) ALCOJET TERGAJET (p-free)

Inorganics, metallic complexes, trace metals and oxides, scale, salts, metal brightening.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Parts washer, power wash

LIQUINOX (p-free) DETOJET SOLUJET (p-free) LIQUI-NOX-base CITRANOX-acid SOLUJET-base CITRAJET-acid CITRANOX CITRAJET

Silicone oils, mold-release agents, buffing compounds.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Parts washer, pressure spray

ALCONOX ALCOJET

CITRANOX SOLUJET (p-free)

Delicate substrates/neutral for waste.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine wash, pressure spray

LUMINOX (Neutral pH)

Circuit boards, assemblies, screens, parts, conductive residues, resins, rosins, fluxes, particulates, salts.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine washer, power spray board and screen washers

DETERGENT 8

Ceramic insulators and components.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Parts washers

ALCONOX ALCOJET

LIQUINOX (p-base) SOLUJET

Stainless steel, food-contact equipment.

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine wash, pressure wash, CIP Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak Machine wash, pressure wash, CIP Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak

ALCONOX ALCOJET

LIQUINOX DETOJET CITRANOX CITRAJET

Manual, Ultrasonic, Soak

ALCONOX

LIQUI-NOX-base CITRANOX-acid

Parts washers, power spray

ALCOJET

SOLUJET-base CITRAJET-acid

Laboratory/Environmental Reproducible results, no interfering residues, extending equipment life. Keep laboratory accreditation. Laboratory safety.

Metalworking, Precision Manufacturing, and Optics Clean parts, avoid volatile solvents, strong acids, and other hazardous chemicals.

Electronics Avoid conductive residues, avoid CFCs, pass cleaning criteria.

Food and Dairy Avoid interfering residues on food-contact equipment.

Oxides, scale, trace metals, salts, milkstone. Filter membranes. Proteins/biofouling.

Cosmetics Avoid crosscontamination.

Nuclear Avoid waste interference

Product contact surfaces (acids for pigments and salts).

Reactor cavities, pipes, tools, protective equip

Parts washer, power wash

LIQUINOX (p-free) SOLUJET (p-free)

CITRANOX CITRAJET

ALCOTABS (tablets)

CITRANOX CITRAJET

SOLUJET

TERGAZYME

Manual, Soak, Spray

DETERGENT 8

p-free=phosphate-free

More Detergent Cleaners Available ... Call for Your Free Sample! 119

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


We also carry... Jars and Containers

Graduated Cylinders and Beakers

Detergent Cleaners

Instrumentation

Water Testing Equipment

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Pipettors and Pipettes

www.ereinc.com

sales@ereinc.com

120


Filtration

GENERAL LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Laboratory Gloves

Sieves

We carry supplies for all your laboratory needs. Call for more information! 121

Phone : 1 888 287 3732

Fax : (514) 326 8961


I

A Air Sampling

1

Immersion Circulators

Sampling for Gel-Impaction Slides

1

Incubators

Sampling for Viable Bioaerosols

1

Inverted Microscopes

Anaerobic Chambers

2

Autoclaves

3

14 27-31 36

J

Bags

44

108-109, 114

Balances

K

4-11

Baths & Circulators

12-15

Baths

Knife Mills

46

12-13

Immersion Circulators

14

Cooling & Heating Circulator Baths

15

Beakers

110-112

Bottles

103-107

L Leaf Spectrometers

61 M

C Microscopes Cabinets

25-26

32-43

Elite Compound Microscopes

Carbon dioxide testing

53

Compound Microscopes

Cell Disruptors

83

Inverted Microscopes

Centrifuge tubes

17

Zoom Stereomicroscopes

32 33-35 36 37-38

Elite Microscope Cameras

38

Circulator Baths

15

Basic Microscope Cameras

39

Colony Counters

95

Meiji Techno Microscopes

Centrifuges

16-23

Compound Microscopes

33-35

Consistometers

40-43

Microscope Accessories

43

81

Containers Cryoscopes Cutting Mills

101-108

Mills & Grinders

24

Jaw Crushers

46

Rotor Mills

44-49 44 44-45

Cutting Mills D

46

Knife Mills

46

Disc Mills

47

Mortar Grinders Desiccators

94-95

Detergents

118-119

Disc Mills

47

50

Ethylene Gas Analyzer

64

47-48

Planetary Ball Mills

48-49

Mixer Mills

47-48

Molecular Biology

50-51

E Electrophoresis Systems

47

Mixer Mills

Electrophoresis Systems & Transilluminators

50

Thermal Cyclers

51

Mortar Grinders

47

O F

Osmometers

24

Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Testing Fume Hoods & Cabinets

52-53

25-26 P G pH

General Laboratory Supplies Gloves Graduated Cylinders

93-121 116 110,112

Photosynthesis System Pipettors Planetary Ball Mills Plant Canopy Imager

54-60 63 96-100 48-49 61

Plant Physiology

61-65

Polarimeters

72-73

INDEX

Jaw Crushers

B


R Racks

97,113

Refractometers

66-73

Refractometers

66-71

Polarimeters

72-73

Root Imagers

65

INDEX

Rotor Mills

44-45

S Saccharimeters

73

Sampling Tubes

102

Sampling for Gel-Impaction Slides

1

Sampling for Viable Bioaerosol

1

Scales

4-11

Shakers & Stirrers

77-80

Sieves & Sieve Shakers

74-76

Stainless Steel

111-112

Surface Tension

81

T Tapes

115

Thermal Cyclers

51

Transilluminators

50

U Ultrasonic Sonifiers & Baths

82-85

Ultrasonics

82-83

Ultrasonic Cleaners

84-85

W Water Analysis

86-89

Water Baths

12-13

Water Purification

90-92

Z Zoom Stereomicroscopes

37-38


Don`t miss out!

Request your FREE PureSample and Enviro-Rentals Catalogs today! Toll free:

1-888-287-3732 ENVIRO-RENTALS Did you know that ERE offers sampling, monitoring and remediation equipment rentals for your projects?

PureSample Vol. 4 Offering a wide range of products in a vast 330 pages, PureSample catalog is becoming the single source supplier for sampling and monitoring of air, groundwater, wastewater and soil. Table of Contents • Air Sampling • Air Monitoring • Environmental Monitoring • Water Sampling • Water Monitoring • Laboratory • Hydrocardon Sampling & Recovery • Sludge & Sediment Sampling

• • • • • • • •

Powder & Solid Sampling Soil Sampling Soil Monitoring Field Supplies & Accessories Maintenance Health & Safetly Books Filtration / Remediation

Advantages of our Rental Program • No maintenance and calibration costs for you • Calibration certified by ERE • Rent by day, week, or month • ERE does not charge on weekends or days of transport • You don’t need space for storage of rental equipment • Gives you an option of trying equipment prior to an eventual purchase • Choose from a vast variety of equipment required specifically catered to your site needs

4


8605, Champ d’Eau Montreal, Quebec, H1P 3B8, CANADA Tel: (514) 326 8852 • Fax: (514) 326 8961 Phone: 1 888 287 3732 Web: www.ereinc.com Email: sales@ereinc.com

PLEASE CIRCULATE TO: • Laboratory Manager • Quality Control Department • Purchasing Department

BALANCES

ORDERS, SERVICE & TECH SUPPORT:

1-888-287-3732 Discounts available for bulk orders or yearly contracts!

CRYOSCOPES

pH

INCUBATORS

AIR SAMPLING

WATER PURIFICATION

www.ereinc.com

ORDERS, SERVICE & TECH SUPPORT:

1-888-287-3732

TEL

514-326-8852

E-MAIL

sales@ereinc.com

Profile for ERE Inc

Pure Sample Laboratory  

Pure Sample Laboratory  

Profile for ere-inc